@

teach
yourself
nepali
michaelhutt
ano
abhisubedi

For over 60 years, more han

40 millionpeoplhaveleamtover
750 $bjects he tch yoursel
\ /q wit impressive
resufts.
be whereyouwantto be
withteach youFelt

o
o
5
t
o

ploass
ForUKodoronquirlos:
coniact
Booleoint
Ltd,130MiltonPak,Aiingdon.
oxon.
gI1! 4SB:I0lophon8:
{44 (011 Pz|nrj. Fax.+tA(0)12354X54,Linsareopen
09.F17,00,
Monday
to Satuday,
wia 24-hou
m6asag6
answErino
s,/ice.
D s
oui ourtlssandhowt0orderareavallabls
atw,wlactwurssl.co.uk
ploas
ForUSAodr6nquiis:
conctMccaw-Hill
Customcr
Sscs.
P0Box545.
Blacldlch
0H43004{t15,USA.
TslsDhono:
1-8fl}722-4726.
Foc161+755-5645.
pleas
to Canada
ordoronquiris:
conbclMccnw-Hill
Bysrson
Ld. 300WaterS!
Wiby.onhrio,tl N986,Canada
lphone:
905,110
5i00.Far9054305@0.
LongronowEd
astheaulorihtivo
sourcrl0r sol-guldd
loaning
- ryimorean50
millioncopies
soldwoldwide
over5000slne
- o brrh yo||olls6iosincludes
fieldsofhngua06s,
cnb, hobbies,
bsinsss,
computino
andducatlon.
gtdsh
LibnryCabloguing
inPublicalion
DatuaAaguerecord
fortis titl6isa\aihble
romoBritish
Library.
UW oCwtssAhloghtd Nunberoffile.
tlrstpublished
inUKI 909byHodd6r
Education,
338EuonBoad.
London,
NWl3BH.
tirstpublished
inUS1999byhoilcGnw.Hill
Companiss,
Inc.
Thisodion
Dublished
2003.
'Tebachyosrllname
isa rooistorcd
tndenakoHoddo
Hoadline
Copyight
O 1999,
20mMlcha6l
HuttandAbhiSbdi
/n U Allrighhresorved.
Apartromanypeflnitod
useundor
UKcopyigtt
law,nopart
0l thispublicaon
maybereproducd
or lransmitbd
in aryomo W anymoans,
phobcopy,
electmnlc
0rmochanical,
including
recording,
o ayInonaion,
stonoeand
retloval
System,
wi[outpemlssion
inwilingomllepubllsr
or under
licrnce
om
theCopydght
Licenslno
Agency
Limited.
Futr
(oreprogaphtc
details
otsuchlicencss
reproduction)
maybobbined
rome Copyight
Licsnsino
Aoency
Limlbd,ofSaffron
House,
6-10 Ktv Steet,
London,
ECINfiS.
/nUSAllrightsreseryed.
Except
aspsrmitod
uMerte unitodShtsCoDViSht
Ac1ol
1976,
nopartohis bookmayborsproducd
odistibubdinanyonorWanymmns,
or sloredin a databaso
or rstieralsystem,
wihod thgpiorwienpemission
0
thDublisher
Typest
byTanset
mited,
Cownty,
Enohnd.
Printed
inGr8at
Bihinh Hodder
Educatlon,
a dision0 Hodds
Hadtins,
338Euston
Road,
London,
NWlsBH,byCox& Vvyrmn
Ltd,Readlno,
Bkhko.
Thopublishsr
lasusdtb bst0ndsavous
toensure
llat$s URLS
forexternal
vJbsfteg
eforcdb in$is bookaecooct
andactive
atte timeogoingio press.
Howe\a
ihs
publisher
andoauhorhavno responsibillty
o tle wDbsites
andcanmalcno
liveo thae cofltert
willrsmaln
rl6vat,
ouaraflhlhata sitowillremain
dcnt
or
appr0piato.
poliryis b usepapers
Hoddor
Headlineb
tat arcnatural,
renewable
andocyclaDls
products
and madsfrom woodgrownin sustainable
orests.0 loggingand
poc6sses
manulactulng
areexMedt0coform
tolheenvironmenbl
rguhtions
0the
couftyofoioin.
lmpr8sslon
numbr 10I I7 6 5
Yoar
2009200820072006

lnfoducon
1
l||. ilapallrcriptandsoundsy3hm
6
.|r youBlndu?
0l
20
I E'eng
iE btts
isand,?inNpli;
fistplonpionouns
(1 tro);second
person
()or4;
Fonoun
I an,)ouae,t{aewilhho;nons;
quesom
asking
andansrvering
2 anMng
attlv dlege
pDnouns
(r,sre,lher;
idpcrson
leis,s,s, i6,fieyrewi ho;
f,is,&af,hsse
andfiose djedives
g
02
howfrb lt to Keqmadu,brothor?
SavietKalmandu
pronouns
wilhche;all qianddherai
vey,rr]1queslioning
vods(irtorogalivss);
s simpls
sentence
1rcatandhl
po6ho6ilions:
{n,-b4a,dekhi;
people
usingrslalionship
termsto addess
03
howmaM
17
5 students
atfu lawuqe *hool
eNopali
numrals;
numbers
ofpeople
6sewWttpeanr@n

howma
ofthings;
numbes
andAnit
7Karnal
using
items;
ofportable
possession
dassmers
without
numbers
is it?
whose
I Jyoti'shatses
ndnames;
.ko,'ki,'kwilhnouns
owneship:
youknovelc
foand:ra,ani:t know,
words
theh
using
ndcat
I Batan's
using'ko,'ki, 'kwithunchanged
ov{nership
nry'your'dtt
('direct
case')pronouns;
using
ownership
one3olvnremphasizing
ki
of
usg
the
questions:
phno;asking

0l

07

08

bo tstl!s?
l0 whose
using'ko,-ki -kthchanged
ownership
interogaives:
case')ponons;
('oblique
kahko
owhaf,
keko
kaskowhose,
05

oflfrcnwhere?
whatdoYoudo?
11fl 6 andthePot
ormofveis:thehabitual
thedictionary
present
usingthehabitual
present
tnse;
tense;dhoraiiasousualy,naionly'
kahile
panialso,too,evenkahlle?when?,
of
modes
pani
nevel
kahilyal
khlsomel,imes,
'pachiafie'
newpostpositions:
tanport
for
lgi
.samma
uPto,untt'ko
12wonennthevllages
foms;
feminine
present
tense:
thehabitual
ofdaydaysoftheweeK
tmes
fequency:
Paak

09

glvem25upee6
a i*"shaw
13hiring
li
thepostposition
theimperatives;
present
tense:
thehabitual
maksr;
asobjct
fons;thepostposition
negative
altemative
paicna;
thenegative
-tiatowards;
hav?sandhuncha:
laJabut,lathough,
OK,a dght
thebest
14towtsaN villages
likesand
andsuperlatives;
comparats
parnu;
kinawhY,
man
using
dislikes
ecause
klnabhane
I cameyesteday
opsby
15Sandhya
pastforms
pasttense;e
simple
thesimple
ohuntobe;thiyoandbhayo;
and
soneone
andmovement
location
theusesof kehiandkohi
so/nefhin[
16a visitttotnShanka,'/.asad
transitive
verbs;
andintransitive
transitive
uses
verbsandthesuffix-le;further of'le;
patsofthebody
l'llgowhenl'veeat9.n
17a dayofrwork
twovebswiththesamesubjectthera
re
participle;
speech-malke
thereported
inDatieeling
encountet
18a chance
indai cha
tnses
thecontinuous
which
one?thisone!theusesofchii
partciple;
otherformsothemnjunctive
terms
relationship
ofage;further
expressions

't0

11

12

13

14

inthematet
19outshowing
needed
alldavailablet
hinu andpinu;
of
oodvocabulary;
using.liinstead
lgi
-ko
it seemsfineto me
n a pbceto stayinf\ahnandu
theuseofnouns
withlgnu;
feelings:
usingadjectives
howdoyoulkeNepal?
passive
more
ves;srim,i'a
o
th lgnu;
making
adjectives
into
adverbs
iasto;
rirhero
hashegone?
21a latestaft
present
the
themmpleted
tense;
stating
timeodayusing
bajyo
2 whicllcounes
haveyouvisited?
pasttense;
speech
themmpleted
reporting
t was:
usingbhanra;
because
it i8,because
the-eko
theako participle
with-le;using
participle
ordinal
numbers
asanadjective;
dearRaiu..,
B anexchange
of lefte
theko participle
sa verb;
using
orhearing
howlongisit snce...?:seeing
person's
the-ekopticiple
another
actions;
thoughts
andintentions
uiithhoorhoina;
usingbhenea
andbhaneko:
whatdoes
year
hrbwordnear?theNepali
if it rains...
24outtrcknng
ralconditional
sentences;
using
holto
meanperhaps,
nit be;the-neparticiple
the-neparticiple
asanadjective;
using
totalkabout
futureaclionsi
theverb
p[gnutoaffive,suffice

14

t!

l'll go ne y3ar

193

25goinghomef Dasain
theprobable
fuluretense;theininive
+
lgnu:t hat doesit costto...?howbng
doesit taketo...? wotdsfo apprcxinW

148

t!

whatshouldI do?

202

aivingat Tibhuvanlnternational
Aitpott

17

must,should,don'thaveto, nust,hadto,
theverbsmilnuandmilunu
you'rcnotallowedin

211

27Anedcansat Pashupati
tenpte

58

is ta ight to...?usingiheininitiv
with
huncha/hiidaina;
theydon'tallowyouto...i
bhaeabe,'i?g
andbhaen pani despite
being,
eligion
in Nepal

I canleamNepali

219

fr hownany knguagescanyouspeak?
to beableto...:toget to,nanageto,
describing
a verb;to /emto, feac,fo;
lo !anlo...;verbsmeaning
to believe

173

at thedocto/s

227

I Wani vtsilske doctor

purpose;
expressing
beginning
to dosomelhing;
afierdoingsomelhing;
re embering
and
fogelting;beforedoingsomething:
postpositions
beginning
with-bhand

20
83

21

the mapot llepal

238
& 0v napof Nepal
usingpamwithlocaons;
above,
belov
eyond
morepostposions
beginning
with
.bhand;
theuseobhanne
lo meanramed
theuseofbhann
lo meanItE
I usodtosmoke
2Ii
31badhabits
thehabitual
pastlnse;
finishing,
stopping,

12

13

-f
tl

afretdoiv
inmediately
quitngi
whiledoing,
b'
wishing'
willhaveto,usedtohave
hoping
anddeciding
shallI maketea?
P can@ingtte teaPanY
doing
may,?verbsinthesubjuncve;
peson:
verDs
colnpound
foanotter
somelhing

II
=

withdinq tyingndseeking
if he'dtkenlhmedicine
g a deahntheneighboulnod
@nloundverbsh saknu;
done:
aheadY
theshort
sentences;
conditional
unreal
present
ealizaton:
tense;
completed
attheendosenlences;
usingrahecha
thevei clnnufoknow,tore@gnize
i thafshowit i8...
anda to @ng
34twoPofte
verbswithhlnu;continuous
compound
usinglahanu;shotrelconditional
tenses

Welcometo TeachYourselNepali
Nopali is a member of the Indo-Aryan group of laguagesthat
Includesmost of the languagesof e northem half of the Indian
aub-continent.Theselnguagesarc derivedfrom Sanshit in rnuch
tho eameway that e EuropeanRomancelanguagesarc derived
ftom Latin, and eachhas developedits own distinctive chamcter
ovcr thecourseof manycenturies.Nepali is e lingua ftancaof the
ccntsalndeastemHimalaya,and the nationallanguageof NepI.
l is alsorecognizedby the Indian Constituonasa major language
of India becauseof its dominancein Sikkim and e Darjeeling
district of West BengI. Bhutan promotes the use of its own
national language, Dzongkh4 but therc too Nepali is widely
spokenandunderstood.

senGnces
appendices
numbers
cardinal
tens
kinship
keyio xercises
glossary
Npali+ngllsh
glossary
EnglisH'lepali

2U
302
322

Nepalis oneofthe world's mostlingstically variegatedcountries;

morethan40 differentlanguas havebeenrecorded.Justoverhalf
the populationhasNepali as its mothertongue:the mother-tongue
Nepali-speakersare prirnarily the higher caste and pocally
dominantBuns (Brahmins)and Cheais. Most of the rest of the
populationspeakseither Indo-Aryan languagessuch as Maithili,
Bhojpuri, Awadhi andHindi, or Tibeto-Burmanlanguagessuchas
Tibetan,Tamang,Newai, Gurng,Mga,Rai andLimbu. The use
of theselanguageswas discourageduntil 1990,when a democracy
in grantingsomeights to Nepal's linguistic
movementsucceeded
minorities.However,the level of bilingualism with Nepali is now
very high in mostpartsof e kingdom.
This book is designedto enableose with no previousknowledge
of Nepali to pogess to a point wherc they cl communicate

CL

tr

o
t
o
II

canats-o^:L
effectively in Nepali on a rangeof everydaytory T9
a range o
has
Nepali
ani write e language.Like every language'
who has a
hillfarmer
A
els of sophiscation'
ttvi",
iif".*
the same
"O
use
ny
tongue
hnguage as his mothe
itb;;;-B*
poteness'
of
levels
and
for ai genders'numbers
u"O
"nOin* N"paliis a workadaylin-langugethatenables.him
u".""t. t"t.
languagesas rneu
to communicatewith peope who have other
will use variousurbanite
o,frer,ongu". ln contrast.an educated
andSenderof
number
the
upon
*r""n dependnot only
lso on now
but
verbs'
"*u'"dt
the
e subiectsperforminge actionsof
the royal
inside
Meanwhite'
pijr t. .i"".* to L aboutem'
(not
vocabulary
honorific
ancl
nalacea cornpletelynew set of verbs
coveredhere!) comesinto PlaY'
Nepalispekers
Bv andlase,e Nep in this book is at which
arc introduced'
at
in tle vaious situations
;J.;t;lf;;;*i"tstv
moe
towards
err
Where choices arise, however, we
-the
speakers
Nepali
some
srdmmaticallvcorrect. While acceptingat
we tKe
"would
not makethe samechoicesin everydayconvesatron'
exceptions
the
leaming
i i, Uetterto leam rules before
,ft"
only a
"i",ft"
Similarly,the languageof is book admits
*f"t.
io-,nor.
Nepall-sPeaxers
many
handful of English words' although
vocabulary
in te capitatl do make free use of English
ipJ*r.y
in their conversation.

How to use the book

ftom one to
The book is divided into 24 units' Ech unit contains
a dialogue'thereis an
OtL G"fl Aial"gt"s (in Unit 13, insteadof
fou units
* in unit 20 a prosepassase)'In the fist
;;.-;;;;;i
(the scnpr m wmc.n
a[ of e Nepli aPPeasin bo Devanagari
Each dialoguers
Nenati is wdtten)-and Roman translieraon'
tbe new vocabularyit contains'and a
;;";
i;i;;iy
"ontaining
*"tlation. Eachdialogu"T p^:"c: it .to1!:"ill^1
;;;;;J
rncludtng
sectionoi mor. detaiJedgrammaticalexplanation
l*":
glvenat tneenq
is
exercise
to
each
key
The
examplesandexercises'
ni,tt" b*k' follo*ed by a completeend vocabulary'
the Devanagaiscript
You shouldbegin by leamingthe charmtersof
Although the book can be usedon its own'
be
of the soun of each character can onlv
-,it"pi.ti*i"on;;;;

book
,fte cssettethat is availableto accompanythe
"pp-" -O

*lll ha ol'jroot help to you in developingaccumtepronunciationat

af,trly itllgc.
You muychoosehow to pProacheachunit: you might wish to lern
th dlll;guc and its meaningist by hearing nd epeatingit, and
thln woik through the translation and e gramrnar section to
und6ritandwhy it meanswhat it does;ltemtively,you might prefer
lo work ihroughthe grammarsectionfiIst and then tum back to e
dloktgucto seethe grammarin action,asit were.Whicheverway you
tppoachachunit, it is importartnot to move on unl you have:
a mortcrcde dialogue;
a fully digested the gramma section and the examples it

conteinsi
l68medall nelv vocabulary;
completedthe exercisesandcheckedthem againstthe key;
rcpeatedthe exercisesif ey were not correctthe fist time'
jagonItc grammaticalexplanationsarc intendedto be asclearand
frcc possible,althoughit is not possibleto explaine structuesof
r languagewiout using somegrarnmaticalterminology' The book
cenntclui- to cover every featureof Nepali, but it doescontainl
of the most commonverb constructionsand a basic vocabularyof
rome 1600words.It will equip you with what you needto speaknd
n:ad, and if you connuewith Nepali after you have masteredthis
book your voculary and your familiarity with more complex
consEuctionswill gmw very qckly. As well as helping you to
masiertheNep language,the dialoguesarealsointendedto provide
you wi an insight into Nepali cultureanddily life'
The authorsof is book wish you all the very bestin your efforts to
leame Nepali language.

Fuherreading
Oer begirmers'coursesin Nepali includeTika B. Karki andChij K
Shresais Basic Course in Spoken Nepali (Kathmandu, various
editions)andDavitl Matthews's Coursem Nepai(London,School
of Oriental and African Studies,1984).The filst of thesehas been
used for many years to teach Nepli to PeaceCorps volunteers
without introducinge Devanagariscript.The secondadoptsa more
academicapproachand also intoducesmore complex grammatical
structures.

Onceyou havecompletedTeachYounel Nepai,you might wish to

moveon to the later units of the Matthewscourseto supplementyour
understandingof Nepali grammar.You will also find the following
textbooks useful: M.K. Verma and T.N. Sharma's Intenediate
Nepali StructueandInternediateNePaIieader,both publishedby
Manohar Publishersin New Delhi in 1979; and Michael Hutt's
Modem Litary Nepali: an Intoductory Reader, pubshed by
Oxford University Pressin New Delhi in 1997.
The best Nepali-Engshdictionary currently on e market is
Praccal Dictionary of Modem Nepali, produced by an editorial
board headedby Ruth Laila-Schmidtandpublishedby RatnaSgar
Pubshersin New Delhi in 1993.Ralph Turner's celebratedNepali
dictionary, first publishedin 1930,was rePrintedin India ir 1981;
this is a work of immenseinteest,but is perhapsa little forbidding
for a beginnerin the language.
Pradyumna P. Karan and Hiroshi Ishii's Nepal: a Himalayan
Kingdom in fansirion (United Nations UniYersityPress'1996)is a
good introductionto all aspectsof the country, while Jan Salterand
Harka Gurung's beautifully illustrated book FacesofNepal Qlirnal
Books, Kamandu, 1996) describesthe cultures of Nepal's many
ethnic goups.
For English translationsftom modemNepali erature,seeMichael
Hnlt's Himalayan Voices: an Intoduction to Modem Nepali
Litentue (University of Califomia Press,1991); for a desiptive
accountof te history of Nep terature,seeAbhi Subedi'sNepali
Literatre: Backgoand and Hisrory (SajhaPublishers,Kathmandu,
1978).

Acknowledgements
The authorswish to thank GovindaGiri Prerana,Bindu Subediand
Jobn Whelpton for their invaluable commentsand suggesonson
vaious sections and drafts of e book, and the Researchand
Publications Committee of the School of Oriental and African
Studiesfor facilitating this collaboraon.We are lso gateful to
SubhasRai for providing us th e drawings that illustrate a
numberof the dialogues.

Abbrevlations& symbols
M
L
ll
Q
A

l .
f,
rJ,tlc.

nritldlc(case)
hrw (cuse)
high(case)
quc$tion
unswer
rtutement
masculine
lbminine
pa.rticiple
conjunctive

Dr
Er.
Yr.
Mat.
Pat.
bro
sis
D
S

docto
elder
younger
matemal
patemal
brother
sister
daughter
son

Cl llags thosepassagesthat you can listen to on the recoding that

thisbook.
rccompanies
Vmrbulary boxes follow each dialogue. Use these to make sure
you'vcunderstood
thedialogue.
Tho exercises,throughoute book, give you plenty of opportunity
aoprsctisethe Nepali languagepoints as you leam.
Tho grammar sectiongives a clear explanationof the grammatical
lrrucsexploredin thatchapter.

t-l
tl
tIr

ITT

o
z
o

rl
fr

Eu
6ti
Fy

'

qt
-

o
o
-a

!t-1+
0,

CL
-l

o
o
tr

5
CL

o
a
1+

El wft* you have read through this section, listen to the

recording,so at you can hear e vowels and consonantsof e
Devanagariscript.
Nepali is written in the Devangari (or 'Nagari') script, which is
lso used for Hindi, Sanslcit and Marathi, with only minor
modificationsbeing madeto accommodatethe specialfeaturcsof
e Nepali sound system.Devanagariis a phonetic script, which
means that lmost every word is pronouncedexacdy as it is
written: leaming a charactermeans also leaming a sound. The
system is comprised of three kinds of characters:vowels,
consonants,andconjunctchancters.Therere o capitlletters.

Vowels
The Devanagariscripthas 11 vowels.Every vowel except3{ has
two symbols.The first symbolis the full form of the vowel, called
the vowel character.This is usedwhene vowel is the f[st letter of
a word or syllable,and whenit follows anoer vowel. The second
s'.rnbofis the vowel sign,wllich is usedaftera consonant,i.e. when
e vowel is e secondlenerof a syllable.The alphabetbeginswith
the vowels,andthe vowel charactersarc shownopposite.

Consonants
The Devanagari scipt has 33 consonants. The traditional Indian
system very helpfully orders consonants according to the way they
are pronounced, and they are listed hee in alphabetical order. Each
of the first five groups of consonants has as its final member a
nasal consonant (a consonant pronounced through the nose).

$e
q.

al

au

like e 'a' in aga but like the ,o, in por whenit

follows a labial consonant(a consonant
ponouncedon the lips)
ike the 'a' in faer
like the 'ee' in fee4 rarely like the ,i' in fui
like the 'ee' in fee
like e 'oo' in f@ raely like tlhe'u' in p
tike tJrc,oo' in food
ke e 'ri' n nip, ripple (only occursin words
bonowedftom Sanshit)
like the fint pat of the vowel soundin raade
like the 'oy' soundin oy or the 'i, soundin qurre
like e first pat of the vowel soundin ole
like the 'ow' soundin cow

Brch Devanagaricharacteris followed by a Roman transteration

which consistsof the consonantfollowed by the letter a. This is
bccause,in the sence of any other vowel sign, eachconsonantis
hold to contain e inheent q a vowel. BecauseeachDevanasari
consonanteefore comesto rcpresenta syllle, somescholarsiall
thc Devanagarisystem a 'syllabary' rather than an .alphabef. In
words that end in a consonant,the inheent a of e final letter is
rcmetimespronounced,but is more often silent. This final a will
appearin transterationonly whenit is to be pronounced.
Two impoant contraststlat exist in Nepali, but not in,English,
should be pointed out. The fist is between aspiatd ald-non_
,rpfaed consonants,the secod betwen deital
,)rloflex
^nd
consonants.
. Aspiatedconsonantsare pronouncedwith a strongexpulsion
of breath,while non-aspiatedconsonantsarepronouncedwith
only minimal breath being expelled. The amount of breth
expelledduring the pronunciationof an Engshconsonantis
usually somewherebetweeDese two extremes.so discinline
is required to leam the Nep way: less breath than normal
while uttering a non-aspiatedconsonant,much more breath
than normal while utteing an aspiratedone. Hold a minor in
front of your face as you practise,and comparethe extent to
which it cloudsup in eachinstance!Or put a hand in front of

your mouth to feel the difference.Take care lso to utter each

aspirateconsonntasa singlesound:althoughthe secondletter
of'e Rom"n tt"nsliteration of Devanagaiaspiratesis 'h" this
is thereto indicatethe expulsionof breath,not to suggestmat
thee e two sePatesounds.
. To ponounceNepali words correctly, it is also importnt to
dif:erentiate between dental consonnts and retroflex
consonants,and most paticularly betweendental ta and la
and retroflex fa and a For dental consonantse tongue
should touch the back of e upper front teeth' for retroflex
consonantsit shoulclbe curledback up againstthe roof of the
moutlt. For the English 'f and 'd' the tongue is held
somewherebetweenthesetwo positions,which soundslike a
to
retroflex to a Nep-speker's er' Learnerstherefoeneed
they
work harder to pronounce dental consonants thn
do to pronounceretroflex ones,thoughthey often imaginethe
opposite.

Velaro guttural consonants(pronouncedin ths throat)

r
q
rT
q
s.n

asthe 'k' in sld

k
kha aska but v/ith strongreleaseof breath
g
asthe 'g' in go
of breath
Cha sga but wi a strongrelese
asthe 'n' in sixg

Palatal consonants (ponouncd at the palate or the

uppr gum-line)
q

ca

cha

q
q
5T

ja
,"
ia

like the 'ch' in cheese,but with lessreleaseof

breathandpronouncedth the tip of the
tonguetouchingthe lowe ftont teeth
somewherebetweenthe 'ch' in ceeseandthe 'ts'
in sar,pronouncedwith a strongreleaseof breath
asthe I' in jug
asja but with a strongreleaseof breath
se 'n' in i;nJurY

dtsll oonlonant8 (pronouncsdwith the tongue curled

baok lo louoh tho Palato)
likc the 't' in sop,but with the tongueculed up
lr
to touchthe roof of e mouth
ust but with strongrcleaseof breath
I
llu
f
whenthe first letet of a syllable:asrc 'd' n dug
{r
but with thetongueculed up to touchthe roof of
e mout
in themiddle or at the end of a word: as lhe
'r' in rug, but with e tonguecurledup to
touch the roof of the mouth
I
dhs asda but with a strongreleaseof breath
0l
like e 'n' in and, but wi the tonguecurled up
0a
to touchthe roof of the mouth

(pronounced
withthe tonguetouchingor
Oantllconsonants
font
teeth)
oloa. to th6 upper
ta

rt
r

u
i

tha
da
dha
na

like the 't' in p, with the tip of the tongueaginst

the back of e uPPerfont teeth
asta but wi a strongeleaseof breath
ase 'd' in dtp
asda but with strongreleaseof breath
asthe 'n' in mp

on the liPs)
Leblalconsonants(pronouncd
q
'p'
in
pa asthe
Po
ph aspa but with strongreleaseof breath;often
S
E
q

ba
bha
ma

like e 'f in farer

ase 'b' in bud
asba but with a strongeleaseof breath;
sometirneslike a breay 'v' asin driver
asthe 'm' in mud

Semi-vowels
4
{

ya
ra

FT

la

va

kg
tt' ka
{ ko
|Fk!

ase 'y' in yes

like e 'r' in u, but pronouncedwith a trill of
the tongue,not on th lips
like the 'l' in ,ot, but pronouncedwi the tongue
further forward
prcnouncedeitherasthe 'b' in budor asthe 'w'
rn tvose

T
tI
{

a
a
sa

ha

ska
ri ka

tF ka

+
+

ci k

6t

fr

3u

rF

:[

l
ge
q,ar
'

rtau

k
k
ki
laku
k
kg
ke
kai
ko
ku

asthe 'sh' in srun,but alsofrequendypronounced's'

asthe 'sh' in srun,but alsofrequenypronounced's'
asthe's'in sun

Aspirateconsonant

3TI
al

+
+

{i ka
{ka

Sibilant ('hissing')consonants

qa

+
+
+

1k

as the 'h' in ug

Script exercise 1 Make a flash card for eachcharacter,with e

Devanagariletter on e front and the Romntransliterationon e
back.Use theseto help you memorizeeachcharacter.
Script exercise 2
Devanasai:

Write out the following Nepali words in

jhan
chad
rara
calan
dhaval

thap
jar
ahar
ma
lay

saral
bkhat
ga+a
!a!h
dhab

bhavan
yas
dak
ghar
pa4la

kanal
lhaC
nabh
phat
alh

had

qar
vas
rath
khatam

Constructingsyllables
Every vowel except 3Ta has a vowel sign which is added to a
consonntto form syllable. The E a vowel is ierent in the
consonantitself. When a vowel other than 3I a is dded to a
consonant,it automaticllyreplacese 3l vowel. Vowel signs are
attachedto the consonant{ k in the following ways:

A vowel sign is generally attached to e stem or downstroke of a

consonant - to the foot of e downstroke in the case of g u. . and
f f, to the head of the downstroke in the case of g e and ai. as an
0dditionaldownsrroke attchedby a loop to e head of the stem in
the cases of i and i, and as an additional downstroke with or
without exta elements in the casesof i{T , * o, and a au. + ka is a
tingle-stemmed consonant, but some consonants have two
downstrokes, and in such cases the vowel sign must be attached to
the right-hand member of the pair. The consonant rI ga is an example:

ITITfiT.fr { { T.q
ga

gr

gi

gu

gf

ge

gai g
gau
'Ihe consonant{ ra is an exceponto thesegeneral
mles when it takesthe
vowel signs _ -u and -. Instead of attaching these to the foot of the
- allow
downsaoke,you shdd
{hem to nestlehigher up in e crook of e
chamcter:

+
.r

3
q

=
=

dru
Sr

A consonant can only suppo one vowel at a time. In words in which

one vowel follows directly after another, the second vowel must
nlways appear as a full vowel character. Thus, to wite the word d
(two) yon musl write du tollowed by i in ils tull form:
{
{t.
Similarly, nole e spellings Ur: khu. rr gm, and g lie.

Script exercise 3
Devanagari:
lutapit
ausadhi
khicadi
itainu
oCar
sital
ili
4a"l

lvrite out the following Nepali words in

bemausam
bhautik
dob[o
janat
bJhat
jhilimili
ytyt
eghra

l)o vnnagari:
aghunu
risunu
Cu4h
yi
phladaru
taipani
m
lar

ghm
ain
hariyo
nakh
guro
bhailo
thego

anau$ro
de
ukusamukus
chotaka.ri
Sadr
viq
iSn

Nasalization
Every vowel can be nasalized.To pronouncea nasalizedvowel,
direct as much as you can of the breath that is involved in its
pronunciation towards the nasal cavity. In Nepali, nasalizationis
indicatedby a sign culledqqf+< candrabindu (literally, moon dor),
whose namedescribesits appeanncewell: -. ln Romanansliteration, nasalization is representedby a lde over the vowel
(e.g.).
The qqid< candrbindu is written either over the nasalizedvowel
itseli e.g. '-{fkah, or abovethe consonantto hich the vowel is
attached,e.g.rf gar, { nn. If any part of e vowel is written above
theheadstroke,e qqt{< candrabindu is reducedto its {< bindu
or 'dot', e.g. chdi, q gar.
In someNepali words it is customryto repesentnasalizationnot
wi the qqfu< cndrabindu but with a conjunctof which the lrst
member is one of the nasal consonants.The two most common
combinationsare:
g n+
.5.n +

D Scrlpf exercise4 write out the buowingNepaliwordsin

{ka=$ika
rI
=
g

q.

iga

Thus, certainwords can be spelledin two different ways: tfoo

or S ftflftge; r5rr gurg or TE guruirg. The conjunctstend to be
usedin wordsthaarefelt to be uniqueto thelanguage,whib q<tcE
candrabindu is used in words at Neoali shares with Hhdi.
Sanskrit,etc.

h
I0chu
pIc

8ururg

cnaya
in
lo
chrg

g
tapi
ssr
ang

naya
diin
ga
mnri

ga
Jaqarna
aKna

Conjunctcharacters
Thc spellings of many Nepali words involve the combination or
clusteringof two or moreconsonants;thesecombinationsareknown
gBconjuncts.By joining two consonantsin this way, you cancelout
thc inherentq a betweenem.
Ccrtain combinationsproduce what are in effect new chaacters
rather than recognizable combinations of their constituent
consonants.
Thesespecia,lconjunctsae listed below:
Special conjunct characters
q$a
=
trka
+
qJa
+
=
ia
IIa+{a=sTSIa
ita+(ta=(tta
(ra
=
iTta
+
<ds+rlya=qdya

,che,)
cTk$a(ofupronounced
.rya')
tja (pronounced

ba

Half characters
More than half of all the conjunctsareformed simply by dropping a
downstrokefrom the frst memberand thenjoining what remainsto
e full form of e secondmember.For instance,to produce the
conjunctSta, consistingof e consonantsrTga andq ya, removethe
gcconddownstrokeof rI ga to producer and addis to the full form
of q ya to producee conjunctrq.
The following table shows all the half chaacters.followed bv
cxamplesof ways in which they arecombinedwith full charactersto
form coniuncts.

Fu[l chaacor

1k
q
q

rI
q
q

!T

kta
kha
ga
gha
ca
ja
jha

tr

(
rT
I

q
16
q
T

tts
rha

E
It
q
TT

dha
n
pa
pha
ba
bha
nta
ya
l
va
5s
ta
sa

Half charactcrExamples

ffi kka, rckkha, kts

c
e{km& F{kfya
q khya, q khna" c6 kha
c
r{I g:ya,Iq gla, r{ gva
r
E
EEghcha,ETghna,q ghya
?
o

;
t
q
+
r
r,

s
G
(

q9 CCna. Dq Cya
'q CCa.
vq
Jya, vq JYa
""r IJa.

g jhys, FJhda, E ihn

?q ncg, IUa
!-a, !-+a, qt{ +ya
tma, itl tya, R tsa
iq ftva
qthya
sE dhcha,sI dhya, t;{ dhva
(nt&<ndra,nh
q pha, q ppa, c{ psa
rF phna
qbja"<bda"qbba
T bhya
E !nnA,rq nFa"I mha
qwa
ffi'lks" ?<lda, lla
aI vya
{t 6ya,qnT6|l,r* Svg
q ha,wr Sna,I ya
F'ska, sta,<st

The halar
If e diagonal stroke called {sd halant is placed at the foot of a
consonant,it rcmovesits inheent3Ia" {ilRl halant is usedregularly
in verbs,but very rarely in oer words.It is also usedto show that a
conjunct exists betweentwo consonantswhosejoining cannot be
representedin any other way. The round or oval characterse, , s, d,
E cannotdop a downstrokendremainrecognizable.For this reason,
if they are the first memberof a conjunct they will keep their full
form and thejunction will be effectedby the qri hhnt e.g.

lda+
Els+
6lha+
ta+

sd
Eda
IT

na

CCa

{{
{q

tda
thna

Ftra

Oonlunctscontainingthe consonant( ra
Whcn( ra is the first memberof a conjunctcombinaon,it takesa
hrm known as n rcph, which is a hook ( " ) written above the
h^rdStroke
of the secondmemberof the conjunct combination,e.g.
lglrch, tf gan. If a vowel sign follows the consonantto which
n is beingjoined, e t' reph sign^mustmove-to the righ-,i.e. to
thocnd of the syllable it precedes:rr<gard, Tfr bhorti, q garne.
Whcn t ra is the fust memberof a conjunct of which e second
mcrnberis c ya, it is written insteadas a curved dash:r garyo,
qrn paryo.
Whcn < ra is the secondmember of a codunct it is written as
dhgonal slashdown ftom the left of e lower part of the downstroke
of the fust rnemberof the conjun* {r* rmm, g{ ugra. If the fust
momberof the conjunct has two stems,the diagonal slashwill be
rddedto therihand stem.If e first membeof the conjunctis an
oval or round consonant,a slightly differcnt form is tlsed:g Cra, q
ftr. Note also the forms g sra, Q;hra, T Sra.

Other special cases

If the secondmemberof a conjund is q ya andthe fist memberis a
ruboflex consonant,the zIya takesa specialform (V):
4t+rya=iltya
cd+qya=sq{ya
Conjunctsat consistof two identical retroflex consonantsmay be
Fpresentedwith the charactersarrangedvertically, e.g.

f+

tz

=l ta

The consonants< da andq ha fonn the following specialconjuncts:

qdr +
rTga = Fdga
= hra
Qha + (ra
qd +
= hva
<da = qdda
+
va
{ha
qds +
qdhi = d ddha
= hla
i
+
la
{ha
qda +
.r qma = ghma
rTbha = I dbha (ha
(dr
= ddva
+
va
h + na = lna

El S".ipt exercise 5 write out e followingNepaliwordsin

Devanagari:
jan
kakf
matt
divya
sakdaina
subb
pakk
a44
drya
kf.a
bhaffjyg pacyat
kthmdapadhyo
greji
dhvani
trak
ujjval
dvar
drava

natra
laksya
6abda
jhyl
pradhn

Snmn
hni
bhgya
phro
padati

hlas
garchin
hapt
pnyaKnu
bharyan

vidy
Snti
thatl
amro
viSva

garthyo
vrendra
kvppa
a+4
arambh

khelcha
bujhnu
prakhyt
utqqta
rstra

klyo
mvat
icch
tava
svasthya

garyo
kv
acyt
tm
hissi

Visarga
Visarga is a sign like a colon (but with its dots further apart) that
occurs at the end or in the middle of certain words. It is pronounced
as ha and is ransliterated as l.l. The ody word in this book at
requies visarga is :q dubkha.

Numerals
tlt8 l,({u tt.

rll

c
q
q

rr

T
e
ai
o
au

frk
{
kh
{ga
gha
S
sa||a
qcq
6
cha
Ej a I
qjha
q a tT
eF5

In Sanskit, the language fiom which Nepali originally developed,

consonants are always pronounced with theft inherent 3 a unless
qrT helant is there to cancel it out. In Nepali, however, this is no
krnger the rule. The {d< halant is used only to mark the absenceof
0 lnal 3f a at the end of certain verb endings where without it some
smbiguity of meaning could arise, or to mark e absence of e
inherent 3 a between two consonnts that cannot be conjoined to
form a conjunct in any other way. Otherwise, some words that end in
A consonant but no vowel sign are pronounced v,/ith a final 3 -,
whereasothers are not. Alough the best way to lern pronunciation
h by hearing Nepali words spoken, certain rules can be discemed
hcre.
The following categories of words should usually be pronounced as
they are wdtten (i.e. with e inherent q a unless this is cancelled out
with the d<I halant):

-tim;
3 repetitiveonomatopoeic
words:(it slalala;

Dictionaryorder
a
d

Stressand accent

t verb forms, where e Fi halnt is used whenevernecessaryto

cancel e inherent q a: <qt aiera. Tn gara. rfti( garchan. va-o1
pa{hchan:
2 most adverbs and postpositions: l( tra, qrfl{( bhira, erM ja, fu{

The Nepali numeralsare asfollows:

1'hc nasalizedform of a vowel alwaysprecedesits unnasalizedform

In the dictionary order: us, words beginning with f wi come
bcforc words beginning with {, words beginning wi t before
wordsbeginningwith T, etc.

s
l

fha
{a
dha
4a
ta
tha
da
dh
na
pa
pha

qba
I
qma
qya
a
ql a
qva
sIS a

ssa
{sa
Qha

bha

rTm,dta:
4 wordsofonesyllable:
5 wordswhosefinal syllableis a conjunct:6f karma, $rfi bhakta;
6 mostwords endingin a semi-vowel:rf{ maha, fE iva.
An ierent -a is usuallynot pronounced:*
I at the endof postpositionsof two or moresflables that ae vr'ritten
as sepaatewords (i.e. that are not joined to e noun or pronoun
they follow): sa samet,qfi bhek;
2 in words (oer thanverbs)consistingof Cv-Ca:+ din, or V-Ca:
qq ad;
3 in words (other than vertrs)consistingof Cv-Cv-Ca:c| nep|,

fr+'nrnftes,f+arskitU

4 in wordsconsistingof Cv-Ca-Cv-Ca,whereboth medial andfinal

q a a dropped: FFiqTkinrnel, r{{ khJbal, iG|l-t tarvr.
{FkIlatpa
* Qv = syllableconsisngof consonant+ anyvowel (includingr a).
Ca = syllableconsistingof consonant+ 3Ta.

Scriptexercise
3
!z+a
{ffir
irqq
Itfq
cr{

mrrd

Punctuation
Devanagarinow employs all of e punctuation symbols used in
English,with the exceptionof the full stop.This consistsinsteadof a
single downstroke:l

hnfr
c

q{q
qiil{
ffi
qq-{r

.{qlc
ftqreq
116

{d

"
Tqqrfr

qttrc
qrrp

3lrqr
sc'.

{c
H
.
qmq

lrr
ffir{
{rrr<
qF'

fufufufu qA

Tn
cr

t{tT{

Gn

s+

{rfl-r
"n
E { l l .l

Scriptexercise4

Samplesof Nepalihandwriting
ffr ,,-*& g-Ta;aa &{ 3ll -"rer
-*rt*
s-r&. A4 6q",rE4ql

:f gp lh .a1i-ta.e {iia Ldo-J rnqi fit sd { u r

dd

-nr.*

Erq
q|{

clq
qr

ffi
Ersr

"r
qET

Tr
a-{{

qpr
sr<

IFFFT

{ST

Ttlr

$c

FTTT
!Fr

Srrq1tr c-1r1 .rfr

rqqr rd
fr{

61v w+,6k6* 61

r{fr

EffiiT

rq

Key to script exercises

ScriDtexercise2
g{
6<
l(

(a{

qq

{rki
rrq

{a
srfl

flt{
q{

.t{I

({F[

snrr
qit{

-6q

rf

E
TKFT

.r
qc
qqr

Scriptexercise5

,fr{n

aalt {ftn rr{ ar+l r;t

or nr .rnc< 'rent

It
tnfg

dfr

6rqr

.@
Kr

qrc

wE

c-dfr-

q-qrq

s<

*|Fq

F@TII

fi(rt

siTq
{t1

ir

t|{r

Er r l
rrq

rrc-
I{r

{r

snfu
5

{r*
tff{

.r+
*n
srqki

dr"{

3ifaq

Ftrp:rl

E I Meetingthe bus

-.q'

q.
.-,

-..{

&l/
1l

Jl
rl
'*

Cita and Bindu, two young women from Hetauda, have iust arrived
ln Kathmandu ro take up their college courses. BimJ Kuma, a
flcnior male student, has been sent to meet them.

trqdrsR
rq r
lllmal Kumr namste!
Hello!

o
c

rfrn
(;Ir

Pardon?
;sQrffirfi-616ir
fff.TqR
lllmal Kumr nmaste!timi Git hau?
Hello! Are you Gita?

II

CL
C
.

In this unit you will loarn

. how to identiryyourselfand
others
. how to ask and nswer
simplequgstions
. how to xchangegreetings
. how to addrsspople
politely
. how to apply adjectivesto
nouns

tirr
(;It

l.rwfrqR

{g{ ?
hajur?

$,rflor{ rrr r
ho, ma Gitii h. namaste.
Ye$ I am Gita. Helio.

+<ft.fr5qr

lllmsl Kumr ni tim Bindu hu?

And areyou Bindu?

qg{,.rE
|
Bindu

hqiur, ma Bindu h.
Yes,I an Bindu.
q, rqtdFqTqr{ |
Bimal Kumr la, rmro. ma Birnal Kumr h.
PJght,good. I am Bimal Kumar.
Bindu

fi f{r< Tqrcft dqr<;i 696;o t

namash Bimal Kumrji! tapi sancai
hunuhuncha?
HelIo Bimal Kumarji! Are you well?

Bimal Kumr sanci.timrhr ni?

I am well. How aboutyou?
fl

*jr q ! c9 t5 t{ r 1
.t.t9 l

Gir

sancai! tapi 6ikak hunuhuncha?

We are well. Are you a teacher?

f*qqSqR
q,-lt r
fq, t ++nff
{ rfi-6sqA ffi
Binal Kumr hoina, ma dyrtl h. tim!-hr pani vidyhi
hau, hoina?
No, I am a stdent. You ae studentstoo. aren't vou?

qg{,qr{-{Fqffi r
hajur.hmiharpanidyhi h.
Yes, we ae students too.

!namaste! tleJlol
(Hindu geeng,alsousedfor
goodbye)
qt1hajur? yes?pardon?
frtfr...ti hau? yo are... o are
you...'l
ho yes (literally, is)
q...ma...h 1an...
qf< au and
{ hajur yes
E la thee!o that'sit!
{r* iimro good

I c and are in Nepali

ln lirrglish you say that someing or someone.rs large, or is a
l|llliccnan, or is in Kathmandu. But in Nepali a distinction is made
hclwccntwo different kinds ofis, and in the plural betweentwo kinds
r' ln'. Thesetwo forms are:
E 'l'hc * ho form which normally defines the thing or person you arc
tnlking about with a noun:
|n*t*
1 rlrT,rqT
f I

r rft-fi-es1
t

sinu

Orammar

t{T{Tqr. Bimal Kumji -ji is

addedto his namefor politeness*
t= sancai well, in good health
(qq...{ ? tapi hunuhuncha
you afe...ot aeyo...?
lal 2 whatabout...?
ffid timftar you (plural)
rFr Sikqakteacrer
fi hoina ro (litemlly, r'srot)
q pad oo, also
ffi
dyhi shtdent,students
{ ? hoina? is that not so?
n{...dhDihaii-, ha we.. are

* Some Nepali-speakers add the suffi]( -"{

-jy to names instead. The
sufnx fr -ji is common to both Hindi and Nepali.

prahan ho.
yo klhmda ho.

He is a policeman.
This is Kathmandu.

h Thc g cha form which describes with an adjective, or locates a

lhing or person:
.'
1,
t; qirqrrqr
--
E |

tyo lhlo cha.

Tharis bg (describing).
khmdam cha. He ,s JI(_m)
Kathmandu (locaring).

ll you wish to say that someing is large you must use 6 cha for rs.
hccuuseyou ae describing it; if you wish to say thar someoneis in
Klthmandu, you must again use o cha for is, because vou are
locutingem:-but if you wish to statethar someoneis u poii.".y-oumust use $ ho for is, because you are defining him. cha and
t ho have different forms, depending on whi of e Nepali
pronouns (the words for l. we, you. he. she.t and eyt is eir
iuhject. These forms are intoduced in e pagesat foll.

2 Firstpersonpronounslr,tye)
Thefirst personpronounsareq ma land 6rfr hami we.ffi hami we
ir sometimes
usedro meanIin placeof ma. thoughnot with the
pomposityof theEngli 'royalwe'. Whenit is necessary
to makeit
uhsolutely
clearthatTfrhmr-is intendedto meanwejn e plurat.
thc pronounis pluralizedto become6ffi6s 1mr-hr.

3 Secondpesonpronoungou)
When speakingto a person,you must addressthat personusing a
pronoun (a word for you) that reflects whether you are senioi to
him/her,or vice versa,andto vhatdegree.This kind of senioritycan
dcpend,amongother things,on agedifference,family relationjips,
genderor social class.

The threelevels of politeness,working upward,are:

LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH

(intimate or contemptuous)
(familiar)
(polite and super-polite)

LOfV: the in!in'I: o contemptuousI tii (J,/ou

or ou) is used to
u.to:ia inferior(a junior seryant.one'so\4.rsmalt
child, an
lf:t
to expresscontemptor anger(one driver to anoer
Tr-". "j:.1,
arera co lsronbetweenthei cars.perhaps!),
or to address
someone
is intimat".-F-.ign .p.*;
of
N;;;;
:l11 :-T use
this pronoun.lt can only be used to address
y-. l:u"r "r.':.t:larionship
an
individual, andthereforehasno plural form.
*:.r*
iarffi rimir roughlyequivalenr
to rheFrenchtu)
Y??l*,
rs usedto_addresspersonssignif,rcantly
youngeror of lower social
standingthan oneself(servants,chilen, etc.ior
to uaa."., f.i"nO"
with whom an establishedinformal relationshipe*ists.
T;;;;;
plural, you add the puralizing suffix _F
-harii.
HIGH: thepoliteavr{ tap6l1touttt1,equivalenrro
rheFrenchyousl
rsusecto addessmostequalsandall superiors
exceptthoseto whom
dtf*:""".]s due'(Foreignspeaiersof Nepi i"""ir;;;;;
:tf:'-l
usingrhis word for you morecomnonlyan any
Lther.
":::,:,.r
In
lact. theywill probablyfeel morecomfoableusing
it to dd."r,
people,suchas servanlsor poers. whom
Nepalisi""fU
aoessas r?Iqftin -.) To form the plural. you add
"-a
the plurtizing
sufEx -{s -har.
Th super-politeg hajur is sometimesused to
expressespecial
deference_when
addressing
someone.Ittake.tt",url" u"rU_fo , *
theotherHigh pronouns.It mightbeusedby a lowergrade
emplovee
his employer,for example.or by a new bridero
adress
:o T*:rt
also.usedas a polite word of assenl(trq7! hqiur!
.rt.:r
T^t
Lo:oTo
res.,,
or to rndtcatethat one has not heardor understJod(#
r
llajar? Pardonmel.

lurrl
il{ d
I l{14 61

Rr{rr

fl{rF(-f{;rt

hmi h
hhar ha
timihar hu
tapftr hunuhuncha

rmr|/j,ative

t
[

h
n"r

ran
weae

you (Low)
ae
you (Middle)
nau
t'-
ae
(High)
you
hunuhuncha
Ef.6
ae
C

ho6

we are(oc.casionalyf am)
we are
you (Middle) are
you (High) are

negative
noina
{tt
noina
ffi
c{ noinas
ffi
fl{fr

I amot
rvee not
you (I-o$)
arc not
you(Middle)
Uoinau
ae not
hunuhunna you (High)
arc not

5 Nouns
Nearly all Nepali nounshave masculinegender.The only feminine
nounsae ose that are female nd human.Many feminine nouns
endin -i. Here are someexamplesof feminine nouns:

3fTc
f{
ffi

keg'
m
didi
imti

q|{qr mifr woman

girl
6ft
choi daughte
mother
sisfr
elder sister qfr bahini J,/ounger
{rfr sti wife's younger
Mfe
srser

4 I am, you ane,we are with o

Singular
q

d\
ffi
avrs65o

ma h
a.iihos
timi hau
tapi hunuhurcha

Iam
you (lnw) are
you (Middle) arc
you (Htgh) are

There is no definite article dre in Nepali. nor is ere an indefinite

article a. Thereforea sentencesuchass i?Tfr vidyhi ho can
be Fanslatedas s/heis a studento as {Irc is the student,depending
on the context.
All nouns,and most pronouns,ae pluralized simply by addingthe
suffix -{s -har:

Plural

|r^
ffi

mre perso,
nepaf Nepati

tapi

you
(Htch)

ftrfr

fimi

you
Middle)

I rr;6| ffi.F

I avri6.
|

I fcrt6s

nancnenarl peopie
rcplihar
Nepats

r"fan*t

youpeopte

rimarr

youpeopte

Crieti

Mddle)

However,it is not necessaryto attach- -har to a nounwhensome

other word in the sentencemakesit clear that the noun is plural. In
e following sentences,e word that takesthe plural suirx is the
one that the speakerwishesto emphasize:
qrfr'{s ftRffi d r
hiimihara 6ikak hai. V9 ae teaches.
Thereis no needto add-{s -har to lqrsffi 6ikak as well asto qrfr
hlmi. qrfr hmi is emphasized.
fcfi-Es fq-fl"f r timr-harii dyrthi hau. &! ae suders.
There is no needto add -iF-har to ffi
riOyertni as well as to
lq timl-.q mi is emDhasized.
qrfr frrq-dE(f, r
hrni 6ikakhar ha. We are teachers.
fqerfi 3ikak is emphasized.

Q sr6,ql.'
I *,+eqr$t

yokthmdaho?
, kthmda ho.

Is thisKathmandu?
Yes,s is Kahnafru.

ot
No, thisis Pokhara.
" pokhar ho.
{ t
However,when answeringa questionit is more commonto respond
with the afiirrnative or negative form of the verb with which the
ouestionended:
I *{, fret

a mtqql<* ?
a , sTEfldd |

yo kfhn{a ho?
ho, kfhm{a ho.

Is thisKathmardu?
Yes.thisis Katlnnandu.

o
| hoina, yo pokhar ho.No, this s Pokhara.

A t, tqa

{ hqiur is often usedfor yes:

Q d.csr ?
ryo lame6ho?
A
{, {T t
hqiur, Rameho.

Is that Ramesh?

Yes,that's Ramesh.

Often, ho is andftt hoina is ror are also usedto meanyes and

no regardlessof e verb in the question:
Odq{f
,1,fr, r <vr { t
or

hunuhuncha?
ho, ma Rame6h.

Yes,I ai Rallr,esh.

hoina,ma Orn hr-

No,I am Qm.

frfr fe-sl"fE A r fimi rlyrthihani \a.t.. you are students.

ffi
viayert}i is emphasized.

l, *c,q*q

6 Asking and answering questions

D2 Arrivingat the college

In everydayspokenNepali, the only differencebetween statement

and a questionis the intonation. To put it simply: the tone of you
voice goesup t the endof a queson,while at the endof a statement
it goesdown:

Gita and Bindu reachthe collese th Bimal Kumar.

dr
*r.qqr.{rtrsnqr
yo Mahendra mahdylay ho?
Giui
Is thisMalrcndraCollege?

fr nrc.q6 qi I
r.6qrd ,

yo kthmd ho.
Thisis Kathmandu.
@ ho pronouncedin a low tone.)
yo kfhmCa ho? k this Kathmatdu?

@ ho pronouncedin a rising tone.)

Nepali doespossesswords for yes and ,no:theseare i and {{ ah
respectively.

fffq{qr<

fr rfrr'5<rqrf*qfd{Ar

Bimal Kumr ho, yo Mahendra nahdylay ho.

Yes. This is MahendraColleee.
-,
- -
lr.teQs--\
(|r -----:rq.1
r.1
Bindu
ti- mnchehar ko hun?
Who e thosepeople?

f,qqq +qR

cfi-q
ffi
qrfl(

qfqfirg4

g1r Ffi-{ , e qrrsr, { fr--fi.{F

|

Bimat Kum tiniharii yidyahi hun yo Sa-tho, tyo Ga4e hq

ra tinihar My ra Ambik hun.
They are studen*. This is Salil, that is Ganesh,and
thoseare Maya andAmbika.
fi
qqFftrerr
Gitii
ani tyo mnche ikak ho?
And is thatpersona teacher?
t*qq m{R
qgr I rq err< tar crcl
{;E |r-FFt(cFs( qtqr !
Bimal Kumr hajur. vah Ckr Rame Thp hunuhuncha.
namaskr Cktar Thp !
Yes.He is Dr RameshThapa.Hello, Dr Thapa!
<sreTcr
rrwrifd{dS{r.fi
r+EQs+66or
RameshThp namasklr Bimal Kumrfi" vahLarko
hunuhuncha?
Hello, Bimal Kumarji. Who are they?
{Fq3fl
rfqfi-drq--drrEffig5gu
rqqffiEs
r
Bimal Kumr vahhr Gitli Khadk'-ra Bindu Srm
hunuhuncha. nay dyhihar.
TheyarcGitaKhdka andBinduShara Newstudents.
tsrqrqr
{,ffiR I
RnshThp namaste,namaste,
Hello, hello.

,ftmrt*

ruq{r

Gitii ra Bhdu namastehajur.

Hello, sir

Answer the following questionsaboutyourself:

t dc1=dIr(ts|{;l'?

1 dct{qndilT'
t dcr{crffi{-6 ?

7 Thid person pnonouns(fie, she, theyl

lf you arespeakingabouta person,thepronounyou choosemusteflect
ryhether
thatpesonis seniororjunio to you in age,socialclass,etc.,
ondmustalsoindicatewhetherrc is in theproximity or not whenyou
speakThe samethreelevelsof potenessexist herethat apply !o e
secondpesonpronouns,althoughthey ae not exact eqvalentsin
lermsof their usage:
(simplereference)
(polite reference)
(honorific reference)

LOW
MIDDI-E
HIGH

LOW third personpronounsare:

6 r hdshe
q I vo rr- trus
aq tyo it, that
elsleis usedto refer to a personin his/her sence whenthere
is no needto talk aboutthat personwith deferenceor politeness.q
camotbe usedasa pronounto refer to things or objects,andis used
only to refer to humnbeings.
Wh e d yo andd tyo both meanir, the dferencebetweenthem is
that fryo refers to somethingnear to the speaker('this') whe
tyo refersto somelhingawayfrom e speaker('that';. yo ande
tyo havee pluralformsfr yt and ti respecvely:
thehrst of these
is often pronouncedwithoutits initial i.e. r:
yo andefr tyo can also sometimesbe usedto meane o sle, but
this can soundimpolite and it is better to use only q to refer to
peopleat this level of poteness.

Mahendra mahvidy-alay Mahendra College

1qlrq".*
qf(
{ ti }tose
Cktar doctor
n;e- nnchehar peop,e
rqqp namaskr ello or
+ ko wtro?
goodye (more formal
g1 hun are
than cq nmast)
<ra and
rq nav new

EXERCISE

Grammar

tapdBimal Kumr hunuhuncha?

tpdvidylmtrl--hunuhuncha?
tapi nepli hunuhuncha?

MIDDLE pronouns vfr ur, fufr yini and fuf tini are in their
singularforms generallya featureof culturedor literary Nepali rather
than of colloquial speech.When they are usedin speech,they refer
mostcommonlyto women.They areusedto refer to personswho ae
felt to deservea modicum of honorific reference,but not the fullblown honorific grade(oneexamplemight be a man speing about
his wife).
cr ulr ano r.rr IlI naveolslanleleence,wrulerqir ytlll relersto
a person who is physically close to the speaker.The plural forms
JrllE pnrneru,

lqrl yrInau

and lcl.ll llll||lru

a useo mucn

more conmonlyin speechthan the singularfonns, md herc ey are

simply pronounstlat refer, politely but not exceptionallypolitely, ro
personsin the plural.gfi-{t rrnihar is in mostcontextsthe word you
shoulduseto efer to peopleas ley.
HIGH pronounsz16y and*{ vah and their plural forms r$'{s
yahhsii and s-{' vahhar ae used to refer to personsvery
politely in thei presencendabsencerespectively.Inevitably,you will
be morcplite abouta personwho canhearwhatyou aresaying,so+{
vah is generallyusedory for personsdeservingesrecialdeference
andrespect:one'sparents,teacher,etc. +d vat is often pronounced
andsometimeswritten asduh.

8 He is, st e is, it is, they are with ho

I oegative

afrtmative
IJOWSINGULAR
j"

ho

| fl

hoina

r'sno

LOW PLI,JRAL& MIDDLE SINGTJLAR

hun
ardis
ff
lr<l hoinan ae Dot/bnot
HTGHSINGTJLAR& PLI,JRAL
65go hunuhuncha Vare
lf- huDu- arenot/is o
huDna

o be (using ho to define people's nationties). Here are some

examples:
aflfumative

Singutar
LOW
v, Ql

qr
qr Ql

ho
yo ho
Bo ho

Mre (distant,Low) is
ilftis (nearby,Low) is
ia, (distant,Low) is

uni hun
yin- hun
tim- hun

e (dist nt, Middle) is

Mre (nearby,Middle) r's
s/he(distant,Middle) is

ysh hunuhuncha
yah hunuhuncha

e (nearby,High) is
s/re (distant,High) is

MIDDI.E
J'I I E

fir rr
r(|'||
HIGH

q-dg$'E

<l| 6.1

MIDDLE
sr rQe
rq Ec Q1
r(|rQ6 .r

1Erte

afqFE

w fie { t
arfr q,c d t
fffi qr(ff-{ t |
dcri ffi
6{il6 |

oqfut"r

Plurl
LOW

HIGH
qQrE

Negadvcs
Bachaffumativeform of {ho hasa negativeform:

yr-hun
fi hun

.they(reaby,l-w)arc
t rel (distant,Low) arc

uniha huD
yinihar hun
tiniharn hun

iel (distant,Middle) are

ey (nearby,Middle) are
ey (distant,Middle) are

yhar hunuhurcht they (teay,High) are

vha hunuhunca fey (disrant,High) are

I am Engsh.
ma grej h.
jarman
We ae Geman.
h|ni
lla.
You M) areIndian.
timi bhrabia hau.
tapd nepli hunuhunca. ou (H) areNqp.
S/he(L) is
amerikanho.
American.

Srhe(M) is
Pakisani.
+{Frn 6g6o t vauciniynunuhunctaS/heQI)is
Chirese.
t utri pkistDihun.

s.ft crffi

neSaave
q E g-{ |

ma jarman hoina.

{rfrd's Eq t
ffi qfrfi

hrni grej hoina.

n+ | fimi amerikan hoinau,

I am not Gennan.
Weue nothglish.*
You (M) arc not
Ameican.

dqrFrq T{q r tapd ciniyhunuhunna,You() ae

sR|-fr{
sfr ffi

r hindustnihoina"

{;rt t uni nepIihoinan.

+dvrfu<rfr g56q lvanpaHsteni

hunuhunna.

rct Chinese.
S/he(t-) is
not Inan.
Sfte (M) js
not Nepali.
S/he(m is not
Pakistani.

*Note: "fhe 1sms sfrfi amrikan Amertcan and d-E

grej
English are often used to efe generally to foreigners or white
people.
iTtii, the l,ow word for you, would not be usedin sentencessuchs
the above.An exampleof its usewould be:

tdds,

t rnrkh hm,

YouI-\ arcn idiot

fr yo and e tyo and their plural forms fr yi and fi fi are most

comrnonlyusedas adjectivesto mean this, tat, theseal;]ldthose:
cF qrff e |

tyo mnche nepU}lo, Thatpesonis

aMl

yokefvidy,thlh".
il::#yt,

fr qF 3i'q fi{

th-mnchehar grej Thosenople are

hoinan.
not Engsh.
yi bahin-har cit ra Theseyoung girls
Bindu hun.
arcGitandBindu.

rqrq 6n I

sfrident.

"

10 Adiectivs
Adjectivesare of two types:
a inflectingadjectiveswhich endin thevowel $ -o,
b invaiable adjectives
endingin someothervowel,or in a consonant
The endings of adjectives of type () must change (,inflect')
accordingto the numberand genderof the noun they describe.The
endingsare:
-* -o in the masculinesingular,
- -i in the feminine singular,
-qT- in the masculineand feminine plural.

u*rz16

fhlo rj
thl rjhar
rmro kef
rmr ket5har

whio book
white books
small girl
smalLgirls

Il.ft{fr's|n
l * !

lilQ-

garib kisn
gaib kisnhar
saph kofh
saph kofhhar
dhni mnche
dhrni mncheharrl
nay tatan
ny kalemhar

poor fanner
nor farmets
cleanrcom
cleanrooms
rich man/ lnrson
rich men/ people
new vnn
new Irens

gsrfr6r
qsr6|{
trfr qr.
u-fiqr
4T fr-{rT
qfrffi{

EXERCISE 2 Complete the following sentenceswi e

appopriateform of $ ho to form an afF[mative statement.Work in
transliterationfist, en wdte the sentencesout in Devanagari:
m grej...
1 q 3iE...
hrni vidyt...
2 {Ifrffi...
tinr- hindustni..,
3 ftfrl@.
4 ffi{sfu{|-... timihar kisn"..
tapi 6ik|ak...
5 il fs|effi...
Siktr...
6 s fsrFr...
7 rfr rfrql"... uni dhani mnche...
8 frqF6c-{fl'... h-mnchehar prahari...
vah nep|i...
9 Tdcffi...
19q-6ftrwcfi-+... yahhar bhratrj...
EXERCISE 3 Convert the affirmative statementsinto negative
statementsby changinge forms of the verbs.
EXEACISE 4 Translateinto Nepali, giving both the script andthe
transliterationforms, taking care to give the adjectivesthe correct
endinEs:

Innecting ectivs

rrw
{STts
{Tq ifdr

seto kitiib
set kitbharii
sm-keF
sn keftar

b Invariable adjeives
rl(lq

9 Tlris, hat, these and t rose

ftsfi-{<fi-drr

fr-dw
*r f{ff{
wff
ff{r-{

geat king
geat kings
good boy
good boys

I
2
3
4
5

good farmer
big book
rich girl
newboy
good king

6
7
8
9
10

rich farmers
good books
small girls
poor boys
rich kings

Dg a view of Kathmandu
Two villagers have reacheda hilltop overlooking the Kathmandu
Vulley. From therc they can see Kathmanduand the villages that
sunoundit. They discussthe view.

,q
l-l

ot

--14

{t

al.,
frl
]
-

JI
-
{

ct

Ir

g)

o
r+ +
o g)
3 g)
-

Ir

r)
-

Ir

-{

II
-

CLo

tr

{tq
Rme

. q{ sr6-{= , 1
tyo Saharkfhm{a ho' hoina?
That town is Kath{nandu,isn't it?

u?I
Dhane

, -sr6 {r6,flc d t
ho, tyo Saharkfbm{a ho.
Yes,that town is Kathnandu.

{r

oroqr<8,{r
kthmda thlo cha, hoiua?
Kathmanduis Ug, isn't it?

Rrne

II

.rF
rf

{.qo r
In ris unit you will leam
. how to dEsciband ask
abo things and peopl
. how to discuss distancesnd
locations
. how to use elationshiptrms
to addFss pople

Dhne

ho, dherai fhlo cha.

Yes,it's very big.

{TI

ra-qrd{stfret

Rme

khmdakasto cha? rmro cha?

Whatis Kathmanrlulike? Is it nice?

rFT
Dhane

{Tr5l
rmrai cha,
It's quitenice.

Grammar

*ft<frT.crn{r

Rme

ani tyo kun g ho?

And which village is that?

errfrfl,qm$rrq<frr

Dhane

tyo g hoina, bhaktapur Saharho.

Thatis not a village, that is Bhaapurtown.

{
Rme

q risrflffo,{r
e. Qro6ahar snocha, hoina?
Oh. That town is small, isn't it?

You must use the S ho form of the verb to berf yon are defining
someing or someonewith a noun, but if you are locating the thing
or personyou aretalking aboutor describingit with an adjectiveyou
must use the 6 cha form. The High forms WffE hunuhuncha
(affirmative) and W{q hunuhunna (negative), which were
introducedin Unit I, are the sameregardlessof wheer they are
defining, describingor locating.The other forms are asfollows:

r
Dhane

11 Pronounswith 6 ct a

r
,qfusro r ra<qm-r-<t5rvq{fr
ho, ali sno cha. dherai fhlo chaina. tara bhaktpur
dherai puno shar ho.
Yes,it is quite small It is not very big. But Bhaktapuris a
very old town.

EE{Sahr ror,n
t dhrai very
ocha is
nd kasto.&ewhat?how?
i rmrai quite nice
3n kun wlb ?

n g viltage
rm1< bhaktapur Bhakapur
qe O
+ ali qure
fi tra but
g<r purno o1d

D gXgnCSg S Answerthe following questionsin Nepali about

Dialogue 3. If your answerto 1 is in the affirmative, wdte the NeDli
tor Yel Kathmanduls brg: if your answeris negative.write e
Nepali for Nq Kathmanduis not big, jf rs sma11,
nd so on.

r. +raqreado r
1. mg< rrg ?
r. +raqrdiq or
v 6|aqrde qrcr I
!. r<q{g{| ol
a. qr5 a-+vE( Sr

kfhm{a fhlo cha?

bhaktapur g ho?
kthmda mro ch?
kthm{a fho 6ahar ho?
bhaktapur purano cha?
bhaktapur nay Saharho?

Yerbform
q

chu

d
6
o'
6
6;l

cha
chas
chau
cha
chatr

Pronoun(s)
qma

Ufr nernianOArfiqs hmihar

tii
fafr uni anofafi-a-stimtaro
g fr voetvo
fi uni fiffi yfui andfTfi fini
fryiandfrU
sfi-{ unihar,fufi-{ yinihar nd
t(. 6t

rt|utraru

Negatives
Eachafrmative form of Ehas a negativeform:
Affirmave
I Negative
-l
q u
r'{
am
0
I q
o cha (we) are
I i'
Eq chas you) are G) | d{
(you) arc
rh
dr
o chau (youl
are (M) | c
fr cha is (L)
l
q an is (M)/ are G) | qT

chaina
chaina

am not
re not

chainas

are not

chainau
chaina
thainaa

rxenot
is not
is/ae not

Fminine orms o E cha

If you aretalking oa particularwomanor gil andaddressingher as
t or cfr timr-you canchooseto usethe following feminine forms
of E cha:

q
frfr Ea'

t ches
irni chyau

you (-rn) arc

you (Middle) are

If you are talking aboura particularwornanor girl and intend to use

the Low pronounfor se (s ), you can chooseto use the feminine
form of 6 ch, which is che:
$

che
se(Low) r's
you
If
are talking aboua paticular a,omanor girl andare using one
of the Middle words for e or e (fr uni, ffi p'a1, q ffi 6a1,
you can chooseto use the feminine form of ET an, which is @
chln:

fr@
fufr@
fd-frk

uin
yini chin
ni-chin

se(distant,Middle) is
se(nearby,Middle) is
se(distant,Middle) is

Thesefeminine fonns are not used very consistentlyin everyday

spokenNepali, but ey are often usedby men to refer politely to
thei wives and oer female relatives, and they should always be
usedin the written language.There are no feminine negaveforrns
of s a.

12 qfr afi quite and,t dherai very, many

Nepali adjectivescan
qufied or emphsizedby putting the
-be
words srfr a gurreor t dherai very in frot of then. r
alidubtoch.
He is quitethin.
"tt$q
<q{
r Rm dherai mofo chaitrf.- Ramis notvery fat
e-frstfuffifu1
t uni alt hoci chin.
Sheis nther short.
qiqrq
I
ma rlherai aglo L
I am very tall.
A secondway to quali! or emphasizean adjecveis to changeits
endingto -q -ai if ir endsin a vowel or to add- -si to e end of the
word if it endsin a consonant:

t dherai very hasa secondmeaning,which is many.It meansrery

whenit comesbeforean adjective,but if it comesbeforea noun, or
on its own, it meals many:
,\e ttutenany F,wns
Q qrqqr t sE{{ q ?neplm dherai
inNepal?
aharharchan?
ah, dherai ainan. No, thereae
I a{.a1 t
not manv.
But if you want to ask are ihetenmy g awns in Nepal?you have
the problem that t qrr rr{F. dherai thl aharhar could be
takento meanllqry hig citiesinsteadof manv big cities.You get over
this problemby moving the position of f dherai in the sentence:
Q crqqr qn {!q t neplm thl
q?
aharhar dherai
chan?

Ate theremmy big

townsin Nepal?
('e big towns
manyin Nepal?')
ah, dherai chainan. No, there are
.l c,tqt
nor many.
Oneothercomnroryor"6 *o.6 is qft6'fr siil{,lti a small quntity o
which shouldonly be usedto qualify nouns:

+ffi1}

dikati

qffi
fi{
qFrdfr qrfr

atikafi cini
alikti pi|nr--

*
TTc
{IfrT
(tFI

thin
qre
fat
sho in sttue Qtr

dublai
moi
hocai

qF
q

"dfamrai
snai
saphai

tall
"go
rmno good, nice
s5no
small
saph cieaa

quite thin
quite fat
atheshot
in statue
fabty ta
nice enough
athersmall
cleanenough

a ttle mik

a ttle sugar
a litle wate

13 Questioningwords (interrogatives)
In Nepali, many questioningwords (calledinerrogaaves)begin th
a k- ndbelongto a groupo wordsat follows a setpattem.Those
beginningwith tI y- are 'this-words',thosebeginningwi g W- or s
u- are 'that-words',andthosebeginningth k- are wordsthat ask
a questron.
interrogatives
'thaword'
s
+
i he/she
Bo who?

he what?
yo ithis
d
tyo iltha.t
ktm which?
yo it/this
i
tyo i/that
S
qfr yati this much <=qft tyati that mach fid
k^ti how much?
q< yasto lr?e rftrs gd
k'F,to tikc what?
tyasto ,rte tzt q
q
qd yan nere
q{
kstnwhere?
tya\ thcre
'this-word'

dublo
qrel moto
Qr9| hoco

ddh

sfr uti and3 usto are altemativeforms or that much and.likethat

rcspectively.
Becauseg{ 1ga meanswhich?,an enquiry that involves t}e use of
{ kun may useeier e verb $ ho or tle verb !t cha:
q<s[q|q
S. S, :
|
qttsqr
T-{ flT{

yo kun de3ho?
yo desneplho.

mia-mfu gr {tr

kfhmCamkun In Kathmandu,which

Wich countryis this?

Thiscouniy is Nepat.

pasalm kun sbun In the shop which

Becausefc( kasto meanslike wlra?,a questionin which it is used

usuallyasksfor a 'describing'reply.So.an enquiryat involvesthe
useof trl ;s1gusuallyusese verb6 cha:
yo dekastocha?
yo deSrmro cha.

"frT"r
qEsr{ITf|

Whatiss camaylike?
Thiscountryis good-

d crft FR ot
qTq]-{T$FfE I

yo pnr-kasto cha? Whatis thiswaterke?

yopm saph cha. Tis wateis clean.
However,it is also possibleto ask what kind of counw is this?.in
whichcaseyou are askingfor a ,defining'shrementani callingfor
theuseof ho:
fr *

vrfl

yo kasto de ho?

f trfr lr I
6R sffr ?
rr'ftfr

What kind of country

is this?
yo dlrcmidlwri &tn This.isa very
nch counfry.
yo kasto ptu ho? Whatkind of wate
is this?
yo maito pni ho.
Thisis ty water.

14 The simple sentnce

You haveno doubt realizedby now that Nepali has a different word
order from English.In Nepali, the naturalplacefor the verb is at the
end_of a sentence.Sirnply, an English speakersaysI am English,
while a Nepali speakersays:
qcr t
.I Nepali
ma nepli h.
am,.
,you studen!
ilqr tFt T;6r tapi dyhi
ae..
hunuhuncha.

I lnless there is some good reason for it not to, a Nepali sentencewill
ulwaysbegin with a subjectand end wi a verb: everythingelse will
come in between. If a change is made to this word order it has an
cftect on the meaning of a sentence; it may emphasize something, o
cxpresshesitationor doubt:
cFi'f c I
ffi{o

I'm a Nepali. I am!

nepli h ma.
Ae you a student,
aqr{ r vidyrthi
hunuhuncha tapi? en?

Cl4 Nearandfar
Salil hasjust arrived in town andhe needsto visit the bank andthe
postoffce.He asksa passer-by
for directions.
cfrq g trrq,{TR t +Ei 6<r+ w<o r
Salil ebb! mnr*! yahhulktlara?
Oh (ltounger)brother,hello! Is therea post office here?
{{
Rane cha di.
Yes,(elder)brother.
F-{

q l qt4 l tcni (. nt( dt6t t

Salil yabaj" n tfaL ghar kti tCh cha?

How far is thepost offrce[rom here?
__-.
a( 4t6t .t-. q.n t, qt5 |

FT
Rane dherai dhin, Iqiili clta di,

It's notvay far, it's quiE neal (e|&r) brother.

stimqot
SaEl tyh bik pani cha?
Is therea bank thee too?
t|"1lol

o,*+vo rqor
Rane cha, baik pani cha. thai cha.
Yes,there'sa banktoo. h's quitebig.
(-{ 6qr+q<fui+ arers t
Salil hrilkghaddi baik dheaiEt dta?
Is the bnk very far fom thepost office?

({

+{, d vfr l o r*r <6cmw a-qi<e

efI6Tl

Rane ah, yo pani najikai cha. baik ra hutk ghar yattep

l{h chcina.
No, that's quitc neatoo. The bankand re postoffice arc not
fu ftom here.
vfi-{ qrq + r qr+ qcsr fre 6 ?
Salil {ia baik ra hulk gharm bhi{ cha?
Are thebankand ihe postoffice cowdedtoday?

rh<r<rwc+<qcr+T{{<q tqMrr.{rfr<rE I

Rane chaina di. {ia baik ra hulk ghar banda chan.

{ia
srkri bid cha.
No, (elder) brother. Toilay the bank and the wst ofrce
are closed.There'sa govemmenthoday today.

tn bhi_(younger)brother
<tVa$ 49ry

E{IFT' hulk qhr po$ omce

<Rd (elderl brother
{kryahbt firomere
qfu kati how much?
tt4h far, distant
rnqiikai gutrenear
sdtyah ee

+{ baik ban&
gcr+r'tuhutkghantekhi
ftom thepostiffice
tw aja today
fe biC c;wd
u, gfrai house,home, buildinp
*< banda sut c,losed
{.Tr+ sar.kr goyernmerfal
la-{rbid ody

Grammar
15 Postpositions:-qr-I|t, qra-bla, -fu-dekhi

In English thereis a categoryof words called prepositions:to, a4 ,

tor, etc. Theseare called prepositionsbecauseey come in
\o-,
fronf ofthe noun or pronounthey are acringqlon: to theman, at the
house,from London, etc. The Nepali equivalentsof thesewords are
calledpostpositionsbecausetley comeaer e nounthey are acting
upon: the man to, the houseal London from- ln wnting they musi
alwaysbejoined to the end of e noun or pronoun.
The postposition-rfi rn meansrn, a or on..

crrfi

-*E*

neplm
ebulm
baikm

in Nepal
on the table
at the bank

Two other postpositionsthat are usedin Dialogue 4 are -"Ir -bl

l?omand-fu -dekhi -&om,srnce.Bo of ese menom, but only
.fu -dekhi can alsobe usedwith expressionsof time:

frr.qTcfiflz
{!-qfu

crqfu
l Qql qrl

kthm4ab
la+{andekhl
Jadekhi
hiiodekhi

from Kathmandu
[rom London
ftom tody
sinceyesterday

If you need to sk how far away someing is, you will use the
adjective -rdrldh san with one or other of these two
postpositions.When stating or discussingdistances,the word eld
{{h must usually be rctained,even when you also mention some
units or measuresof distance.
rR$-dfd fi.6q-d {f{ bhaktpurbta
tTE ?
kfhm{a katt
p{hcha?
3|6
rR-Taffcfif6.c
bhaktspurbta
q{ ef6r
p{hcha,

How stant is
Kathmmdu from
Bhaktapur?
Katlmanduis eight
Bhaktapu-

If you wish to say at somethinghas been the casefor a certain

period of time, and still is the case,you shoulduse-fu -dekhi with
the presenttenseof the verb:

r @fu vrcmEr maijodekhi

rqfu q qr{Tr sr

neplm chu.
abadekhi ma
neplm chu.

I un in Nepal shrce
yesteday.
Ftom now on I ant
in Nepal.

Units o distance
Nepalis thi in tenns of both miles and kilometres, ough the
metric systemis graduallybecomingprevalent:
3rl-qErr
eight miles
th mil
qffifu(
nine kilometes
na kilomitr
In the hills of Nepal,a aditionlmeasueof distanceis the frq ko6,
which is usuallyinterpretedto ean fivo niles, or sometimesalfal
hour's walk Foreignerswalking in Nepal often 1n6 ths fre km an
elusiveconcep! peaps becauseit measuresdistncepary in tens

of tlrc time takento travel it, and becauseNepalisaxenaturallymuch

at
Tore-adept n:gotiating e steepups and downsof thei landscape
thanforeign visitors.

16 Using relationshipterms to address people

It is commonpracticein Nepali for peopleto addressothers,wheer
they ae strangers,friends, o acquaintnces,
by using a relationship
term. Obviously,you needto judge which term is appropriatefor the
personyou are addressing,but it is perfectly acceptableto address
a
maleyoungerthanyourself asrf{ bhi yo ungerbrother,or a emale
who is older an you as didi eldersisrer-Elderlypeoplemay be
addressedasETb fafer or qlq m moe4 no stigmas attached
to age in Nepal. These terns are often also added to oeoole,s
personalnamesin conversation:3fu{r ffi Ami diOr-.iqq'lIrs
Salil bhi- A chart ofkinship terminologyis given in the ppendices
at e back of is book.
ffi

cR-{R neptipariy A Nepali tam y

1 To be addresseilandefered to with High pronouns

buv orb
S{r,qr
father
fic, {
m or m
mother

rfr
'l I t(l.t I

rfr-ilffi

nti
ntini
nti-ntini

grandson
granddaughter
grandchiJdren

*When referring to a known indidual, e foreign speaker

shouldusethe onorific termsfrm1n-nan and-ffi irimati.
qFiTlogne andRfF svsni ae usedto refer to husbandsand
wivesmore
n rural areas,somepeople-u-se
the words
^generally.
vfi joi or 1a
b{hi ('old woman'1for wrfe and{ poi or {6r
b{h ('old man') for usband
EXERCISE 6 Translate e following sentencesinto Nepali,
referring to e box abovefor the correct levels of politenesswhen
choosingwhich form of the verb to use.
1 Youngerbroer is at school.
2 Elder brotheris in Darjeeling.
3 Elder sisteris at MahendraMvidylay.
4 Tomorrow motherandfaer are at home.
5 Thereare many brothersand sistersin the family.

FT-firIT,;lT-fiq

buv-m or b-m

nnther and

EXERCISE 7 Convertthe affirmave Nepali sentencesyou hve

completedfor Exercise6 into negavestatements,by changingthe
forms of the ves.

flT{r, {r .
d-E
{-e{qr,

hqiurb or bqie
hqium or bqiyai

father
granather
grandmother

E)(ERCISE I
Overleafere is a simplemap of the part of Nepal
in which you re stying,showing:

2
be
.To addressedwith High pmnounsand usuallyreferrcd to
wth High (male)or Middle (female)pronouas
sIFT,-,'tq{t
svsni or S1imati *
wife
qt",
logne or rimnn
husband
',qq
T{<l'
didi
elde sista
<r{, <rx, il!
di or deiy or dju
elder brother
3
adessed
with Middle pronounsand usuallyrefened.ro
.To-be
(male)andMiddle (female)ponouns
wth Low
bht
younge
brother
q.lrI
bahrl
younge ster
6r{T
chor
son
bfr
cho'
daughtcr
ffi
chorSchori
sonsand
daughors

I qrqfl qfi{{
{fl.
?
3 Tffi{o
4 rfi

qt6 ry
r'frTr
7
S
9
10

6Ti
gt^Ts
r q{r
trsr

sarasV-mndir
bCiq
_
pasalharii
baft

Saraswatitemple
marketplace
shops
bank

hotel
CirneUj
seti-khol
sadak

police station
hotel
Danphet-odge
Seti K}rola (a river)
road

hul?kch_
gt _
prahai thn

posroffice

Refening to e
nap, and
assumingat
you arc staying
in the lodge,
answerthe
following
questionsin
Nep:

r6tcr.rrfu+ar

qrFERrdT6 ?
1 rwqre e-dRfr eraTg r
e-qrafior
I

r6frw+r+-qor
q<t{Efa{rarfr arcrs r
rr<erfr

prahan- lqn nqiik ch?

hulk ghar ldh cha?
l4ihts bqir kati dhn cha?
bajnn ke ke cha?
pranan- tn kah cha?
sarasvaf mrndir bqi'bt
kti Fdh cha?

Ir
l/ J
{1

'\)

3
qt
=

In this unit you will learn

. how to count and enumerate
pople,things nd units
. horfto talk bout potbl
poss6sions

Cls Studentsatthe languageschool

Grammar

The Ministe for Fducation is visiting a school and is asking the

teacherhow many studentsae studyingeachlanguage.

t7 The Nepali numerals

fsrrr
Silqak

manti

ffirorqrfriff{rffigcs-t

nepli kakm katiian vidyrtbihar chan?

How many studentsare therein the Nepali ctass?
Ecq+r *erf 6{ rqq-{ a r qtqqqr r
dasjan dyrthi chan. pcjan kef5 ra pcjan kef.
Thercarc ten students.Five boysandfrve girls.
q r3lfr qS {ffq tfd-fir ffiq
q r
e. ani grejt kakm kaijan vidyrthihr chan?
Oh.And how many stuibn$ e thercin tfu Eagshclass?

frrs-fi

r+nm *fu^qfro rqfir -dr1<es{rffi Ealqqr

eqregq-.ri
ffirs
o-rrr

il$ak

$o kalq ali fhlo cha. nauj.n k ra dasjen keti

chan, jammii pnnisjan dyrthihar ch^n.
That classis quitc big. Thereare nine boys andten girls.
All togethertheere 19 students.

crfr{friqrn-{qq I
mantri
f{T{
6ilqak

nepli kakm desihar natrai chan?

Ate thereo y foreigoersin the Nepati ciass?
<fi-{F J E{ q-dq rfi-{s{r rq, qtq-t+r d.q, r
FEr"mr6 |
videihar mtrai an mantnjy. tibjan cinty,
pcjan grej, ra duan jarman chan.
Therc are only foreigners,Minister. Tfuee Chinese.five
Bngshand two Gemans.

rf mant miruster
sr kak class
T m rn
nfus{r kaEian how many?
({q{r d-sjan en
qfr{raT pcjne kep t?ve
boys
Cfqrtr pcjan kef lve
gils
dru-+rzrnaujan kel nrne
boys

gtls
qqr jamn all togethe, in
total
rqr{sq{r nnnisjan 19
t{nF vide3ihar foreigterc
ttl mtrai ody

rq mantriiy formof
address
for a ministr

The Nep numeralsare very similar to the Hindi numerals,wi

only a few exceptions.The systemis complex,andit is necessaryto
leameachnumberfrom one to 100asa sepaateitem of vocbulary,
though each group of ten has its olvn intemal logic and it is
occasionallypossibleto guesslThe fust ten numbersae givn here,
both on eir own and wi the classifier suffrxesthey often needto
take (as explainedbelow). You are advisedto leam the numbersin
setsof ten (seethe ppendices).
umbrs and numeal classiies: summary
namber
I r
2 t
3 r
4 I
5 r
6 r
7 ,t
8.
9 r
10 r.

s{ek
gdur
fi-{fin
qR cr
lti pic
s cha
srdst
qrth
c nau
<s das

+ humclassifrer
qrs{r ekjan
g-r{r.luiian
frff{rtinjan
qrrq{r crjan
qi?d cjan
oqr chajan
fffitr sljan
qro-wrthjan
s{r naan
<s-fir dasjan

+ non-human
classifret
+a euf
gr=rduit
fiT|TT
6nvat
qr.qa crval
ci{ pcval
sldr aval
{r(r.r.Istvaf
qr5{rbvat
{r nauvat
<r+ardasvaf

8 Numbers of people
Whenyou areusingnumbersto enumeratehumannouns- i.e. words
that representpeople- you shouldaddthe classifier-tFIian to the
end of the oumber.I1 is incorrect to say ('F n; ek mncbe one
qr e\ian manche. If the
Tnnon: e corect form is iEFT
nurnberis plural, thereis no needto add e plural suffix -{5 -har
to the noun, bebausethe numberalreadytells you that thereis more
than one personnd therefoe-{ -har is superfluous:
qfq-{r qF
onetrErson
e\ian manc}
duiian logne-mnche two men (liually ,
$-q-{r ffi-ql;
husban&person)
frfi-{r gr-qrfr{
&ian svdsni-mnis threewomen
(litera y,
wife-Derson)

The words qr mnche and qrF{s nnis are inerchangeabte,

though e first is used more commonly. Both mean persn,but
unlessqualified by the addition of qr* svs (womarwife) tey
can usually be takento rcpresenta male,

Cf exencse 9 Answer
e following questionsin

Dialogue5:
ffifttrqr:
r. ;nfrqrr +qnfEsw r
r rkq+r d-qs rr{ r
r t[TCr-rT qq{{F
qq! "HFIT:

E( ?

s. 6fr-s{r f{flrfE E( ?
k. rRs{r {-drE( e
E. +ft-q-nts el r

Nepali on

nepJiklqm:
katiian vidyhihar chan?
kat[ian grejhar chan?
kaQian jarmanhar chan?
greji kalqm;
ka(ian dyhiharii chan?
l(aiian kelhar chan?
katijan kefharii chen?

CfO Setting up the exam room

Poshan,a junior teacher,is setting up a room for an examination.
Ramesh,e principal, comesto checkthat all is well.
sr
fr +orqr frft-{crE-i 6{ r
Ramesh yo kofhm katival lebul chn?
How many tablesare thercin thisroom?

sur

rsrarol{R I

Poshan dasya chan hajur.

Thereae ten, si.

rr

*+ft-+ao1r

Ramesh ani kativaf mec chan?

And how many chain are there?

s"r

qra+aqrs{ r

Poshan thval mtrai chan.

Thereare only eight.

<sr

gr+rrrrcev-+rffiq,

{-{?

Ramesh e. kakm dsjan dyrn* chan, hoina?

Oh. Thereare ten studentsin the class,aren't there?

S*

qg<,<cu-rro1rwff+6r{r S-qrc{a 6{ |

Poshan hqiur, daqianchnn-arko kohn ddrval mecfhar

Yes,theeare ten-Thereare a few chain in the next
room-

+o r+-cqr +rre{r v &+ e1t

Rsmesh hr-kcha. kalam ra kgatha pani fht-lt chan?

OK. Are thepens andpapesOK too?
qtddqr \rscr+lrc <6FKn( |
fc"T
Poehan harek febulm euf kalam ra kgat cha hajur.
On eachtablethereis a pen andpaper,sir.
rarkofh room
rtr ktivl how many?
T{ lebul b1e
w{dr dsvt en
s nec ct
q'5q?]thval eight
qli mtrai only

qdarko

o,er, next
S-sr(ri<vf fio o|fur'ay/)
rathik fine, conect
{irq klam pen
F( kgat paper
{ hrk each,every
qs. eu oneor a

Grammar
19 Numberso things
lVhen you are using numbersto enumeratenon-humannouns- i,e.
animalsand inanirnateobjects- you must always add the classifier
-irvat to theendof e number.It is inconectto saygI' fl c
kitb four boots: the correct forn is sTa{I crvat kiib. Again,
-{ -hr is superfluouswhen the numberis plural.
The classifier-.tI vat is not pronouncedasit is spelled:the correct
pronunciationis 'aut'. It is addedto the numbersin a raer less
regularway ar the classifier-q;TTjan.When it is addedto gfi ek
onq the combination producesqgI eul, pronouncedand often
spelled ta yauf, and when it is added to ( dut rwo the
combinaonproduces({a duil, pronounced'dwit'. For obvious
practical reasons,these two are used very commonly in everyday

spokenNepali.
{rq

euf ('yaut') kitb

duit ('dwit') nec

one book
two chails

PerhapsbecauseNepali doesnot have an indefinite article a gT

eut is often usedwi humannouns,e.g.\reT1TI;eut mnche
oneman o a mano refer to a personout whom e speakerfeels
no needto be especia[y polite.

) How many?
When you are askingthe questionhow many? you mustadd one of
the classifiersto the interrogative+fr tati, ttre choice of classifier
depen.linguponwhetheryou are askingaboutpeopleor oer things.
Because-$T jan can only be usedto enumeratepeople and _+a
val can only be used to enumerate things and animals, e
combinationof a numberplus a classifiercanalsobe usedon its own:
qlqr 6fufir qrEa ?gharm katijan
How manypople are
mnche chan?
in thehouse?
(awTI E{ I
dsjqn ghanTheeare tn.
({T {frdr $164 ? gharm kativaf
How manyroomsarc
koth chan?
thercin the house?
fi-i-{rq I
nva chan.
Thereare thrce.
However, when the question concemsunits of measurement,sfr
kati can be usedwithout classifier suffix (seeGrarnmar 22).

D7 KamalandAmrit
Kamal bumps into Arnit on tle street. Kamal, an office worker,
alwayshasmoneyto spare,while Amrit, a young student,is always
penniless.
6qq
{{Tdrrr{!
Kamal aho Amgt bhi!
Oh, it's Amit!
qrd
;FtfiR frtI <f !
namaskr Kamal di!
Amit
HeL|o,Katnal!
IFIIiT

Kmd

.r.{d
Amit
FqrKamd
qF
Amlit

rqwR!qRfdrfu{?
namaskr! ile kaitira?
Hello! Where areyou off to now?

qqfr<r
ghaira.
Home.
s {|{q{r'dE
r
ani hlkhabsr ksto trar
And how are things?

ts r
rmrai cha.
Fine.

qq

Kamal

{rd
Amrit

qrqffiiir {r E r
qia timisga pais ch?
Do you haveany money on you nday?
qiir qfimo r+ a< rrs t
masga?alikati cha, ek nohar mtrai cha.
On me?I havea little. I havejust onehalf-rupee.

rqT
Ksmal

fr rh rqrt qfu(et {frq6 |

{!(

q,rc{rsrl+e6 rdcrtiiTfraE ?

kehi chain. {ia masita d-e rupiy cha.

It doesn'tmatteLI've got En upeestoday.

Amrit

masgana pais cha na cumf cha. tapisgacurol ch?

I haveneithermoneyno cigetes.Do you havea
cigaette?

trg
Kamal

E, Tfrr Sr {Tcrd Td E I
cha, masgaek baft yk crof cha.
Yes,I have a packet of Yak cigarcttes.

qTd
Amrit

qr{r,qr+1c<r s r

6qq

rrrqq<Rr{E I
{, ffifl-+dT(
hoina, timi sno ket hau. dhmrapn khab cha.
No,you are a small boy. Smokingis bad.

Ksmal

h, yk curot mro cha!

Oh, Yak cigaetlsaregood!

r$ aho (an exclamationof

pleasureor su4)rise)
^
qf{ ahile nov
ar ka't where,in which
direction
ffi tira orvards
q<ta<ghaira towadshome
rqqfl hlkhabar news
tfrrr timisga vi yorl
trr pais money
qd,n masga? wi me?
+ 6< ek mohar one mohar
(a hal-npee)
$a kehi chaina it doesn't
nane

{M ja today
{frd masita wi me
<vfn das rupiy tenrutrEes
1e curof clgareffe
rT...
...n...na neither...not.
s-{rek bafl onepacket
+r5rh (anotherexclamation
of pleasureor surprise)
qq dhmrapn smoking(a
ratherhighflown Sanskrit
term)
l{{|E kharb lrad

Grammar

plural suffix -{ -har. No is it coect to use the plwal form of a

ver whenits subjectis a plural numericalquantity.

21 Possessionof portable items

Nepali doesnot have verb that is the equivalentof the English o
haveor to own, brotestlishes owneshipndtrnssession
in different
ways. The first way is usedin relation to things that someonecan
carDr around on hiher person. Often, ese ae things that arc
disposableor acquiredtemporarily:money, for instance,comesand
goes,anditems suchaspensgenerallyrun out of in andhaveto be
discarded.
Possession
is indicatedby using either one of two postpositionsthat
both have exactly e samemeaning: with. T\e two words are -d-rt
sga (somemesspelt {f, saiga) and -fu sita. These are added
directly on to nouns,namesandpronouns:
"q
t'fr-rr
qrr

keFsga
Kumrsg
masga

or
or
or

ffia
kpsita with the boy
Tcr'fud Kumersita with Kimar
,+kd
m?sjltawith me

Having addedoneor oer of thesewords to the possesser,

all that is
left to createa simple statementof possessionis to sttethe thing
possessed
andendwith e verb,which is always6 cha (becauseyou
are locating the possessionon the personof e possessor):
afrqrlNrr{frqt

grTKT+rqA I

I tyo mnchesga
d rupiy cha.

Thatman hastwo
rapeesrcn his
person).
..
iisgauF kalam ta. HehasaTnn
(on his person).

If the statement or question is out someoneno possessing

someing, usethe negativeform of 6 cha.
.-G,,-:q|(
qqt l-g;1 .|

rerrr
flT{ q r

masita pais chaina.

I don't haveany
money (on my
person).
Gitiisgasbunchaina,Gita doesnot have

arynq(wilur).

22 Using numbers without classifiers

When you arc talking aboutsumsof money,weights and measures,
units of time, distnces,or any otherkind of measureor unit, ere is
no need to add a classifier to the numerlsinvolved. or to use the

Currency
The Nep {tn rupiy rupeeconsistsof 100tr pais. There are
also specialwords for a quater-rupe($iF,Isk) and a half-rupee
(fr6 mohar or < mohor), though these tenns are gradually
falling into disuse,partly asa result of inflation. The abbreviationfor
upeeis Rs. in Romanscript, and a. ru. in Devangai.The Nepali
rupeeis sometimesreferredto as e . . ne. ru- (short for rrfr
tfirn nepal rupry), to distinguish it fiom the r. {. bh. ru.
(R-fr{ fi[q bhrati?a rupiy) or Indian rupee.
hices andsumsof moneycan be expressedin threedifferent ways:
. by usingnumberswith thetermsq sdheprusonehal4 {r4Tsav
plus one quarte and II- paune minus one guarter. There are
specialwordsfor oneaml a half and.two anda half:
{" t
Rs.l
ek rupty
d {q
{. t.1t(I{s.1.25
*fiq{qfrq
savek rup_iy
. !.k. Ils.1.50
6rfirq
{e{h rupiy . _
cfr{q
pauneour_ruprya
. r.rr. Rs.1.75
q{nR
a. 1 Rs.2
rirupM
. .Rt(Rs.2.25
+{r<{fiHi
savd ruBiy
q"fr{i
. i.r.. Rs.2.50
a{hi rupiy
by expressingsmall sumsin tenns of *({ mobar and$iFr sukii:
t r.rr. Rs.1.25
ek rupiy suk
+ ffiq {.lfi,r
q. t.t . Rs.l .50
fi-{ -f{
tin mohar
{. ?.ukRs.1.75
fu mohar suk
fr-ott s+I
{. .k" Rs.2.50
crsqr6{
nic mohar
qts{str
pcmoharsuk
{" .r Rs.2.75
o by exprcssingsumsin termsof {frrl rupiy andq pais:

\r45fc{i Fq {Ir ek rupiy paccis pais

ST fl{ c-^l- T{rr ek rupiy pacspais
gEFwr qT[t.rw d rupiy pacis pais
(g cdf {qr{ Eqr dui rupiy pacspais

T. t.RriRs.| .25
r" r.v" Rs.l.50
. q.re Rs.2.25
. ?.v" Rs.2.50

Weights and capacities

Therca.retwo systemsofmeasuringweightsandquantitiescurrentin
Nepal. One is e metric Europeansystem of kilogrammes(ffi
kilo), the other is a more complicatedtraditional systembsedon
capacity, which is particarly sted to measuringquantities of
gain:
fu
cauthi
onequrter of a mn
3TurqFn
dh mn
half mdn
ek man
orp rnn(=0.7 uesor 20ounces)
fr q;Ir
q{ gE^Er
(= two mns)
ek kuruv
qd crqf
(= eight mns)
ek pthi
(= 20 pthis)
ek muIi
d58
Neither kind of unit requiresthe useof classifiersor plural suffixes:
dfif3il{
crq
a{ qr;r ff{

ek kilo lu

onekilo of potatoes

d mn cmal wo rnns of rrce

Note at words suchas cup andpo are also treteds measuresof

quantityin phmsessuchas e following, and thereforee numbers
do not take a classifrer:
g*Eqr
fi qfa rqqr
Unts of time
{ {re

dkapciy
ek p ciy

two cupsof tea

onepot of tea

ek seka4{

onesecond

t< lt9.r

eK cll|n

o,le momenl

$ fr{c
ft'c slrdr

dui minel
tin gha4

two minutes
three hours

crS
t q{r
_ _ -J

.flq qq

EXERCISE 10

cha mahin

six months

st vara

sevenyeas

Translate the following sentencesinto Nepali:

I I have ten rupees nd a packet of cigarettes.

2 lVe have been in Nepal for three weeks.

Thereare ten men, threewotnenandfive boys in the post offtce.

How much moneydo you havewi you?
That Indian rnanhasno money,but the Nepali boy hasten rupees.
The rich farmer has ten pthis of rice and ten kilogrammesof
pomtoes.
7 Therearetwo cupsof tea on eachtable.
ll The teacherhasno books andthe studentshaveno pens.

J
4
5
6

EXEBCISE 1 Write six Nepali sentencesthat define eachof the

peoplein the left-handcolumnasteachers,usingan appropriateform
of the verb obefrom e righrhand column.Thendo e sameing
for eachonceagain,but this time locating them t home.
rT|{
bhi
k
didi
{r{{ bhihar
cr"
qTfi
gm

oalyu
m

F{f;6
Ql

f{Ter
q?+rl

silqak
gharm

q
fl
It9.1

E
intoNepati:
D exenctsete Translate
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
l0
II
12
l3
14
l5
16

one week
two men
threebooks
four boys
five rupees
six chairs
sevenwomen
eight classes
nine kilos
ten foreigners
two kilos
sevenand a half kilos
tbreeptluis
two anda half mns
pais
th-ree
rupeesandseventy-five
nineanda half rupees.

hunuhuncha
ho
chan
hun
cha
chin
h
chu

EB Jyoti'shouses
Anil ndBay re compaingnoteson Jyo, new acquaintnce.

qtr{
Antl

dfu+rtfc+aqqsq ravrwtvrqo r
Jyotikkativatgharharctant tapalaitnamcnaf
How many housesdoeslyui have?Do you btow?

sr{r s rfrfiTg5eTq<61: \rr sr { wa q t

qq
B{lay thh cha" Jyotik dui5 ghar chan: euF sno a
eut thlo.
I know. Iyoti hastwo houses:one big andone small.

q-d grdffivrwrgot
Anil

e. Jyotlko snoghar kah a?

I see.Whercis lyoti's small house?

ft-qc dffiqf

T{{Errqrs rsd dfrr+ *qr+qserrec vft r t

Bliay

Jyotiko sno ghar bajnn cha, tyah Jyoiko bvko

euf pasal pani cha.
Iyoti's fatherhasa
Iyoti's small houseis in the markery,Lace.
shoptheretoo.

{J
{J

e'
.\)

qifi

qfrfrffiqfre<frt

J-r

Anil

ani Jyotiko fhlo ghar ni?

And what aboutlyoti's big house?

:f

o
o
o

qc ffia-q<frqtrcre3+e araro r
dui f,oct{fh cha.
Biiay Jyotif,othloghrPokhbta
Iyoti's big houseis twokx away from Pokhara.

cf{d

frq1f,ffi6fr6t

Anil

tyo ghar nikkai lhlo cha?

Is that housevery large?

t{Ec

f,,ffio

II

By

II

.r+

fr6r E1 r
14q1q1qq-{r

ho, nlkkai thElo cha. tyo gbarn da,svatkofh chan

Yes, it's vety large. Therearc ten roomsin that house.

qf{q dfuqf.{Rc{{*or
Anil Jyotikoparivrpanitho a?
Is lyo's family large mo?

')

-{q E, ms{-tr rfi q rqf6rr6qr"-ft-g{r+TS-qrr{cr

In thls unit you will leam
. how to talk abo ownsship
. how to exDssand ask
about knowledg
. how to ask furth qusons

B{iay

tRtqI
tho cnama, tara nnih't dhani chan harek 6ahalm
Jyotiko buvk dur--crvafpasal chan.

It's not lfige, but they are rich. Jyoti's father has several
shopsin eveql town.

Anil

3lfrsft-+Er{-qrsq ?
ani Jyotikodju-bhichainan?
And doeslyoti nothaveanybrothersT

tq-qq

c1rsqftrfrs qfr s, fifr r@qrq rfr

Biiav

scrq{filql
chainan Jyotiki eF bahini cha, Knti. hijoja umDarjeelingko euf skiilm chin.
No. He has one sister, Kanti. Nowadays sheis at a school
in Darjeeling.

Qftrnr Jyoh-k lyoti's, belongingto Jyod (plural possessions)

c16 thh knowledge,informaon
dftrd Jyoh-lro lyo's, belongingto "Iyon-(singlepossesslon)
tr* dkki very (usedonly with adjectives)
<q-mt dju-bhfi broers
tdff Jyotiki Jyoti's, belongingto Jyoa (femalepossession)
s eu$ one(feminineending)
@qM hij.jr nowadays
Erffeq Drjiling D arjeeling
q< sk scoo.l

Grammar
23 Ownership:- -ko, - -k, -+r-k with nouns
and names
Unlessyou areusing-t -sgaor -fuc -sit to tlk out possessions
that are 'wi' an ownerat the time, e particle-+ -ko mustbe used
to link an owner to thing that is owned.The particle performsthe
samefunction, and occursin the sae placein sentenceor phase,
as the 'apostrophes' ( 's) in English, and can be attachedto nouns
andnamesin e sameway:

{r{+fu"drq

Rmko kitb
Setiko buv

Ram'sbook
Set'sfather

However, -fr -ko behaveslike an inlected adjective in that the

vowel must changeaccordingto the numbeandgenderof whatever
is owned- to -i whena femalehumannounis owned,andto - when

thc ownednounsare plural:

rffiB{rqT
cwsr rrri{F

RameSkim
Neplk5 ghar

Ratnesh'smother
Nepal's villages

As in statementsof possessionusing -t -sga or -fu{ -sita,

ltlementsof ownershipinvolve the useof the veb 6 cha:
<furr g-w+r<q o1 lRamesk dun
Ralneshhastwo
dju chan.
elder brcthercf*q <q & t
Bindiiko dju chaina. Bindudns nothave
an elder brothet
However, if somethingis being identified as a belonging then it
bccomesnecessaryto use ho insteadof 6 cha:
ev<af66q
u*<<q{c-<

| yo sno ghar Jyotiko

ho,
r Bindiiko d{iu
hoina"

This small house

is Jyoti'sHe is notBindu's
elder brother.

It is possibleto use - -ko in a string of ownerships:

frffiqFfr
Iyoti's friend
Jyotiko sthi

cfrlr+ ${ S{ Jyotikosthikobuv Jyoti'sfrid's fafw

vfrffi flffi
Jyotikosthikobuvkolyoti's friend's
ghar
father'shouse
+r+w
mffi (lrffi Sqrr Jyotikosthiko
Iyai'sM'sffids
house'swindows
Ta{rgTd{F
buvkoghark
jhylhar.

24 Words ior and:.{ r, 3frani

So far you have met two different Nep words that arc both
translatedasard. { ra is usedto link pais or the membersof a group
of nouns,pronouns,or names:
, qktr<<rq
Jyo6 Ambik ra Rm lyoti, Ambka and
&arl
*r r 6er+e-<
thebankandthe
baftrahufkghar
Dostoffice
cfr ani, on e oer hand, is usedto mean aad when we wish to
introduceanothetopic o to sk an additionalquestion:it can often
meanand hen.In spokenNepali, a sentencecan neverbegin with t
ra, but it is possibleto begin a sentencevirh qfr ant.

atfr i+; q o t

ani baik kah cha?

qfrr

ani?

+ftftrfrfrq r

ani timi ko hau?

Anil whereis the

bank?
And then?
anythingelse?
And who arcyqy,?

A third word for azd that is usedonly in scholarly,formal or official

contextsas substitutefor { ra is e Sanskitloan ifqTtth.

qfr{

,.<aq r

Subir

ho, tyo Ratan ho.

Yes, that's Ratan.

{rrr<
d{{{-d-{fi-+qrd-{?
nand tyo rto mofar RatDjfto Ephno motr ho?
Is thatrcd ca Ratanji's own ca?

rma

Affi , <-ri-+srdi+ *{ |
hoina, Ratanko sthilo mogar ho.
No, it's Ratan'sfriend's ca.

25 I know,you know, etc, using W thh

Subir

@ thh, often pronouncedth, meansknowledgeor inormation.

The most commonway to statethat you know somethingis to say
that the knowledgeexistsfor you or ro yo4 using the postposition{fg r-, which meansto or for:
T{r{ qrT

qFr< aqrffi cfr q{e t

nand tapro pani mo{ar cha?

ere is

acfffiqrErq I

rpirhh
r*r";j"i"*;;,,
"h"i"r. ('to you thereis

Do you too have a ca ?

ar{,R r< ol rm <I1 ea a< o t
Sub-rr ah, mem mofar aina" tara mem d{iyko eul motar
chaNo, I don't have a car.But my elde brother hasa car.

smr
{tr{<

<crqq--{+e-i{'dor

nand

tapfuo djy'ko molar kasto cha?

What'syou eldet bother's car like?
crcf8, {<rfr 6,\rd-<qttfr tcrffi -{
il"{++.{3fr
6FWrt.r?
djyko molr ali prno cha, tara rmro cha' ekdam
5i fiaina ni?
rmro. tapa<o mola"
"tra old, but it's nice, really nice.
Elder brother's cn is ruther
So do you havea ca o not?
rar qser qr{{-d qr o t
chaina! mero eut sikal mtrai cha.
No! I haveonlv a bicvcle.

t{<-{rrffir *ETE?Bindlipakkth* ;::Hf*:}

cha?

for sue? (w
Bindu is
ere certain
knowledge?')

{--{
Subir

Thesequestionsand statementsare frequently abbreviated:

qrr6 |
c6?
qr rr r

thh cha.
thh cha?
thh chaina.

I know.
Do you know?
I don't know.

Cl9 Ratan'smotorcar
Subir and Anand havejust spottedtheir friend Ratandriving pastin
a red car.

Sfrt

rr+{qrd+?

Subir

rto motsrm tyo ko ho?

Wo is thatin the reil car?

i-<
Anand

ffi,e+r
Rtn, hoina?
It's Ratan,isn't it?

3TF{<
nand

srfr stl fn'end

\rr{tT ekdam really, very
q|{{-d sikal brbyc,fe

<r rto red

er molar car
qr phno own

EXERCISE13 Answer the following questionsaboutDialogue 9:

r rc+ffi qrffi rqo t

q {qfi?.-fr{d

I cffiqrd+{o

Rataqifto phno molr cha?

rto molar ratanko ho?
Subirko phno motr a?

r Vffia"{+r<at+oc

SubirkodjykomoJarcha
ki chaina?

that stateownership,using the

EXERCISE14 Createsentences
clements
Drovided:

Grammar
26 Ownership using - -ko, -& -k, -sr-k with
unchanged(tdirectcase')pronouns
The postposition-f -ko can be addedto two kinds of oronounsin
exactlythesamewaythatit is addedto nounsandnames,i.e.wiout
requiing any change to be made to these pronouns. The two
categoriesare:
i Themostpolitepronouns(<c tapr',.rd y, *6 vatr,q< tralury,
ii Plural pronounsthat end in -.
aqf*ewrm S r

yahko 6ubhanm what is this

ke ho?
name?*
Derson's
+s qrrq :
vahko km ke ho? lihar is hisiob?
rfi-*-+Tnro
! unihrko lug
Theirclorhngis
anaufho cha!
slange!
*Using snFTFI6ubhatfamauspiciousnameto aska personal
nameis
morepolitean usingr nm.

your, our
27 [trlyr,
-d -ko cannotbe addedto e pronounsr ma d d t you, trfr Umi
you and qr{ hmi we. Instead,ese four pronounshave special
ownership('genitive')forms:
qm al

f.fqr
8l+rI

la
lrmt
nml

you
you
we

.
q-I {|II
-:-5 Tfl -5TI
ffi +rq qqrq {.
fuf r
:-5.

Ncpal.Nepali doesnot havea lette to represente Tibetansoundts,

ro it usesE ch instead.

becomes R
becomes
becomes ffi
becomes qt
mero nm Jeni ho.
timro nm Sonam
hoina, Chiring ho.

mero my, mine

tero your, yows
tinro yow, yours
hrnro our, ours

My nameis Jenny.
Your nane is not
Sonam,it is
Tsering.*
qr q-<qfir+rt r hmro thar
Our fnnily name
Arlhikri ho.
is Adhikxi.
* Theseare both Tibetan names,current among people
who live
along Nepal's norem border, and also amongTibetanrefugeesin

Owner

F.s.I
= {rlfERq
I DhanBahdur'swife
2I
3 My mother
4 They
5 He (High)
We

Quantity
2
mer duif
ghar chan

Possession
houses
I havetwo houses

2
0
4
0
9
5

elder sisters
mother and father
glandchildren
sons and daughters
cows (rl gau
far buffaloes (6 bhisD

28 One's own: emphasizingownership using

|rc++hno

The word qrd phno meansown and can be usedwith any of e

possessivepronouns.It doesnot matter \hetheit is being usedto
mearrmy owt o your or",nor anyoneelse's own; e word remains
the same.It is an adjective, however, so its ending must change
rccordingto e numberand genderof the thing or ings owned:
my own friend
mero phno sthi
qrn fffr
your own children
aqr fiFr rr tapafoa aphna
chorchon
3ilffi qfr Amiikl phni bahifr Amita's own
3ffi
younge ster
To emphasizethat the thing that is owned is e owner's very own
possessionand doesnot belong to anyonee1se,e ending of ww
phno is changedto -ai:
1sr qrd qtEr({ | Rme6kophnisikal Ramesfi'svery
own bicycle.
.-Dahim---.
3TFrflfrfld EEfr | Amitriki phrai
Amita's veryown
younge siste.
yinihar mer phnai Thesearemy own
fu"fi-{<rfld'
childrcn.
b{rb 11
chordchorfhun.

29 Asking questions:the use offrki

The word order of a questionin Nepali is exactly the sameas the
word order of a statement:when spoken,the difference lies in the
intonation; when written, the only difference betweena statement
and a question is e absenceor presenceof a question-mark.
However, Nepali-speakersfrequently end a question with the
queso-ning
word ftF ?ki? which literally meansor...?fr f+ r ho ki ?
and f+ ?cha ki ? meanis it or...?andis thereor...?
d-acr+qrffiqrff{
yo tap <ophno
Is this your own
sikal ho ki?
r* ?
cycle, or...7
ffifffi q"-Frq|g-6,q tapro gharm
Is therca bicyclein
E{?
sikal cha ki?
yout house,ot...?
The questionmight also include the negaveform of the verb, to
meanis it or isn't it? or is tereor isn,t there?

F*tt

ciyho?

?-

F*qI

sq[ 1-461{{ r

F*"

FITEF?
fuqr o f{ th I

ciyhoki?
ciy ho ki hoina?

ciycha?
ciy cha ki?
ciy cha ki chaina?

My nameis...My homeis in...

tn my family we are...people: (list the membersof your family,
usingrelationshipterms).
Next, give the following information out eachmemberof your
family:
My eldersister'snameis...
Sheis in... (givethenameof the town whercshelives).
Repeatthis informaonfor eachmemberof your family.
If any of your siblingsis married,statee nameof their husband
or wife.

D tO Wtrosebook is this?

is it ta?
is it teaor...?
is it tea or not?

rfrc
riffif{dw?
Rami yo kaskokitiib ho?
Whosetnok is this?

is hee any tea?

is theeanyEa o...?
is thercany taa
o.not?

frfr

qRqr. sfi affi tr+rs r

Piti

mero vicm tyo Sryaki chon-kokitiib ho.

I think thatis Surya'sdaught'sbook.

Theselast threequesonscarry the implication that if ere is any tea

the speakerwould like to drink it. Similarly, a sentencesuchas:
ffi+ q(qr r{ 6 fd ?tapfuoghann
Is theresaltin
nn cha ki?
yout house?
suggeststhat e personaskingthe questionis in needof salt.
EXERCISE

IXERCISE 16 Write simpleaccountof the membersof your

llmily, alonge followinglines:

Translateinto Nepali:

1 You (Middle) are my son's friend, aen't you? Is you name

Gautam(gautm)?
2Is you (Middle) friend's faer,s name GaneshMan (ga4e
rnn)? Do you know or don't you?
3 His (High) nameis Laksmi Nath Qakmi nth). I know at.
4 My homeis not far from here.Whereis your (Middle) home?
5 Your (High) father is at the bank.Does your motherknow?
6 Their (Middle) cows are in our field. Don,t ev know?
7 Our family nameis Pokharcllpkharel). We are Brahmins.
8 This is not your (Middle) watch.It is my moer,s.

qffr ofr s ( ?rcrq qr{rq I

ftq
Rmi Sryaki cho cha ra? rnali thh chaina.

frfr
Piti

Does Suryahavea daughtethen?I don't know.

q' FF
q;6-jrrEi|{r r q-:finF
@rr61 r
'qT T{r
mero vicrm unk'rkian chor ra e\ian chori chan'
I think he hasoneson md one daughter.

c|w
offiilqa'r
Ra6mi chon-konm ke ho ta?
What's the daughte'snamethen?

frfr

qr{ |

Pnli

thh aina.
I don'tknow.

tfrq
otrdqrqr
Rami chorko ndm ke ho?
What'sthe son'snarne?

ftfr

ssfrflq rsTr

Pn-ti

usko nm GiI ho.

His nameis Girish.

<f{q
Rmi

+frvr+v<+frfrI vr5ror

frfr
Priti

{frq

ani usko umer kati ho? thh cha?

And how old is he?Do you btow?
es+ s 6td qr a r
usko umer kati ho thh chaina.
I don't know how old he is.

s+o{ rfu-{r*qrFr{.sf+rrqs
rf{r*s+ I

Ra{mi e hikai a ni! kitjibm Girtko nm cha, yo kit-b

usaiko ho.
Oh, it's OK. Girish'snameis on the book This bookis his.
nc kasl6 w6ss2
-qr.
Icr thought,opinion
<z ra? indeed?then?

sq- umer age

ll, usaiko-ls landno_one
elre'g

EXERCISE17 Answerthe following questionsaboutDialogue l0:

r qftr{cw+roMfrqr
t frictrqnqrTrfrrjro f+cr

I gr:oMrrfrr

c q fs-{r{qr rfl, rq e r

Sryak katiian
chorchor.t-chan?
Pnko vicrm Siiryako
choi cha hi chine?
Sryakochorkonm ke ho?
ani kitbm kasLonm cha?

Grammar
30 Ownership using -mr-ko, - -kt',-+r-k with
changed ('oblique case') pronouns
Nepali grammarhasonly two cases.A noun or pronounis alwaysin
eithere 'direct' case,which meansthat it remainsasit appearsin a
dictionary, or e 'oblique, case,which meansthat its endig might
needto change.
A word will alwaystake the ,obliquecase' when a postpositionhas
beenaddedto it; whetherthis meansthat its enting actually has to

changedependson what e word is. Generally,nounsdo not chnge

in the oblique case,but certainpronounsdo. When -+ -ko is added
to pronouns(except(i) the most polite forms, (ii) plurals ending in
"fF -hr ancl (iii) q ma, t, ffi timi, and qrfi hmi - see
Grammar 26 and 2il), e pronounshave to be modified slightly,
and e said then to have changedinto e oblique case,from their
original, unchangeddirect case:
directcase

obliquecase

++-ko

3rI
q{I
.{q
3{
fq
t.r

3cq
*q
gq
{+
ffi
ffi

a
fr
firfr
c-fi

yo
tyo
u|nyini
tini

us
yas
tyas
utr
yitr
dn

usko
ysko
tyasko
unko
yinto
dDko

s/her
s/her/its
Ns/her/ts
r'Mrer(potite)
li,s/her(polite)
lr'slher{pote)

The obliqueforms of the pronounsfr yo rr'sandefr tyo faare not

pronouncedexactly as they ae spelled:
ect fom
qr
yo
*
tyo

obliqueform
q{
yas
a{q tys

pronunciation
'es'
'tes'

When the postposition-(I -li is ddedto the oblique forms of fr

yo, e tyo, and s i the word is often pronouncedas if the 's' has
beenlost nd the 'l' hasbeendoubled:
pronuciaon
'elli'
telli-'
q11tt
( " 1tE
'ulti'
pronouns
change
to eir oblique
in
the
box
above
must
All of the
postposition
The
examplesgiven
is
added
to
em.
forms whenevera
postposition
is -fr -ko, but
when
e
in the box show what happens
postpositions
when
oer
are
chnges
are
necessary
exactlythe same
involved:
,fi{

r+qr crf, r
4qq1fffi 5r

spelling
yasli
tyasli
usli

unli thh chainayasm cini cha?

S/Idoesnot know.
Is thae (any)sugar
in tbis?

An exceptionto this rule is the postposition-dtt -sga wi, which is

alwaysaddedto the unchanged('dircct case')form of a pronoun:

s*iqsrr'cr

sga pais chaine.

He hasno money
(on his person).

When* yo andefr tyo arebeingusedbeforea nounto rneandsand

fla4 they shouldtake their oblique form if a postpositionis addedto
the noun.

fr vqr
becomes
{q rr{{{T

dtu{

yo Sahar

this town

yas Sahann

in this town

tyo din

that day

tyas dindekhi

sincethat day

t , *t +t ? r t 't E q,+llq l8'11

tq q l {E

or

'4rrgqtt

qq sr{{qr
rrqlr
4i qfr rr{{{r
qI -dS1{{{r
4q q* g{Tfr srflqr

yas aharm
yo aharn
yas fhto aharm
yo thIo aharm
yas thlo purno
harm
-qgrr ar{<qT yo fhto purno
6aharm

e gg<r+fig fr |

l qr8

fr qcEr-qra

yi S{rhar
yisaharharm
fi gharhar
ti gharharb

whosebook?
whosesons?
whosesister?

thesetowns
in thesetowns
thosehouses
from thosehouses

31 Interrogatives:rc kasko whose, ffi keko

of what, rct kahko of I f,om wherc?
The Nepali word for wo?is * z ko? Wren e -fr -ko ar links
owner to owned is addedto e + ko that meanswho?, the latte
must changeto its oblique form, which is rF{Ikas:

yo keko msuho?

what kild of meat

is this?

tyo kukhurko
msuho.

That is chicken's
meat.

In Englishit is saidthata personis 'from' a paticularplace,if that

is wherethatpersonresidesor hashis/herorigin.In Nepali,thesme
cxpression
usesthe genitive-fr -ko, insteadof any word meaning
from:
s a-6tfi vr $ t
kahko mnche lno? Were is he fromT
(literally, 'he is
of u4rcre?')
aperson
s i{r{tEq" | ii Gorkhkonnche tut" He is from
Gorkha.
(literally,'he is a
penonof fud')
qt+qrqqt
fn*r+

fi yi ese andfr ti ose do not take oblioue forms:

fr116
fi rr6<qsm

n*rfrllsko wose?

l() them:

However,is is a rule at is ofien ignoredin everydayspoken

Nepali.It is particutarlylikely to be ignoredif yo andi tio ur"
separatedfrom e noun they describe by another adjective or
adjectives.The longer the following phrase becomes,e more
permissibleit is to usethe direct form yo ffusinsteadof its oblique
form rtITyas:
In this town:
o
In thisbig town:
o
In this big old town:

- -ko 's
kasko kitiib
kask chorhar
kaski bahin-

l\4ostotherinterrogaves(e.g. ke wnarZt{ kah where\ do not

huvcan obliqueform. so ey do not changewhen- -ko is added

becomes
(q tl

i' klr who?

yo kahkocrnalho? Whereis thisrice

from?
qrqq | tyo Ppkharko
It is rice from
Pokhara.
cmal ho.

EXERCISE 18 Create sentencesthat state ownership,observing

grammaticaldes to the letter ndusing tbe elementsprovided:
Possession
Owner
Qantlty
house
2
E.g.he
= 3({r<{dr RE1 usk dui ghff chan he has two houses
I
2
3
4
5
6

That boy
This big village
He (-ow)
SheMddle)
This man
\{ho

2
only 1
8
4
many
0

houses
teashop
daughters
sons
friends
friend?

Ett

ne cook andthe pilot

Rovi is soonto marry Shailendra'syoungersister,and the two men

|tl meetingfor e first tirne. Ravi's job 1alsshim all over South
Aoia, while Shailendrais tied down to his work in a Kathnandu
hotcl. Ravi, who is very much Shailendra'selder, feels he knows
moe out the world than Shailendra,but Shailendrahas the last
word.

rft fcfr<,Eqz
t< et, q,q ravr{<F*w6;o, {a 7
<fi ,q{ r
l< aq{{-d {rq rrrfi;;o,tst t
t cER.F. g. .wtrrq! r+frftrfrfrt
ta q{fu{r{qrsrcr r
ft ffi{{;crc*rfe<qfrqFot
ft< q rc F q qr{ qif-{ rr erfr gq, * uo.qqqrlq{
wggo, {rtr
{dfrqF |
*, +fefrgrE riF., FiFfiTsF,6FrTqr.E,
ft
+f6+r*qfrqFqt

al
-
rn+
{

*l/ Ir
J
-:
u^
6r)',
1l

l
'\)

0t
F+

tfq aq fi{qr qr{ ErTC ?

< qrg qrq

CL

<fr

o
o

CL

o
.)

c {q-{rq-+
rnce { fr t
"

qfer rqdqrn<aqrqf
qrq q58{ t

r fi qfitr{s q* f{qri-dtz

t< q cf{m rr fr rrerr{F+{rFrqr{r {frr56fr |

<fr q,ffiqrRt
{t+q , q qfqqtu oe {M vr { r
rF{ i, rd <r!{qfuq(FqrR-{Rffi@crrolfttffivnr
q|Ql

In this unit you wlll leam

. how to talk about what you
and othes do no]mally,
habituallyor in the near
ftrture
. ho!rto us simpladverbs
. how to discuss times, days,
and tquency

{ttfq a<q q-Erfuqr qr (Krqfo q $rs{ qrru te-d q sa q-df\r

deor

{r{{if fo work
qt-snLondon
Royal
Nepal
Air
q'c.
Cotpomcion

+dt usual.ty
T.
1.
Err hotet
iRr /ndra
qrT ro go
qfa+ fourisr
al6 nr some.imes
tuqr light
*116 ousrde
3{ITtO Corne
n@ cfr never
crrgesr
Qi right here
- qrtr for
t always
sr'rTfood
qsrnTo coo.k
Tro be
qfrqfu a lifile
qr coo.k
to
tavel
lE'!
$t{cr{ Saurday
d De,li
ffi asry
ftr-ff Calcu
gt to eat
arqr Dhaka
6wr week
+tt* Karacr
cf6 afte
3t Dubar
R( resfauranf
6t{ v-6rwaeroplane
da 1eo*,

qrfiE pilot

Ravi
Shailendra
Ravi
Shailendra
Ra
Shailendra
Ravi
Shailendra
Ravi

Shailendra
Ravi
Shailendra
Ravi
Shailendra
Ra

You're Shailena,aren'tyou?
Yes,I'rn Shailendra.
You areRavijyu,aren'tyou?
Yes,I'm Ravi.
Wheredo you work, Ravijyu?
I work t RNAC (theRoyalNepalAir Corporation).And
you?
I work at e Shangdla Hotel.
Do you go outsideNepal sometimestoo?
No. I nevergo outside.I am alwayshere.But you
alwaysgo outside,don't you?
Yes, I travel a little. I go to Delhi, I go to Calcutta,I go
to Dhaka,I go to Kaachi. SometimesI qo to Dubai as
well.
On what work do you go outside?
I am an aeroplanepilot, you know!
Don't you go to London?
No I don't. Usually I go only to India. Many foreign
touristscometo Nepalby our flighr.
I too cook food for the foreign guestsin our hotel, you
Know.
Oh, you'rea cook?

llhllllendra
Rlvl
fihullendra

Yes, I've been that hotel's cook for five years.

There, how splendid! From now on I will come to your
hotel every Saturday and eat good food.
But I shan't be here! After a week I go to London.
There I will open a new restaurant.

Grammar
32 The dictionary form of verbs
A verb is a word that indicates e performance or occurrence of an
uction, or lhe existence of a state or condition. English verbs are
words like see,un, do, eat ar,d hea. So far, you have encountered
(he various forms of t and that mean am, ts, and are. These are all
lbrms of the Nepali verb l hunu o be.
The dictionary form of a Nepali verb always ends in -1 -nu. This -1
cnding is attached to e 'verb base' - the part of the verb that
distinguishesit ftom all other verbs.
For instance,
tti garnu to do consists of verb base \- gr- + the dictionary
form ending -{ -nur
dE basnu to sit, to rcside corsists of verb base d{- bas' + the
diconary form ending -{ -nu;
q bohu to speak consists of verb base dq- trol- + the
dictionary form ending -{ -nu
and so on.

33 The habitual presenttense

A tense is a set of forms of a verb which indicates what the
relationship is between e time the verb is spoken or written and e
time when its action takes place. That is: are you speaking or wring
the verb after it has taken place, while it is taking place, or before it
takes place? Most Nepali verbs have a full set of pst, present and
future tenses. The habitul pesen tense is used to make stalements
about habits or regular occurrences such as I do, he lives, they eat,
she takes, ec.It can also be used to refer to the fuve:. I go tomonow,
they come next year, she atrives on Thursday, etc.

The habitualgesenf tenseof all Nepali verbs consistsof the verb

base+ a verb ending.(The verb basesintroducedhereae the Dresent
tenseveb bases.As wilJ be explainedlater on, thee are also oast
ensebases.)Nasalizationis addedbetweenthe baseandendinsof
cenain verbs.If e ve is affirmative (I da / go fcorre). its ening
is one of the o forms of fl to e as set out in Grammar 11. If th;
verbis negavelI do not,I don't go. I don't come).its endingwill
be -1dain + e sameendingtakenby E in e affirmative form of
the verb. The only exceptionto this rule is the form of the verb taken
by {, where-Q in the affirmavebecomes-rr dina in e nesative:
Afrrmative

-E
-q
-W
-q
-E
-q

Negative

-cha
-chu
-as
-chau
-cha
-chan

--{
-{
-iS
-5T
-s
El

-daina
-dina
-dainas
-dainau
-{*ina
-dainan

(witho, , efr)
(withq )
iwitr i
twith ffi)
(with rfr. rfi-f
(ltl fr. fi. Tfi.ih. fifr,
andtheoluralformsof

sfr,foanocfi)

{{ lffnu

o do

Negave

Affinaative

rlngulrr
{

.r

qq TT
.re q

rft,fi-{
rt

qq\

hffi,ffi{
s, q,etm.l

I6T
116
.tq

sff,fufr.tnfr
fr,fr
sn-tr,m-tt,mqs

+ -T =
+ -FRT=
+ -(;TI =
+ -{jT =

llI
rlI
lr\

I|<TT

rrcq{
rfF

rrt
TTq

In V-ves, a 'half n' (; ) is infixed betweenthe bseandthe ending

in the affirmative form, and the vowel is nasalizedin the negative
form. This is an important spelling convention, though bo
affirmativeandnegativeforms arepronouncedasif therc is an 'n' in
the middle of e word:
!tJnu to go
Neqative

Affmative

alngulrr
There are thee categoriesof verb: C-verbs,V-verbs nd Vv-verbs.
If the baseof a verbeudsin a consonant.
it is a C-verb;if if endsin
a vowel it is a V-verb andif it endsin two vowels it is a W_veb:
Dictionaryform

Base

Carcgory

"t
Eq

grrnu
basnu

b do
\o srl rcside {{T-

gabs-

C-verb
C-ver

fl
91
qT

hunu
khnu
nu

tobe
to eat
to take

qTfr-

hukh-

V_verb
V-ve
V_verb

1l-gf
]rc1

uru
piunu

to come
to drink

qfsft-g-

upiu-

W_veb
W_ve

The way in which e verb baseand the ending arejoined together

dependson whicb categorythe verb belongsto. Alt C-verbshave
in the sameway asthe verb Q to do in which the final consonantof
e baseforms a conjunctwi the ending:

g T +. i - q

m, fi-{s
it
fr+, fdfi-F
g;,r,cfr
fr,firfr,ffi

qt+ + -qi t
gfI
"fT+; + -6 =
ql + + q* !
gr.bT
qr+;+-t'(=
r :--sql + + ql
sT+; + -d' =
qt+ + q
gT+.+-E =
--qFba
q l + - +C
=
n1
sT+; r -Eq

fr,fr

qt+ + tq

=
.-l

:-

:-

q q.!
--!4-+
ql ql
ql c ' 1' 1

---i--

qrqi l

--!-

--::q l c'1 'l

qtq

e.ff-{.fr-fr-{F,ftfr-{
In W-vebs, the second of e two vowels is nasalized before the
ending is added:
ql{

unu o come
Affunative

slngular
IT

rfr,{rfs
d

frfr.fdfrEF
s,,d

fr,fr

qtg + +-

qts
3lif
3liI
:rrg

=q

-.=qr$fr
+ -al
+ +- t tl = qrfriq
+ + -Et = fiio
+ r- -6 =qrfu
+o+ - = qrq

-.
sitg +

sflE,fufr-6s,frfiq

Negatve

qrs+'+-;r= 3Trft:
qrs+**-fr = ql
qrs +'+ -i{ =
qrs +-+ -id =
qrs+"+ - =
qrs +"+ -;r{ =

fltiiq
qtq
qr{
sre1

With e High pronouns(dcrq, +*. +*. egr e verbs behave

differently. The baseis simply the dictionary form endingin -{, and
the affrrmative and negative endings ae -.6 huncha and -.
hunna respectively. The verbs remain exactly the same in the
singularand the plural.

High orms
..-:
.r garnu to do
Aptmative
Negative
rtl + -;6
" t , ll. I + - . . 1
. |1E.
3[Tg;[unu o cone
Affimative
Negative
3T31+ -g.E
qT3{ + -gq
= 3rrc1go

q{{qf5ffiIql

3T|gTilq

I work in Pokhara.
Theylive in Nepal.

to describefacts or situationsthat are regularly or generallytrue;

q6{r

m ffi ge r
} fuqFrais rrtq 6'o1 r

Dajeeling tais good-tasting.

Many of Nepal's armers
are poo

for ctionsthat arc going to occur at a specific time, usually in the

nearfuture:
*k q eusqqtrc t
TomorrowI (shall)go
to London.
q qqtq'-rqfu rqfm T;6 r
After an hou I shall tell you.
The habitualpresenttenseof g{ can be usedin placeof the fr ando
forms, in order to ceate an important difference of mening.
Comparee following four sentences:
q{{E I
I am here.
This is a simple statement of fact and therefore it needs nothins more
than the simple present tense E.

qrd |

I am in the office every dayHe is alwaysthere.

s sri{d6 r

The habitualpresenttenseis used

ertrffi

3rMq{{E I
I am here todayThis implies that I am regularly here on this paticula day: is is
whereI am on this day of the weekor that this is a statementabout
the futue: I shall be here nday.
A|ly sentenceat is in tl)e presenttenseandusesan adverbsuchas
usually,always,every clay,monthly, oflen, etc. !qU!! usethis tense:

34 Using the habitual present tense

for habitualaconsin e present:
q fre-amr 6rq qd r
sfi-{F q|dqrqrq I

Again, this is a simple statement of fact and therefore it needs

nothing more than the simple present tense q.

I am here.
This means l am ere (on a regular basis) or I shall be here.
qrq q T{q I
I am herc today.

35 fwfr usually
qe is a combinaonof muc, many with q srmilarly.
Thereforethe phrasemeans,literally, 1iftemuchor like many, andis
usedto meanmosly or usually:

of wtte"-dnrTkTqri6?
ffitsqtqof

o*" u"
^u:f;,|:F**t
Nepalisare mostly Hindus

* trr nce is virtually a synonymfor food in Nepali.

# n only, vfr also, too, even

form rT1[)is usedto mean
ffi 16d occasionallyits non-emphasized
muchthe samething asthe English word only, but it comesafter the
nounor pronounit qualifiesin a sentence;
q c rl(d EFE I
Only I go to India (I am the only one
who goesto India).
q T|{d qr !

"6

g TTTT|{ Fb

g rrm qr eT;tt t

I go only n India (India is the ony

place I go to).
Only he eats ice (he is the only one
who ets rice).
He eatsonly ice (jlce is the only thing
he ets).

The first meanineof q is too or also;

q cfr a( qF I
I to<tgo to Ina (as well as other peoplQ.
q rrnaq qF6 t
I go to India t@ (s vrcll as to other
s qi{ rr F6 r
s rne q eF6 r

countries).
He too eatsice (as velT as other people).
He eats rice too (as well as other foods).

The secondmeaningof rfr is even,especiallywhen it is usedin

negativestatements:
T(qf TTq |
Thereisn't even anyie in E house.
rnh\rdsfrqiqfr
|
I don,rhave,r", o.- *p"r.
tr qrqr r{r cfr ffi W I In your houseevena mouse
is hungry.

37 +F?
whan?, ++rsornetimes,frFcfr
neyer
+ft is primarily an interrogaiveword meaningwhen?
ffir qrcd E qr{;6 ? l./'.}Iendo yotw t you go to Ina?
{f ilqf. fFCF6{ I Wen do they/w theygo to themarket?
Two very useful two-word phases that include tf{ and its
emphasizedform n@ are: +@ t@ sometimes,and n@ q
never. T}le first is usually only used in affrrmative statements,the
secondcan be usedonly in negativestatements;both can form part
of a question:
O fifi+|{1rqcqEFb?
A q.{
a r6t +@ vft er6 wr6q 1
A fl"-q CFqFi { f{q
{rrvr;o r

ut *r=-fnr

Sweshdoesn'tgo home by

3.Olew postpositionsi -qf@

aften -qqup to, until;
for

The single-word postpositions -cf6 aner and -qrq up tu. until

(rronounced samma) arc used in exacdy e same way as other
sirnpleposposions:

irwfu
sq'ffi

qq

shegoesfrom Delhi to
Kathmanduby plane.
ErarIT
c-d5 {fu s d{q
6{g;o lFrom fwo o'clock until
six o'clock he is at home.
TIreyorycomeasfar as
icfi-Es wqEq qr {rs-t t
my nouse.
.n qTfir is one of a small number of two-word postpositionsthat
bcginwith the ownershipsuffix -fr. It meansfor, in the senseof for
p sakeof or intendedfor:
e-fi ffifu

fia.qrc{q

w6ru-*ra
nto-q r

lgeIIXTTtr"
qf frofq ls(rr

-rrrr 6r r

foodformvfarher.
Hecooks

?his book is for him.

fffi qrfir '16

wnat do you do for me?

EXERCISE19 Tanslateinto Nepali:

Dtns he nevergo rcre?
He nevergoes,but sometimes
I go.

The pososition -{rc, despiteits primary meaningof _om,is also

usedto menby in connectionwi modesof trnspo:

-dilfir

until tomorow
asfar asPokhara

'(Frt is often used in pbasesat also contain eier -{.c .&omor

'tfrr fom, srce (do not forget that only -fa can be used with
oxpressionsof time to mensrnce):

Doyougo a Nepatsorrettrcs?

38 Modes o transport

g-r zqn4+ra" qr q. +e*ra

fr{Fc
frrl-<rgq

after that
afrer 2 o'clock

I We won't go to e market today. There isn't even one rupeein

the house.
2 What work doesRju do?He works in e NepalRsa Bank' His
elderbrotherworks theretoo.
3 Wheredo you (High) live? NowadaysI live in Kathnandu.
4 Doesyou (High) yo.nger brothergo to e off,rceby taxi? No, he
goesby bus.
5 Peoplefrom Darjeelingusually speakgoodNepali.
EXERCISE20 Constructsentencesalongthe following lines:
I
,
J

4
5
6

Subject
q
fi-
ffi
t{F
s
afrqr

Time

Place

Yetu

every day
usually
always
nowadays
never
afterone week

Katbmandu
in Pokhara
in faer's shop
in Ram's office
in school
London

go.
ve.
speaK;ONepal.
work.
speakEnglish.
goes-

Cl tZ Womenin the vittages

Anne, a Nepali-speaking British woman who works in Kathmandu,
is ming her first visit to rural Nepal. She is now on farniliar terms
with Shanti, who lives in the village where she is staying. Unusually
for a Nepali woman of her age, Shanti is unmarried.

q
ffiwd"nfr+e"aer r
snffi rwo+eqq 161ifr rssq q-Ratd{ TfuqI
c{ fd.qtd fuqr s{h r qn e-|il{ iiqr @,i{ ?
sn ,tqq*, qr cfr .8 ! nn.q sEfu1 { p{rfu{ ErEq I
ir{qfu rfr q{fl qqrffi qrfir qr cfrrtfu I

qsrcfr-qTF{tr{Frrdqr,rsot fo t
mffi rrn qqrgl qr rffi-qfr{QF- rq F6r
q
t
ffi{Fs@qF{rrmr*rq1
r{K
7
Tsr$q 6p$iaq,fr wtcr fr q
srm 6-ffi{s
r{

qs-.{

c{
mfr
{

w*
q{
ffffi

firq;'

frqqsctrqfrqrcere t
$ rqrfqfd{rlsn-rrffi<.r{ TrcuFot
ffiqrcqfrfq<'fr+fr.rre t
t
@grd-mFrcEcdrfuqfrt@go
qfrftfr*6r{ffirat
q,q6@cF{t{q

fuE at what time?

s4 to get up
vtd at six o'clock
crs"\ elde brother's vife
-tfi abou
iqfu so,thatmuch
qfr enly aloming
dtqr dar&
i emphasizingword
qfd

cold

ura sprfug, watsouce

scfu aft that, then
c* al (emphasized)
qT e

c{

il{ fdffiqffiE

rtrr rrq -{,fi r

srr q q-{qr-qrqnq{qr+ts , R rnrmrr{+ ort t {t r

q ffi srcf s {ft-<eq6-.ofr r

sn e-6vm *vr roa;o recscfus8, 6ra_reg6.o, w

c{

qpa5;s1ffinqpag-g I
s{ rfiftrfl.q\rdqrg.o ?
1rf {fl , <q$r ( rd,rEr1-6I
c{ {-qsqgrrtts,qfd I
{rfr e-t,qqr<aqfu rnfdr { qffie-<
qqR {Fd{ r|1qF6q I

ac+rew.sa Iqg *l;

rffi easy
an ta ve, eside
rrq ae
gq ro s.leep
qrc-reandsandface
II to wash
< wet or inigated ield
1one,on one's own
s{T to renm
rcqR{ at half past eleven
s time, tm
ffi.tife
qr ard
@ maiage

At what time do you usually get up?

Anno
Shanti I usuallyget up at o'clock. But my sister-inlaw getsup at
about4 o'clock.
Anne Why doessheget up so early in the moming? At about4
o'clock it is very darh isn't it?
Shanti It certainly is dak, and it's cold too. Sister-in-lawgetsup
andgoesto the spring.Then shemakestea for everyonein
the house.
Anne But it's easyfor you. In the moming you've no work, is
that so?
Shanti I live herein my paents'homeyou see,I don't havemuch
houseworkto do.

Anne
Shanti
Anne
Shanti
Anne
Shanti
Anne
Shanti
Anne
Shanti

And whendoesyour (elder)brotherget up then?

He sleepsuntil 7 o'clock. Thenhe getsup, rvasheshis face
and hands, dris tea and goes to e frelds.
Does your brother go to the fields on his oum?
No, he goes wi Faer and younger brother.
Do ey only retum in the evening?
No, after I I o'clock all e men of the village return from
the fields. And at about half past 1I they eat rice.
Is it always the women who cook the rice?
Cooking the rice is always the women's job.
Do the men never cook e rice?
Where do men ever cook rice?* They do not, in our house

that is lwayssister-in-law'sjob.
Anne
Do you eat in the eveningtoo?
Shanti Yes. 'Weeat in the moming andthe evening,twice a day.
Anne
How hard your sister-in-law'slife is!
Shanti After marriagewomen'slife is hard.
Anne
And will you not marry then?
Shanti No, I will nevermarry.
*No/e.'This is sarcastic,and shouldnot be taken
literally.

tt is fairly uncommonfor speers of Nepali to use thesefons in

conversation,and in many contexts they would sound almost
pdanticallyover-correct.They are encounteredmuch more
commonlyin literary, offcial, andjoumstic language.

41 Times of day
The word E is derived from the verb orq which meanso nng
slite. It tansltesas at... o'clock:
g$.{!I
q"r
1E

at 1 o'clock
at 2 o'clock
at i o'clock

Three further words are of use nere: +if6 p.rusa nafi: <1ct pIUs a
quare;vtn ,llJnusa quaner:

-{r-{{
q q{

c qK {

at a quater past 3
at half past 5
at aquar t er b4

This is the generalpattem,but thereae two exceptionsto it:

. Insteadof q f *, it is customaryto expressalfpast I as6
qq:

Grammar

. Insteadof q <e, it is custornaryto expressalfpasr 2 as+fi

40 The habitual pnesenttense: feminine orms

To makeit clear whetherone is talking abouta.m. or p.m. (because

mostNeps do not usethe 24-hourclock), it is sometiles necessary
to specifye time of day when using +. by usiog one of te
following terms:

The 6 forms of fl havespecialfeminine forms (seeGrammar 11).

Thesemay be usedasfeminine endingsin the habitualpresenttense:

qr$s r
iqr I
ktql
g q" |

efrgftq r

You Q-ow) come.

ou (Middle) do.
Se (Low) goes.
Sfte (Middle) sleeps.

Eachof the four affirmative endingshas a negativecounterpart.The

differencebetweentheseand the masculinenegativeendingsis at
the -- -dai of e masculinebecomes-- -di. in ttr" f".io",

qr+Cr
ktqTrr<r I
s F51$foq1
frf kd-{ |

You (I-ow) do not come.

ou (Middle) do not do.
Se (Low) does not cook
She (Middle) does not weep.

frErt

s
iIFFT

(rfr

f*Erqqreq
fdd g{
c+loq
qEs{

rnoming (from dawnto late moming)

dayrime(from late moming to dus$;
also usedto meana.femoon
(aftersunset,beforcnightbegins)
everxing
night
at I o'clock in the moming
at 2 o'clock in the aftemoon
at 6 o'clock in the evening
at 10 o'clockat nit

Two further times of day are{{ dusftandwtq

miay.

D+2 Oaysof the week

The word for day that is usedto denotea day-longperiod of time is
]-*, but when it is necessaryto specfy one particular day of e
weel the word usedfor day is +f< (pronouncedbr):

qrq + Er( ?

I4that day (of the week) is it today?

Accordingly, each day of the week has a Nepali name that ends in
E-t, just as e names of English weekdays end in .-day,:

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesdav

.II{(r{R
*q-{R
T-.d-{r<
qtFIt

Thwsday
Friitay
Saarday

fr{R
lI-rK
xfr{R

Nopalihas severalwords that ae nea synonymsof (fa . Theseare

q, qrfr andre. For the tirne being,userr+ in peferenceto these
olhers.
IXERCISE 21 Constmctsentencesalong the following lines:
Subject
I qT
a

efrqF
rdEs
fufi-{

4
5

ln everydayspokenNepali, e word qfg the day betoreyesnrday

is usedto denotea dayof thepreviousweek,while]rft oeris used
to denotea day of the week to come:

.tr9^"""

qfi.TITFEI(

Iast Fiday
next Safrirday

4l Frequency: re+
The word q-4f car be used in combination with a number to
communicate the frequency of an occurrcnce:
\r'[ T?F

5re+

frcr{

one titrE, once

two times, twice
thrce times

Thesephrasescan the-nbe joined to a period of time (a week,a day,

etc.), using either -+ or -q , to expresshow often something
happensor is donewithin that period:
q{T 3|q \rfi Qq{r d cFF

My mother gof.sm the market

q!|{ qTt;6 I
oncea week.
+tf qf{fi 6*1 o1uT.rr mii qF | My younger siste goesto
schoolve timesa week.

Verb
Place
eat rice.
at home
in e hotel
drinks tea.
come.
to my house
go.
to the temple
t a ftiend's house sleeps.

EXERCISE22 Consftuctsentencesalong the following lines:

Subject

In Nepal,Sundayis the fist working day ofthe week,andoffrcesare

closed on Saturdays.In India, both Saturday and Sundy are
holidays.

Time
at 7 o'clock
in the evening
on Thursday
twice a week
on Saturday

I
7

ilc
srQs

4 fffi
5 ft-frEs

from
2 p.m.
Wednesday

to
6 p.m.
Friday

Tuesday
I a.m.

Thursday
10.30"m.
2p.m.

veb, etc,
am not at home.
arenot in
Birtanagar.
do not work.
do not go out.
do not study.

CltS ttiringa rickshaw

lt llt a late eveningin winter. Ashok, a govenment officiI, needsto
lt to his home in Marajganj, a nortlem suburb of Kathmandu.
RunBahadur.a rickshawdriver, is not keenlo travel out sofar at this
tlme of night, but he is preparedto take Ashok pat of the wy if the
frriceis right.

q{sntqrfrfrr
ws
qrfrow r*g$q rr{vrggo I
rqa-or<<
q*r<rs,q
t{fr{rffit
{t{

rq e-q$ i.ffrq, iTftqT{Tq,reqp{ Israro,ffi ffi o tqewm

q{{

crkqravsqqrcro r.{d{ra-qfffi ft-{q |

go,6.o rr<+ftro ftz *fr {< rqqrqfutns r
.K |

dl

{1.
':/

/H

wr;|-{rg{q-dr<6E{?iT,c=nq{firl1Q1 |
q rqrq {Fm H I
c{tr qqrs ffi r q a
-qrff
rqrd{rs{ *rff+ggot:

GI
rl

lrrd

tt

oo
et o 3
oo
--l(.
--.+\

4)

6-ll

'q

(rl

In this unit you will lean

. how to ask or tell peopleto
do or not to do thinga
. how to use the postposition
-qrwith the indirct obiects
of vebs
. how to use the altemativ
negativefoms of the hbituat
pesonttnse
. how to use the postposition

-+{

. how to use the wods for but

xy andbecajse; 6xpss
ag[eene and assent

m-{rffi{r,

f.isn{ te,frvrffio*@

{vr{{rs{ fiq {frq f{1QqarErds{frqqrq {rfr { qrqr sr

s r+rqrsrqq-dfc+sn-.o
r
{qr{{s qqrffir{ {dfrflnqrsT- rqqrosrR r
o rq-qrffi{r.

qt=B'1Fr q"i 1

{ur{{g{ rqrffit q qOrfr

wiq< r*fr ++rc<
<rrqr+frqrsq r
qqq-$rfiIqftg$q
rr fucr=qr
;6,
q"{fi

,q rwflK.s-drs

fic1rrnbtsaw
qfr empty
qq o sr dolI4t
qei\ratE Mahaajganj, a suburb of
Kamandu
i\to take

r
@,f to act qckly, huny
lhey! / do you hear?
@to gtve
r though,but, then
@to setout,get going'
x anywhere
crrlto get, frnd
vwfin makea difference
qTeven moe
rS t ro be expensive
foi quickly

{f ro looft
lto tansPort takesomewhere
wfwre -aampa4a part of
Kathmandu
.qrffi a-xi
q4 now
t won't you?
@rto act slowly, be lae
Ba ight
q-crurry
aqlslto drive, oEnte
* .s+meansbo to walk wtd,to begin ajoumey o to setout.

Ashok
Hey rickshaw!Is it empty?
Ran Bahadur It's empty, sir. Sit down. Where will you go?
Ashok
Marajganj. How much moneywill you take?
Ran Bahadur Look, I won't go to Marujganj at night. t's a long
way, andit's cold too. I will take you only as far as
Lazimpat.Pleasetake a taxi ftom thee,won't you?
Ashok
All right, aU right. But how much will you take?
Ard look.I'm in a bit of a hurry.Go quickly.
Ran Bahadur In a hurry sir? Right, give me 50 rupees.
Ashok
50 rupees?But I wouldn't even pay a taxi 50
rupees!
Ran Bahadur How much would you pay a taxi then?
Ashok
This isn't a txi, it's a rickshaw.Right, take 20
rupeesand get going.

Rln llahadur Give me 30 rupees,Seb. I won't go anywhereat

night in this cold for 20 rupees.
That's fine. Don't go anywhere!I'll take anoer
rhok
rickaw.
Rln Badur You won't find another rickshaw in this cold.
There'sonly me now.
OK then.I'll go by taxi. It makesno difference.
Arhok
Rrn Bahadur A taxi will be even more expensive,sir. Ard you
won't get a taxi roundhereat night. All right, give
me 25 rupees.I'll takeyou quickly.
Right, right. Now don't be slow, drive quickly.
Arhok

Grammar
tl4 The imperatives
An imperativeis a form of a verb at is usedto give ordersor make
rquests.Imperativesrange ftom peremptorycommandsto polite
rcquests.[n English, the different levels of politenessare usually
distinguishedby the use or omissionof a word such asplease,or a
phrasesuchzs would you... ? but in Nepali levels of politenessare
hnplicit in the gammaticalforms of the variousimperatives.There
ue four levels of politeness,correspondingwith the Low, Middle
pronounsplus an extra Super-Politelevel.
undHigh second-person
is kelyto
arcnotfonslhata foeign^speaker
Thel-ow andSuper-Polite
urc.Thefour levelsaregivenbelow,usingtheve lt odo.TheEnglish
baslations
arcnot meantto beJitral,but to give a senseof thelevel of
noliteness.
do! (usedto give commandsor
adviceto a pesonyou would
normally addressas
dol (usedto instucta personof
lower sttusthanyourself,or a
familiar, whom you would
ccressas rlirJ

LOW

gr

MIDDLE

rR

gara

HICH

rf${

garnuhoepleasedol (usedto aska request

of soneoneyou would address
politely asrr )

SUPER-POLITE rifrcr

garnuholpleasewouldyou do! (tsed to

ask a requestof someoneyou
might addressdeferentially)

You are advisedto use the High imperativesin all contexts,at least
until you are sueof your reasonsfor using anotherlevel.
Negativeirnperativesare exactly the sameas positive imperatives,
exceptthat they take a negativeprefix, - na-.
ir.i{
LOW
nagar
don't!
MIDDLE
ngara
nqdon't!
HIGH
If{Rf nagarnuhos pleasedon't!
SI,]PER.POLITE rIlnTTnagarnuhol pleasewouldyou not do!
Clearly, the more polite the imperative is, the longer e word
becomes:in its positive form the most polite is a word of four
syllables,whie the leastpolite has only one syllable.The High and
Super-Politeforms consist of the diconary form + a suffix (e
suffixes are -frq and -frcr respectively).For C-verbs,e Low and
Middle forms are simply the verb basewithout nd with a final
-a
vowel respertively.
Summary o imperative forms
C-verbs
affirmative

,
---:.o ao
tt1

Low
Middle

,I

FIioh

irq

Super-Polite

rr$rqr

negafrve
Low
Middle
HiCh
Supe-Pote

Tf(

r\
iFR

i.r{
rrr$l-qr

dgro sif
{{
{{T
c *.18r.1
c+ ' tQr .1 i

Dictionary fonn Impenve base

l nl kc
li dva
k, w/Jsh
Lt wcep
lo he

l .t

+
pl-

tqi

q-

"

ji5
{.t

1t.>
6r-

'l'he second vowel is dropped ftom e bases of W-verbs:

lt, come
lo send

qrs

Eummaryo imperativeorms
V-verbsand VV-vebs
firmave
qlnP
ET
Low
Middle
High

Ers
qrrd{

s-P

q-{-qr

lnn it E<e
q

gge)$a

fi
*s
ftrr{ Kd{
fiTdr K{r

negat| e
;n|T
Low
Middle ftffs
ilqrTd{
High
ilfldr
$P

3li&f b a't
3T
qrg
ffiTA{

qrs5dr

-rsd-dr

{3{T
qF

r6t

ftrTq ir{{
fidr

CAqbsvJ
rt6l
(|6t
q-F{{

q5qr

|{a(

ccr{{r

One additionalfonn of the imperativeis simply the dictionary form

of a verb wi its final vowel lengthenedftom g u to s . This you
use to give specific instructions to a person of lower status than
yourself,or to a familiar. Again, the negativeform hasthe prefix {-:

ras

r tq- i ] | ttq- Yqi

ft (rn

iFRT
.rqt'lQt*j
.rc *tgtq I

The Middle imperativesof all V- and W-verbs rake the suffix -g

-, which is addedto the verb base.At Low andMiddle levels, five
commonly used V-verbs behave irregularly by adopting special
imperativebases.Theseverbsare:

.c_

ffqmrql

tr sF6 r

nfi |

Now read this book.

Don't wash the rcd clothes in
hot water. They'l| fade,
you know.

EXERCISE23 Translatethe following commandsinto Nepali:

a
I
2
3
4

addressingthe personconcemedas ffi:

Hey, don't sit on that chai, sit on this chai.
SpeakNepali in Kathmandu,don't speakEnglish.
Readthe big red book, don't readthe newspaper.
Give the boy an apple,don't give him an orange.

b
5
6
7
8

addressing the person concemed as d{I:

Pleasedon't come at 6 o'clock, come at about g o,clock.
Pleasetell me bur don't tell him
Please take this cup and give that cup to him.
Please go to Nepal. Please speak Nepali there.

45 The postposition -erg-/ias object marker

All verbs must have a subject: e subject of a verb is the thing or
person that is performing the action of the verb. In e sentence e
man eats ice, the yerb is eals and its subject is the man. Many verbs
(those verbs that are called 'transitive verbs,, as exolained in
Grammar 58y can also have an object. ln the sentencebove, the
object is nce, becausetat is what is eaten: e rice receives e
action of the verb.
Objects can be of two kinds: drrec or rndrrect In Nepali. an indirect
object must always carry e postposilion -+. wtrictr wil often be
translatable as to or a..

q16ffir6sr1
s q-{fu6 |
err{se-<r@

I say@you.
He gives to me.
Pleasegive to him.

In sentences at contain only one object, the general rule is that

personal names, human nouns and human pronouns (e, sre, wq
etc.) should carry -qrg when they are the object of a verb, while
inanimate nouns need not:
rI qk qF6 |
I eatrice,
We watchtelevision.
{FrT eT". 6I I
fi- ri-d rnS6{ I
Theysing a song.

He wites a lete.

q {fursEI
{Eqqri {E{ |

I'11 askhim.
They watchme.

However, tlere are certain situations in which this rule is broken:

. rn contexts in which a human being is being treated
as a
commodity at can be bought or given away (giving a daughter
in mariage, for example), in which case it will be treated as an
inanimate noun and witl not take -or:

whcn an inanimate noun is being teated lilrc an animate being (a

dcvout person might bow to a book, or offer rroship to a scred
rcck, for instance), in which case it will be treated as an animate
nounano taKe-tQi
if the subjectcarries e subject-markingsuffu - linnoduced in
Grammar 59) and it is obvious what its object is, it is sometimes
to ark e object with -qr.
unnecessa.ry
More complex sentences may include both a direct and an indhct
ohjcct. ln ese e indirec( object carries -.rr but the di-reclobject
)cs not, and the rules about nimate and inanimate nouns become
inclevant:

qffifrTrr"q
s qqrqr. |

qr 3ffirq ;n |f{|q

k;rg

I saythisthingtoyou.
Hegivesmoneyto me.
I

Pleasegive that book to hm.

This is a complex area of Nepali gammar, and the foreign leamer

must develop an intuitive senseof when to use and when not to use
- qt5.

46 The habitual prsent tense: alternative

ngativeorms
All V- and W-verbs have a secondseriesof negativeendings,which
sound more abrupt than the standard -t -daina range. In is, the
dai or k di syllable is replaced by a half n (;) while the vowel of the
verb baseis no lonper nasalized
standadending
-f{
-daina
-tq.l
-orna

altemative ending
g, q, aq)
-q
-nna (with
-nna (with c)
-q{r
-nnas (with )

-l'rs

-onas

-(;TT

-dainau

-*n

-EnI

-daina
-dainan

--TT
-q

-nnau (with f(ift)

r .Er +llE- )
Er +j
-nn ( wl
..--
- ..5 ql . -- ---5,
1. g1, l q' 11,
-rman (w rl n
tir, ano tne pluu
l orns o 3' l l , l ql

andfa'i ;

These endings are commonly used with the verbs qt1 and q{:

ttfr<rffftrtfr"<qrfq t

q{26-{F T{rgkr<vrol

frfr EFi
{rfiqr-i
ffiqrfi

S/hedoes not/
wiII notgo
Idonot/
will notgo
You do not/
will not go
You do not/
will notgo
We do not/
will not go
S/hedoesno
will notgo

wilI Dote
ldo n o t /
will not eat
You do not/
will not ea

qqf .
(l rlrl.

youdon/
will noteat
fi{s trt;l lye doror,/
will notea
fi-Es C-I mey donot/
ffiqri

will Dot eat

The useof the altemativenegativeendingis obligatoryin thephrases

I do not/will not give and,I do not/will not take:

qdcrftqrffi{dt
qffirffiQRid|e{rffir

I shallnotgive you my bicycle.

I will nottak moneyfrom
yatr hand

Otherwise, these alternative negative endings are generally

interchangelewi the standardforms,but tey aremostoften used
wi e first personpronoun(c 4 to convey the seriseof I shall not
or I will not ather than f do no. That is, ey are often used to

express
refusalto do something:
q rms r
q rrreqrd t
qqd q{ |
q gq srrd t

Elder siser goesto Djeeling.

Touistsso to the hills.

ll lf no verb of movementis involved in tlte phraseor sentence,-liR

mconsin te vicinity of trc p\aceo location to which it is added:
qrmvf,f<<ql;F ffi
nr6{ | AroundDarjeeting,people
speakNepali.
In thehill aeasthe weather
r-et <R k go t
r6reFa<
is rathercold.
flf -fm can be dded to the word q at... o'clock to introduce a
mcacureof vaguenessto sttementsof time:
lll comeat about1 o'clock
t qlf qd{ flft I
qrff Eq {Ffi trd qF6 |
We eat at about 10 o'clock.

48 The negative particle

n! meansdo not befoean imperative,brot won't you? lM \
lmpcrtive:
Tr(nql1q
Pleasedon't eat the ice.
q{tq-{rn-d{r
Please don't come here
rT|-{q|1q{ |
Pleaseeat the rice, won't you?
Please come here, won't you?
e-qqregqrr
It elsomeansboth neither andnor:
r{ t r+c o I we I

I
I
I
I

do not eat ice.

will not eat rce.
do not go to schooL
will not go to sch(nL.

47 The postposition -fr{ owards

-c<-tira is a postpositionused with words that denotea place or
location.It meanseither (i) in thedircction ofthat placeor location,
ot (ii) in the vicinity ofat placeor location.It is alsoused(iii) with
mesof day to meanabouto appoximately.
i When the phraseor sentenceinvolves a verb of movement-d(
meansterally in the dirertion of (thoughoften it cn be translated
as o):

r$rrc{rocTr

Hee thereis neither a shop

no a school, '
I havenetheraay moneynor
any cigaettes.

49 a-<
but, d though
Therearetwo wysof sayingbuin Nepali.i{ is pretty wel an exact
t0nsltionof but andcanbe usedin much the smeway as btt e
bcginningof or in the middle of a sentence:
fu'+rqrrfro, a<qfuos

fr q f<re+.r-<qr=o il{ {rfr {|t{

Thebookis gooil, but it's

mthe shot.
| Tomoow I shall go to
Biatrragarbut I shall not
stay the night.

i can neverbe the fust word in a sentence.It can follow a time, or a

subject, or someing else, which it qualifies. When used in
sttements,it meansasfor, though,but o howeveL
q ( qTr{rfr | q qtq q{ |
I am a vegetadan.
I do not

eatmeat.
+ .roqrd'affi{rsrrfi,
rIRr+1-trqIrfrAF{ |

But Kathmaaclu
s thecapital
of Nepal,not the capital
o India.

qffr tncr t qfq o, fra Eg6q r B the Nepali languageis

quite easy,why don't you
understand?
d may also end a questionor a command,in which caseit translates
as thenot in that case:

acrlfr qrqrql-{qr {6 r
-Td;6( ?
rcdrn(1;EI
aqr{ fi-r qft-< q< 3rs$.6 ?
+t,S*r5tra"
{l-d {S q91;6 d ?

frffie-vr{t
tc-tRrSm

Is your motherin NepalT

No.
Wheeis shethen?
She'sin India.
WilI you come to my house
at aboutthrceo'clock?
No,I don'thavethetime then.
At what time will you come,
then?
Is thatyour bag?
No.

My triend's.

50 6qand @:OK, all right

If a Nepali-speakeris askedor told to do sometring,and s/heagrees
to do it, the responsegiven is commonly either Q{q havas or .8
huncha. Thesewords are both derived from e veb T o be. {{{
hanslatesas may it be so,and is a polite word that indicatesassent.
The middle E of {s{ is pronouncedas if it were a vowel, and the

wordis pronounced
'haus':
Sg{, ffiqr{flAtqrfiT
TrFn (FSS |

F{{< |

Hey Dhane,maketeafor the

guests!
Certainly, sir.

['E menssomethingltke it is good or OK; it has much the same

mcttningas{q\ , but is ratherlessdeferential.
IXERCISE 24 Translateinto Nepali:
I Thosewomen never come to e bazaaron Thursday.When do
they come,en? They usually comeon Tuesday.
2 Foreignersgo from Kathmanduto Lukla by plane.Nepalisusually
go by bus up to Jiri. From Jiri ey walk to Lukla.
3 At what time do ose men go to the fields? They go at about 8
o'clock and they comehome fter thrce hours.
4 | will stay in Nepal only until tomorrow. At 10.30 tomorrow
moming I go to Delhi. After that I go to London.
After 8 o'clock at night all e shopsae shut.I won't go to the
marketfor you now. I will go tomorrow moming.
What work will you (Middle) do for me?I'll go to e marketfor
you (lligh), OK?
My younger sister never cooks food for e family. Sometimes
elde sistercooks,sometimesmoer cooks.
She(tow) goesto schoolevery day, and so doeshe (Low). But
their little broe doesn'tgo.

Cl t+ Townsand villages
lllrrrl is doing her homework. She has to write an essay about the
rlillcrcnccs betweenlife in a city and life ir a village. Her younger
lrrhcl and her parentsare helping her out.

lqq'.rr jnq qm

6d+ +rq o rqcrl q{frq,rfdS {sr t

|
.r{4
il6,qFEfi_rrwil
l.trt,lr dqrcqr<T+sr{<T<, qro o t
qro o r+qqrdi r
'l t l l
B ' r+ {racrc '
lqt{,{r{qr'+ qqr<r w r .ramd'
qr{qarmr
r
6r{rrr.qrrffi qo,
llq
, ffi, q-c, Fqiivrc;rgrrr6r6<q1 r
qr-<r Efr
qt{I
rr *q"r"<r a- sr{<q * {rlcr taHffi

{r{rI
se{ q{ qi r qq r m diq r
l.tq"r&fi o raqrffi d_d
'N

d
1l

JU
--l
'^1
.-{
'-.t/

t+
It

rl:qr -{-{q q"ir r

lqrrqr i+m sr*,s +E-f-{ o rrri+ "r+ctr z r
qi{i qm 6 t rrq{fr fi-{ir<r in.i fi-fi { TE F6 |
'lr
rntqr {r c{f{- 81 Fr{cr-q-f5 E;El T TFr Trf'
q-u<rrcr{crr6rwrr
l.rr,n gn < fl rnr rnqrEr sFr q-6,qdt qft ffi ;@ ntqr

o
ct
o

fl;n

cTqr<qt 6;5 I6fgq 4 3I|{t ?

ra<rr6r'wwor+n, q-sdn, q, qqrqF{

{,ffigntdr$
gtr q r cF6s vrqrfrEfi T{ q<rq t
rnt i vrqa+dfficr m-{d ar{tE rstqtI,
11+r qqqr,arsffi
ffisr"rriqrgtmr
rqrrri+ fi-fi s I
iErsn rc.+ffiqqrrtt'
+nr

o
1+

In this unit you will learn

. ho,vto make compaisons
. how to expresslikes and
dislikes

lrgtrr r{ to assisr, lrelp

4q' the world
(ar<r{
higgesr
-t{qr lan
ffiTokyo
x<fi to be liked
fw why?
fn because
fi-fi .lfe

{w complicated, difficult
{|Er alr
ssT clean
<<tf tasty, lavoursome
!<1 thing, matter
s true
qrIqr trarspo
+w<to lospiral
\lqI facility, convenience
r<v<rs1 o &e

Bimala Today I have some school work. please help rne. Father.
Father All righr. I' help.
Bimala Which is the world's biggest city, do you know?
Suresh I know. It's Kamandu.
Bimala The world's biggest city is Kathmandu? Hou/ can it be
Kamandu? Delhi is bigger than Kathmandu, isn,t it
Mother?
Mother Yes, Delhi, London, Tokyo are the world's big cities.
Fthr Bur there is no ciry bigger than Tokyo in rhis w1rld. Tokyo
is the world's biggest city.
Bimala OK. Do you like big towns? I don,t like them.
Suresh Why don't you lie em?
Bimala Becausetown life is complicated.Village life is easy.
Suresh How can it be easy? Village life is much harder an town
life. In a village there are neither big shops nor cinemas,
nor are there good schools.The town is what I like.
Bimala What you say is true enough. But in a village the air is
clean, and the water tastesgood too. In a village the food is
flavoursome.Isn't that so, Mother?
Mother Yes, \''lhat you say is true. But in a town there are the
facilities of transport, hospitals, schools and marketplaces.
Many people like town life.
Father
Bimal4 now you know e difference between village and
town life. Tell me now, out of e town and the village,
which do you prefer?
Bimala I don't like town life. Give me villase life!

Grammar

r qi ft qc{<r {fr o r

r, Erqfr <rqv<r ffi ;o t

Thatdl is tasethan

' <rqr<r e <m ffi o t

Thanthisill thatill

this dL.
is tase.

'I hc words 4 or ;{t(r more. or e emphac ;qr' mac more, ae

olen put in front of e adjective to make it absolutely clear that a
comparisonis being made:
' lrr5 ffi rngF<r + q o t
grg qr frr&
;ts t
{qmr

My village is bigger than youn.

Apples from Jumla are
mucIl taser.

To express a superlative - that is, to say that something is the bes or

lhe cheapest- the same consuction is used, except that instead of
comparingsomethingto one or a number of oer things you simply
compaeit to rf{. al.Lor llJ.qq, absolutelyall:
inas$qr6-o
{;n
rdffi6r

I
qII q

My village is the biggest(of all).

|
61 Oranges fom Tatopani are
the tasest (of all).

Since all of these examples have been descriptive, they have used
either 6 or q;6. However, it is possible to define something as e
biggest village or the cheapest rice: in ese ases the noun may be
menoned twice (though it need not be), and the { form of e verb
can be used:

51 Comparativesand superlatives
When you compare ings in English, you say at something is
bigger than o better fan something else. Much e same convention
exists in Nepali, where the equivalent of the English preposition an
is a postposition, -{;qI. But in Nepali the adjective remains the same
as it would if you
simpy describing what you are talking about
-were
- for example.rrf good remainsas
'rfr good, and ere is no single
Nepali word that means beer. Comparative sentences can be cast
ether wav:

le qcr<rR qrq o r

My houseis biggerthan
your house.
Thanyour housemy house
is bigger.

q<vqr<r q (qo r

My houseis thebiggest(house).

. qtq vfi{qr ffi

f3fu) t

Thatmangois the tastiest

(mango.t.

qftqi;Tgssrc+r gr.rqr rfr

qf{q-{Ffl |

Americansare the wo d's

ichest people.

EXERCISE25 Translateinto Nepali:

I
2
3
4

Londonis bigger than Kathmandu.

Americanpeopleare usually richer than English people.
Kathmanduis further from Englandthan Delhi.
Kathmandu
is Nepal'sbiggesttown.

Which is the world's poorestcountry?

6 Thereis no languageeasieran Nepali.

Constuctsentencesaboutlikes anddislikes along

m
IMC|SE
tofollowinglines:

52 Likes and dislikes using r{d

Pt.non
Etample:
my mothe

The simplestway of expressing

a li*e or a dislikeof someingis to
usethe verb phaseqi cT which terally meansr rd (rF) to falt 1fi1
but translatesas ro befited. The subjectof this verb phmseis not tlie
personwho is doing the liking, but the thing that is being liked.
If no personis mentionedin a sttementthat usesw { , then e
personwho is doing the liking is mosrprobablyrhe perion who is
makingthe sttement:
.,fl-arccd
drs{qcq

r
|

q*rqiii
r

gandfather
my elde sisters
you (High)
his youngerbroers
they

kes?

red

x =frqrcmrt'rr{ii r
{ tq rc cdr
./ = t qrqmr

blue
black
geen
yellow
purple

{
X
{
X
/

Thatwtg is kd. (,llfterh* song,).

London is notliked.

t9 ta why, fuqrbecause

;;,y##Hy:,il;",*

iFt r wlry?can be usedon its own to aska question:

TodayI shall go to the offrce.
A crrqq aTfuqEF6 |

('I donotlike thisnmgazirrc

at all').

If no personis mentionedin a quesonthat usesrFI rd, en the

personwho is doingtheliking is mostprobablythepersonto *hothe questionis being addressed:
ft t r { cd I

Is blue colourliked?

.-t*qrirdr{r

;'itt":;:#"i#:),,,,
('do you like red or dont you?')

If it is necessaryto stateby wom a thing is liked o distiked, en

the personwho likes, or tlte pronounat standsfor that person.must
takethe posposition -orr:
I ke the cotouryellow.
ry$ Q-< !t ar wi t gfi-+cr qH t r fiwi r
Sushi|likesthe colourgreen.
eqfffi fl+ t{r qq di I
Do you not kethe colurblack?
se-{ fr {Tsr q-{ di r
He doesnotlke ihis whiv ctoth.
I-ess comrnonly,the liker of somethingcan becomethe subject of
this kind of sentenceby using the verb rfi q{B, in which casee
postposi(ion
-q is sometimes
addedto e in rhatis tiked.

q tlr r{ Ttr6r
ac'{rfr ffi
T{ qrsggo ?

I
2
3
4
5

Co|our

I like the colour brown.

Doyouke thecolour
purple?

I fwt

whv?

A s$qri csq r{ c6 r
B f-qt

He kes that shop.

whv?

More commonly,however,fd ? wy?is part of a longerqueson:

qrq aq ffi fu qfsq qq-d-F t
why will you go to the
officeeaflynday?

s{-qrd c{|"f{{ q-{qd r

Whv does he ke that shop?

ln suchquestions,the positionof f+< r dependson what the question

skedactuallyfocuseson. In"heseexamples,it focusesor going to
theoffice ufl on king, so it is positionedimmeditelybeforethem
in the sentence.Nepali quesonsvery rarely begin th f*":. lt
rplies to such questionsgenerally,however,do begin wi FFiF'
tncause:.

fraraiqfoqqrryq6 1
fr-{{_qrq3{fr(dE I

Becausethereis a lot of
work at the officeBecausethat shopis
quite cheap.

f-{rT becausecnof coursebe usedin a sentenceto link a causeand

its effect:
q fl-ifr fl{ qit-{ td-d{ t fq{
r I do ror eat beef becauseI
am a Hindu.

Gr.ft F,qffm{ o @+rfi

EXERCTSE27 c{ ffi{

{ r He doesnot speakNepali
because is a Hndi.he

(Readand undestand)

The following is your first encounterwith a passageof connected

prose.Look up any unfamiliar words in the Nepali-English glossary
at the back of the book, andthen answerthe questionsat follow in
Nepali.

fr +{Trq r qf T{ s-r qr ee-<.-rr

6 | rrq+ ru efu $ r
'rql+ifla *r q' :rft araro rc' qr *-+ f+q dr{qrE qr+*;o r+gf+r

oftv r+qo r+@ +rS r *rftr vr;o tqitrfEfd rfrfuq+rrr

qroft++*
ffiqs
rq q1qq.{drnrqr+F qfr {r6qr$
wrg6< t e-qs qs r tr<q sTq ,r6.o rqFi-{F+ TrFr{{ Trd
.rtrsgqo rm+rg-w+rqfA.ftr{d rO aafus
\recrH{Ts 16{
f Wr
{r;tr q rrgffi ar"r ; | T lTd'q< --qr.ir
qqr F{R 6, a< rfidt {@ qf{ {r.+ crift qldi I qa r1sT
qFEETm futfr
Coq 16i Fir' {= crrT1 r
ClildF (questions)
ir fd .rFE '

.H

4r.

q frfu q a|-sqfuq qE{ EFb 1

rn frd,qreqEE ?
8 qaqqt {rFt;6 t
k qfi+ r{I qFE r

a erdq|6orn=6s-{ qfr ffi

;6 ?

oo
q)
o
t
o3
CLo
qt
-

In this unit you will larn

. how to usethe simplpast
tense o vebs
. how to us the agertive
suix -le
. how to namethe parts o
the body

Cf 'tS SanOhya
drops by
Sndhyahascometo call on her friend Asha. Shehad also calledat
the house the morning before, but had been surprisedto find it
deserted.
Ashaexolains.

Rq acr{ flfq* z
@166rraf,rv+r
v,qI e<@+6mrilrf+qi3fiE rqqr +qfr fuq{ |
qT{T avtrcE +fr + qrs-ct{r
FqT
3FTt

(rgqT
3TSn

tvra,frw,rwacft-rqrErq3rfrffiTEr

(l;F T
fi$I

ec fi srffirt q{cfur'q qr{.6 I

{ tqR srt{{r' c {q frffiq qkr rrq ro@wfrr*J
qfr qF6 I
aprqr

q1qr I qfu Sqr,qrqr<rrrtqs ffi crfircrq,rE,TS

I*
qrfu{Rft,{?
t;.qT $,v-+nffir
3XItt qI++R
d{rcq {s qk( ur;E r+fr @.{T rfr-{F$ q.s.
qfrl c{qffi
qfr{ *n qrqr+O ,-

Fqr @irrqn$.l
qrn q q* \' qr=em qfe fr {rgqqr qre{
tffi
+qFq{rfr tr{cr afur | rfr d'r-,qk{'rq rA"+ rqrEql
wn rr I
vaqr qktqrfrqfir r
qrsn fu\r{ rsrk{K qrd{m qr eq-t-s
6 rqrs-{sa@rq
qfr f-c fE{ r
s+qr il acrif* c{qtffra f1ftqqq. rq r q dsrffifi1qr {rsr
q0-errqqilr qh qffuF qr:rrrrq rqrfq' q T,re,{g q
{.
qrsn fi-ffrqr-srficrc
r{rfi-.Srr
ErcrfE{ tqrfr { {qrq
se+
+arr
*e+r rmr{ ftqrr* r rrn n{qr A I
sa

t;aw frq, fr n rrd,r srm firfr rq-arfu<

qmrqr;iqr r r
ffiqr'ftqrc-rr
srsn s{d kfr rqMr!r tqq-{,cr fr@q, vr++<
g{regftl

fr yesteday
anywhere

{cf'{ bu evenso
qtfur m reend
q\ at home
ln<rpwithot hope
qfr my place, my home
frqqr{r on e way
q rrfr leaqy rarn
wrr{ your place,your home
<time (a quantity o0
rfr someoae
qtgl 9remember
q tree
*
qR day befoeyesteday
*c se.lter
fuq to get wet
W a few, some
ltryffi
tk Pashupatinathtemple qm n forgive
wr'n umbella
rv frFrffi qk< Baja logini temple
ct{ rRrc'r CanguNaraya, (a temple) qrdnr sky
(-d rogeer,eachwith the other
fficrfi
figfit rain
rrw enjoyable
! ro meeup
[t
fr dtuectly,sfaight
'evs
qw half
tfie{ ta tell, relate
rd1 to warr
* Nepali hastwo words fo shelter:4 rneansshelt from the
rain, while srqt meansshelr fom the sun
Sandhya Wheredid you go yesterday?
I didn't go any$,hereyesterday.I stayedat home.
Asha
Sandhya But I cameto you place yesterdaymoming. There was
no onein the house.
Wat time did you cometo my place?
Asha
Sandhya I cameat seven,no, at abouthalf past7. I yas a bit late.
Now I've remembered!The day beforeyesterdyFather,
Asha
Moer and my youngerbrotherswent to Nepalganjfor
a few days.Yesterdaywas Satuday,wasn't it?
Sandhya Yes, it was Satuday.
On Saturdaymoming I always go to the temple. And
Asha
yestedaymoming we went to Pashupatinthtemple at
out half past5. Therewas no one at home.
Sondhya Do you go to Pshupatinaevery Saturday?
No. Last Saturday I went to Bajra Jogini temple.
Asha
SometimesI go to ChanguNayantempletoo.
Sandhya Who did you go with yesterday?

Asha

I.usually go alels lut e day beforeyesterdaymy elder

sistercamefrom Baglung.Now shewill stay few days
in our house.We went to the templetogether.It wasvery
enjoyle, you know.
Sandhya Was therea crowd at the temDle?
Asha
No. There's a crowd there nty ut"r 7 o'clock on a
Saturday,We went very early, so therewasn,t a crowd.
Sandhya But you didn't come straight back from pashuDati.
did
you? waitedat your door for half an hour but evenso
you did not come.In the endI lost hopeandI went back
home.
Asha
On the way back it rained heavily. We didn't have an
umbrella.We sat in the shelterof a tree for a while. Did
you get rvet?Will you forgive me?
Sandhya No, it doesn't matter.I had an umbrella. Over
here the
sky becameda.rkandonly light rain fell.
Asha
riChj tlrcn sister. Today we have met up anyway.
l*l
Pleasesit down, havesometea,tell me all the news.

'l'honclbur verbstake the sameendingsas all othe verbs.It should

[lro lx notedthat the final -a of e presenttensebaseof the V-verb
t(d1 to tbrgetis droppedbeforethe pasttenseendingis added:
Pasttensebase
Pesenttensebase
Vclb
d- nirsffibirsaItilto forget
'lhc basesof W-verbs in past tensesare shortenedforms of the
ptl|nt tenseverb bases(seeGrammar 33). The secondvowel of
lh0 presenttensebaseis droppedto form the pasttensebase:
VV-verb
qS{ o come
n;3{ to cooft

Pesenttensebase
3{TiiFFTit-

Past tensebase
3TTq6I-

w1o mk

ft-s-

fr-

Pa tense verb endings

'hc simplepasttenseis formedby takingthepasttensebaseof a
vorb and adding an ending to it. As always, the choice of ending
dopcndsuponwhat or who the subjectof the verb is, andthe endings
mustbe leamedby heart.They ae:

Grammar
slngular
q

l The simple past tens

T\e simplepast tenserefers to aconsand eventsthat happened
in
the past,o describessituationsand conditionsthat were tne in
the
pasl It usually correspondswith e English I went,you
came,he
said, they were,it was,etc.,but can also somemesbe similar
to the
English presentperfect:I've gone,the rain hascome.
Past tense verb bases
The pasttensebasesof all C-verbsandmostV-verbs arethe
sameas
the present tense bases (at is, ey are forned by taking
the
dictionary form and dropping the ending _1_ see GrammJ
33).
Howwer, the:e are four particular V-verbs-which form their past
tensebasesdifferently. Theseare:
Verb
past tense base
Present tense base
to
was
T
*\ to weep
gFI to go
grTto
be
1
fu- orrr-

Negative

Affimave
-E
-q
-{

nff, {rfi-{s
t
ffi, ffi-6r
3.r. aq (m.)

T
-q

s. fr, d (i)
gff, ffi, ffi 111.;
rfr, firfi, fafr tr.t
ff, fr, efi-q-setc.

-
-g
-EI
-g

-
-ya
-is
-yu
-yo

^ -i
-e
-i!
-e

-{
\'i
sS
-ir
-S{

-in
-ena
-ina6
-enau
-ena

-{
-qn1
-EI
-(1

-ina
-enan
-inan
-enan

'l'he boxes that follow contain e simple past tense forms of the Wvcrb q!t{ fo come and e irregular V-verb q]1 o go.
qIA_ to come
Negative
Afrimative
(I came,you cae, etc.) (I did not come, you did not

flfr,fi-{s

fi* -q3TT
+ -qr
qr + -E\

,ils

come, etc.)

qr+-i
fi + -qd

qR
qTq fi+ -E{

= qrsi
= {si'
= qlrq{

ffi,frfrdF
o, *, ft <m.l
s, q, . (i)
sfi, ffi. faftm.r

.frfr,ffirrr
q, d, gfi{s

qr + -q
rn t -*
qr + -
fi+ -(

rn+-{
3{T+ -g

erc.

= qrq
= qrq
=
=
=
=

q
3frS
qffi
3IrS

3T+ -d
qr + -qt

3T+ -Fi
qT + -qTf
fi+ -ET
3T+ _qa4

=
=
=
=

qr\r{
qa{
qr\'|
qIE1

qq to go
Affrrmative
(I went,you went,etc.)

qr,{rfr-{F

Negative
Q d rot.go,you did notgo, etc.)
rt+ -l{
= rfa
rr + -gr
= rr(

{ + - q

tdfr,fimF
s,t,Qt-.i

rr+-d

g, q,.q'l (f.)

rr+-

Affimative

ri

ftq

tlr{,n{-{

Fffi

t{, fidfi-{F
(m.)
J,,
j,, ',.*
4, . (f.)

tu'<
ffif

ffi

tuq
c
,{,tufr,fr(m.)
r'f.ffi,ft,ft(r.)tu"{

,| | ,r. srtE * e[c. f.{c

.fi,

Ir + -g

The High forms of the simple past tense consist of the dictionarv
form of a verb (. 3rFn.Fr etc.t. combined wi:
- the suffix -Ifr in the affirmative
- the suffix -rgt in the negative.

Tt{F etc.

High orms

${ {{r{CCTTfir{rq

qrel +-{fr

iTs-c

Negave
3rc{ r -{

ETl o go
Affhmative
qX + -tr*

q--r.*

urd + -vq

srtstT{

qr$T\r{

Negave

Note the following examples in which the Nepali simple past tense
must be translted wi the English present perfect tense:

ttfrqre-_*r
*fr trqr

tq5

c
fEc
fufi
l-qqr1

FnI
Iqcrl

Affmative

{g

Negative
{f

IITT

,S

-.
l|is

IIITT
q-{

lT{r

rTs{
t{

r{g
trq

{cI
qEI

lTg

{cr{

It has begun to nin!

Has Gunii arrived?
Power cu*

Nofe.'*Power cuts ffe an unfortunatefeatureof daily life in Nepal.

{fr meanslampbut by extensionit is alsousedto meanelecrrr.c
1.islt
Whenpoweris restoredaftera powercut. thecry is +fr qr : -

iqd

{dl{s

It WASpqe.

ffi

crff indf r

fc-si
Frr

Thc simplepas tenseof e verb 1 fo be has two forms. The ftr

n'mtanslatesas wasor were,and this form of the verb is usedto
t lk aboutsituationsandconditionsin the past:
ffi q qmqr Flsi, qfr+rsr fuq I YesterdayI wasnot in Nepal,
I wasin America.
rrr+q fqq.ffiir
The
food was*notpolluted,
t

These forms are always the sme, regardless of ihe number and
genderof eir subject.
i4g o com
Affirmave

Negattve

Hlghorms

sfr.ffi.lTfrtrnrq+-(
rfi.frfr. frfr (f.) Tr+-81

q, d. :rI erc

66 The simple past forms of fl fo be: firqand {

tTt rerra rtrfr M

I

weatherwas
Yesterday's
verybad.
Dhan Bahadur had two sons.

* The word
E is loosely nslated zs Polluted. Any food that
has come ino contact with someone's mou - either directly, or
indirectly via a hand or a utensil- is considered1& and therefore
may not be eaten by any other person. This everyday concern
about cleanliness and hygiene is given a deeper meaning by
notions of caste and ritual purity. The observance of is rule is
traditionally strictr among higher Hindu castes such as the
Buns than among, for instance, e various Tibet(FBurmanspeaking ethnic groups, and it also varies between families and
social classes. While parents and elder siblings may share food
with e younger children of a family, s an outsider you should
obseve these rules unless and until you know for sure that the
people wi whom you are eating do not observe em so stricdy
themselves. Food should be touched only wi the right hand,
becausethe left hand is used for toilet ablutions.

I
he rr form refers to changes,eventsnd transformationsin the
past andmay often be translatedasappened o became:
o qr fir, qfu a cfusd r* r
He was stupid,butlater he
becamea Pandit-

qr{rffifir, qfu6ffirrfr r

u96ffi,rfuag:erd

s{m, cfucfr nrrc{ I

The food was hot, but then it

became cold.
He was happy, but IaE he
became sad.
The rcom was ny, and
Iat it didn't become

cleaneither.
m'arEm, dqrdq rr I qcr{ oho Govindaj, what
*:.--5.q hfqi

happened rc you? Nothing

has happenedto me.

The following pairs of statements illustrate the difference in the

meaningof the two forms:

Ttqtqfrtfffrfq-i{ |
ersfrffiq-t1l

My sisterwasi11.
My sisterbecameiJl.

frorqrrrfffqd I
arqr trf rr* r
cTd{F{< fug I

It washot in theoom.
It becamehot in rcroom.
me shopsy@ shut.
The shopsbecameshut.

qTdQ {q rg I

I. ad Tg;I arc comrnonly used on tleir own to

tell someone tat
something has or has not been done or completed, when bo
speakersknow what it is thal ey are ta.lkingabout. For instance.A
and B, who are bo staying in the same hotel, had previouslv been
discussingB's diflculty in getting an air ticket. A seesB comins
back to the hotel. and he knows that he has been to e airline office.
Instead of asking him did you succeed in booking your ticket? allhe
needsto say is:
A rr?

Did it happen?/Any tuck?

to which B will give one of the following replies:

B rfr!

yes, it's done!

or

r{ !

No,no huck!

56 Location and movement

Nepali has two sets of words that mean ere, there, and where, The
first, ending in -Q,refers mainly to static locations, while e second.
ending in -dT.is most commonly used with verbs of motion:

\(,1
a|

r|J
{,d

hee, in this place

there, in that place

qr
3rT

whee, in which place

somewhee, in any place

fd

ove hee, in this rection, hither

over here, in that diection, thtther
in which direction? whither?
to somewherq n any diection

67 Someoneand something:the uses of

lnd *fr
An un adjective,S meanssomeor a few.'
{
+fr qF6-

a few days
somepeople

T
ffi c

somemoney
som.ethingor
omef

Ar an adjective,S also meanssome,but can only be used with

humannouns,and usuallyin e singular:
somemaa (whom I do not know)
"-cF
*q +
someoneor other
Much more commonly, these two words are used as thid-person
pronouns, and they can be understood to have the following
rneanings,dependingon e kind of sentencethey occur in:
Affrtmave statement Negativestatement Queson
nYthing
nothing

something
anyone
no-one
s
someone
qcqr + o I qrqr + t
Is theremyone in'the house?
Thereis no-onein the house.
fi-{qqrqr"" |
They are in thegarden.
ffirmno tOen

d{fi{r

whatdoyat havein yur had?

I don't haveant'thing in my
hand,mothe.

In negavesentencesqfr even, also can be addedto 6e6 ft-$ and

fr to heightenthe negativityof the serrtence:noing at all, nobody
whatsoever:

R qrr+rfr vf nt
q-fir+ qfrr |

I don't have anything at all

in my hand.
There is no-one at aII in
the house.

EXERCISE28 Translateinto Nepali:

I Pleaseopenthe window, it hasbecomevery hot in this room.
2 Yesterdaymoming the children were all here.But todav no_one
cameto schoolat all.
3 Last Wednesdayit rainedheavily. I didn'f havean umbrella,and
I got soaked.
4 Grandfatherhad two sons. One was called Sanju and one was
calledNiroj. Sanjubecamevery rich but Niroj *, u.ry poor.
_
5 The peopleof that country were very poor and therewas nothins
al all in theirhouses.
6 Yesterday many people went to pa6upatinthtemple, because
yesterdaywas a full moon day (prgm).

Cl te n visit from Shankarprasad

Shankarprasad
Acharya is a priest and teacherof high social status.
Motilal phonedShanka4rasadAcharya a little eartier,to invite him
to his house.He is anxiousto cultivate good relations with such a
man. ShankarprasadAcharya has just arrived, but the domestic
arrangements
arenot runningsmooly.

q-fiq 3rrqdfr, rreFrcl

qRril.6i?
sFfi{Ttrr<sr{rq tffi { ?

-dre rc rr* s r
sq(, {deE
{qrq?
rFF<csrE
ds fugg.or
cu-Sfu"oft r
-qrq +(a rsfu rq
sfrrffi r*+<.qfr
3rrq s{

v+re1r<r m6r
T{ rqdE-, ?...

S, .{, .{, f(fr

3r{

{ ilr r E ? q n T
fl.r|{ rT(r{ ?
T{ ? q T(qt

rqrcqraqr{ r,i

(, nrE rqcdq rccqrfuqr aqn r fr r dcrs

{F{TI

r6-{rd

F R

rr qrq r{ffiqrqrN

r{ erarqre

3{r3rI4r. ' FITF GIr q-6rqr I

r{
g$q r{qr.rdq.r&{ rqrqr{qmrqffi r
qfi-qm fr{ 6, r o, qs s rn | ... qgrifr, qr .r'trcr rqlEcr
qrft-i-f{?
{t!l r y f| tq

_
.u. .

.:-__,l_
.nQt .t

.
I

qfi-{rt se fi{qrqfr trsS trta q fuEg'oft t

w;'<rvr<
r
6o reaffirr
crsrt.ifi a respectfultitle for
religious teacheror a leamedman
alrqi in good hea.ltl(polite)
thatwhich
s& dratsanre(erdrasizedfmn of d dra)
just one
rr*r to lnform
'ri
frr1 ro ast
ezr<rcady

q.s ecently,justnow
fitl to calL,invite
,r to teoff. abuse
q< other,addionaj
z,fi a do imndiately
c'"- to fogive
rfrct frstly
qrTroarive
frr1e biscui

Acharyaji, greetings.Are you well?

Motilal
Shankarprasad I am well. And you?
I am well. Please sit dorvn, wha would you
Motilal
like?*'
Shankarprasad I will havewhateveryou are going to have.
That's fine tlen. Just one moment.I will tell my
Motial
wife. I don't know what+'?shehs cookedtoday.
I'11 ask her, all right? ... Oh, Anju, Anju, where
haveyou gone,huh?*3Isn't thefood ready?
Aqi,t
What? I have only just come from the market.
Wat to do. indeed.there'slots of work. I am all
alone.I'll preparetea fust, for sure.You people
pleasesit down.
Motilal
Oho, how late ings are today! I invited him to
our home.He camefrom fa away,but you didn't
cook any food.
Listen. Don't tell me off. Therewasa lot of other
aqiu
work in e house.
OK, OK, now do it immediately... Acharyaji,
Motilal
pleaseforgive (me). Will you first take tea?

Shankarprasad Yes, yes. It doesn't matter.

Motilal
There now, the tea has arriyed too. Would you
like a biscuit as well?

Shankarprasad Yes. Please give me one, would you?

*' fuTo ?whatwi you take?
is a more polite way of asking
someonewhat they would like to eat or drink an ufggo wfur
will you eat?
*'? is repeatedbecauseMotilal expects
his wife to have cooked a
numberof different things.
x' Motilal andhis wife Anju are a tradional
couplein at the use
of pronounsis asymmetical:
he addresses
her asfrfr, while shecalls
u*q. Less traditional couplesnowadaysaddressone anoer as
F*
krql

nbllrtuccasewhen- is addedto it. q and take specialforms when

.il h uddedto them:
producing q
{ becomes
producing

d becomes
All of the oer pronounschangein exacythe sameway asey do
wlth oer postpositions:
ulle)
s
beromes ss poducing w (oftenpronounced
qI
rr<r
(often
pronounced
elle)
pducing
fr becomes
(often
pronounced
tell)
iq'{
d
becomes
Foducing
lFq
(offen
kale)
i
becomes -{tl prducing rg
Fonounced
gfi becomes s
producing rt
frft becomes fui prooucing frm
c.--.:trff becomes r(.r pKnucmg lr

Grammar

t+rqrr

58 Transitiveand intransitiveverbs

g{{qr{Tq

All Nepali verbs are either transitive or inansitive. When usins the
simple pasrtenseof any verb it is irnportantto klow which caregory
the verb belongs to.
A transitive verb is a verb that must have an object. For instance, we
cnnot see without seeing something, and that something is the
object of our seeing: it receives the action of our seeinq. W cannot
eat, or do, or ma&e or look- without something ben{ eaten, done,
made o looked at therefore, all of these verbs, plus many others, are
said to be 'transitive' becausethey act upon something, which is their
oDJecr.
An intransitive verb is a verb that cannot have an obiect. For
instance,all verbs o molion are intransitive: we may go o a place.
or come 1?oma place, but these places ae not receivers of e action
of moon, they are simply destinations or sources.

59 Transitiveverbs and the suffix -

The subjectof a transitiveverb in the simplepasttensemusttakethe
agentive(or 'subject-marking')sfix -. Lingstically, _is a rec
of an old p-assiveconstruction,andit hasthe original meaningof y.
Because- is a postposition,the subject wordust ctraogJto ttre

I worked.

wffqkq

c----. -c-

scr F|6r crn d1 |

--:3-{{E-{ -

mrt s+qrer{K ITr t

He did not greet me.

Theydid not write even

oneletf,
Did you give her a present?

Somecommonlyusedverbsare a combinationof a noun with either

th verb {t odo or e verb fl obe. Sucha verb is nansitive wi
q{ but intransitivewith {:
_ _ -; 'I
-----.--.:..'-:_
mey shut the cinema.
34tqrFrqr-q' {< r'
The cinemaclosed.
frqr-q{ {< tr |
We statedwok.
|
6r@om5.e
^
The workbegan.
rq{!,{r{ t
,I
-----:-:
-..--.:
Thegovemmentstopped
{T{dTrqEdFTqqrpn
{ffq

qfi

lt

the strikeThe strike ended.

EXERCISE 29 Put the following sentencesinto the simple past

tcnse,beginningeachnew sentencewi e word fr yestedal and
rcmovinge word fir foday :
?
fiq ffir kcrqr{q
1 qF q \rse f{-{rE ffr6 |

l
r
!
(

crwqrfi-6serg er |
qrqfi-s rr|{en1 rsfi-s+qcqrq[{ t
{|EfTfrHfd-{R; ?qrqsrq{Tf,rft<rrrs{6t
3ftrfi{f 36451 ra-qffi
g6.o r

60 Further uses o-

Wth nounsto mark a causalft[ction

a With the subject ofa transitive verb in tenssother thap the past
- must always be affixed to the subjectof a transiveverb in the
simplepasttense,but it can also be usedto emphasizethe subjectof
a transitive verb in the habitual present tense in the following
c[cumstances:
. if the sentencesaysat it is pa of the ntual
order of thinss for
the subjectto perform the verb. and thereforcstatesthat thi-sis a
role that is specificto the subject:

1g<rgcwir

4fTq {rqT q"r;6 |

qrq;qr
;E I
rffirq|-{.ffiql

A chickenlays eggs.
A ger eatsgoats.
Sunshinegives wannth.
A proper Bahmin doesnot
drink alcohol.

if the sentenceis a questionaskingwho or what is the subiectof a

transitiveverb:

wefrSarr;ar

qrE{. fq{r firs6 ?

Wo saysthat?
Who will make theteatoday?

if the sentenceis a responseto a questionsuchasthoseabove.or

focusesin any way upone subjectof e verb:
qrqR r-;.6 { |
Mother saysso,you know!
3{rEr {r fi6 r
Tod.ayyoungerbrother will
make he tea.
b To denot the use of faculties or instruments

qrfr rn g.E r
frEirffir

qrfraffifur

Ofrqcffir
qrfrrrt @ r

ffiF<rdrrkqF6 |
ffiqs6rcrme+r r

Wehear with (ow) eaII.

We bite with (ow) teeth.
Welook with (our) eyes.
We speakwith (our) mouths.
We smell with (our) noses.
Nepaliseatrice with (tlre)
ight hnd.
Nepalisdo not eatice with
(the) Ieft hand.

t( |,{'

becauseof this
becauseof that
becauseof what?

FR fi'RV"

nr<q t

lbo phrasesoe tf<vr andrRT{{qf meandueto thatcauseaJlddue

o is causerespectively,andthey arc commonlyusedto meansoo
tus;
gmffisM+a
lrtv{r<Ur He is a boy of a tenderage.
|
3G Tf' ffiq
So pteasedo notgive him a
aSarele.
-r qrc tq qrfr q-+ ritre rRqr Last yea little ain felL.
q-qt({r qrrq ff q- t
Thereforerice becamevery
expensivein themarket.
Thc abbreviatedforms of this phrase,a{ ;Fror and i{, are very
commonlyused.
Other nounscan take - when they are e causeof an event or a
condition, regardlessof whether the main ve of the sentenceis
tansitiveor not:
qfiflq -{rqr crtff{s ffi
In time of anine, mmy
peopledie of hunger.
rrfu r
I
My cloEs weemadewet
gmvrfrfrrd
Dy atn.

g0 .l{ETft
EXERCTSE
qk rrfu{rr fqr | q{qr qr-{|.q{r 6;5 r qfusi qlt{ r qfur*r *<
r
srart\r{. o qrrrrqr t sq\rcr
fuq rdffidcqfrq-S
-friq
qrrr-{Rft
tcc{t@c
rrqmqrqrff{Rffi
Fn-crerdrfr
r r<rqqfu{.f r <rr+Eclcfrqfu{qTt{ r<rrfrfiqrfq{qk{
qr{ir r q{rcr +6i qqri.irr ' qrs qft-t q. ,+r t crqr rrw$r
crg r " q cfir{ Er '
rfr+ qrqrfl e s- ':nscS*-+ Aqr .
-nir
q-d
q
t
rrqr qscr6|drfu " <rq

rrf,dF
r qfu{RM?
r qffiqcqrM
I qfu {-r rr* t
r @+n+r

I @<rq rdrrfd r
?
@{Frfrqmrr{qr-i{
u {rq r qrarfrfr {+sq { ?

61 Parts of the body

14
t ;l
ol

lol
tol

HEAD
ar+
Tq,q-$R

tt
ll

3tqr

Tfi

tl
ll

Tq

E9l

ffi
si

to l

sFi
{ITTI
q t(l

head
face
eye
nose
mouth
ea
hair
tooth
tongue
necvthroat
chin
beard

ARMS
c{i
{rd
3-{r
?tl

{rr
$q-d
LEGS

cr
qr
gq
3TqT

BODY

s
ffi

6r
:I
frEI|{

upper in
hand/
forearm
finger
elbow
fingernail
thumb

body
back
stomach

OTHER
{rRi

breasVchest
shoulder
watst
hea
lung

re

6Fi

foot
knee
heel
toe

q- I
blood
skin
bone

d=
,oto

rVoo
9=

o+
ro
--

In this unii you will learn

. how to usetwo vs in one
sentenc
. how to eportinfomation
rom othersouces
. how to usethe continuous
tenses of vebs
. how to discusspeople'sages

Cl tz R day of work
Rajiv hasjust completedhis fust week at e office. He and Keshav
discussplansfor their day off.

cEr<rvt*<ar@.it
rldlq qrtfrrqrpi@ ur.q : erftaar o, {tr r
ftfl{

, er,6 If165 as Sq qF6q tft<r+Fr er{F qrr-qo-arqr

qt-a Tg{qFEmi 1
qT{sfi-{F TEfuI
r Awr qfu qrfi-As
fi-{F {dra + q W fqq{sFs{
qq
qf
|T<ftd{ Tl'' rng {sr
r6fr{ fq T<i-fi
qrr,qr q- qrryarq t{
.rq, +E {Iaitr{r-;r Eqqr
'qr*i
orqqr {{ ilqr 3sgrffi R r* il*{ gt+r r< <rq t
qrgs f+ t
.-+ o t*k <qrq.M

rr,fl { rffi
{r

r{

rR'trcg-{rrrf+do
rtts +r<vri-tdE tefi-esofu
dft{Qqq?
r a qsrq qffir \'{ rg+rtd{ q E{f,ffi nc . rdr
qrtlb

fi-{ sr crqr qiil{ q ,r'i{K, ft a rq {frr q s r

tt+.vfr r:rr* r+ k<
qs feq rrlifi1 q fffffi ${ r3-c
65t, qrFrqf{slq{ ffi

ffi-* mfq*Efrft+rr
sr< | *fr ( srffi r qrkeR{ 3rq-+qrFq-r+fi
go rarr{u_9fuE6+f65fr
?
q
{ts fr=Efr r <c
E_fer +rt ereg6r d{R
{q.E ?

{r+ f{nrfr Sd|tuqfr .qfqrfr rr gjh;r +6swg+1S y+r q61r-tm.rqr @

rmR6 q 3lfu-rr
ffiiir
f.r r rq
T* qqr"-"tT-r4rf.*qF61aqfdrn
qm
qnmq g < t
{rfi-{ *frq 6nirq 16o fr r
rqm sfi-{rM ErE( |
{-{ dcrc"rr{6fs ?
vn r +rvrrqi rfu t*En ft +ffi rqr qr;b reqe*f

.rffi .r.6 r

r$ day off, holiday

t how? in whatmanner?
trersl ro sperd trme
frtufi all day
qr long
fr-l-S somefug or oer
{rFfi or
!f.dt-q-t somewhere ot other
fl o mee

gr.ri ro a1t, conrerse

trrqq pogamme
a wod making information
gathered elseivhere
nlnn 'ri to try
ict erefoe
rft small child
i on foo
{ sq fo board a bus
cr.{ the second largest city of the
Kathmandu valley

Frn+ plcru'c
dqr nver
fi< bank of a iver
<r rri to e47oy oneself

srd shade
st cards
,n to play
.m.r,i ro cat
n ground
q@Xto lie down
4<87 to fall sieep
se<rfr e lrome of a man's
parents-in-Iaw
R invitation
q\zr dfficulg awkwad
nrrr{ ro pone
q#t decded
{r flrsd o trnd ou
qr qr31fo find ou
l< OK then?

Tq IAA

yt1 to reach, arrive

qi3;rr ings to ea;food
+fv ago

rt\r
tfus evenrng
f<iq 6or"
Farel to becomeangry

N(,tcn*r A popula picnicking spot in the south of the Katbmandu

Vllley wherethereare botanicalgardens.
+' A beautyspotto the notheastof Kathmandu.

fl iq adtu
Rajiv
Keshay
Rajiv
Keshav

Rajiv
Keshav
Rajiv
Keshav

Rajiv
Keshav
Rajiv
Keshav

Rajiv
Keshav
Rajiv
Keshav

Tomonow's our day off, isn,t it?

Yes. Tomorrow is Saturday, you know! Saturday is a day
off for every office. Won,t you take e day off, or what?
I certainly will, you know! How do you usually spend a
day off? Do you sleep all day?
I do not sleepall day. Life isn't that long! I usually spend
my days off doing something or other or going somewhere
or other. Sometimes I meet up with some office friends
and go out. This moming I talked to Daulatii. He savs
ere is just such a programme tomorrow too.
Where is tomorrow's programrne en?
He saysthey will go to Godavar.i.*,
Will you go too?
I shll try. My wife says she will go to e market
tomorrow morning. So tomorror moming I will stay at
home and look after the children.
Will your friends go on foot? It's quite far; ish'r it?
Yes, it is rather far. They say they will go by bus.
Apparently buses for Godavari go every hour, via patan.
What will they do when they have reached Godavari?
They say ey will take some food from here. A few weeks
ago we took a picnic to Sundarijal too.'r, When we reached
Sundarijal we sat on the riverbank and ate and enioved
ourselves. Some friends sat in e shade of a tre; and
played cards or chatted. Some fiiends lay down on the
ground and went to sleep.Thafs how it is. Will you go to
Godavari tomorrow too?
Tomorrow morning we are invited to my inJaws, house.
So it's diffict. At about what time will thev leave?
Thar has not been decided yet. This evening I.ll phone
Daulatji and find out.
When you find out please phone me too, OK? I'll be at
home this evening.
Sure. I'll phone you this evening.But now it's late. Today
isn't a day of. e boss will get angry and teli us off.

ffi

arem{r 6 |

busnetwo*map,Nepal
Slh

Grammar
62 Two verbs with the same subject: th -q{
participle
ln English, if a sentenceo a part of a sentence(a clause) contains two
verbs performed by the same person, both of the verbs take tlrc sarne
tense and the word 'and' is used to link tltem, e.g. I came and (I) sat
down, I ate the rice and wert out In Nepali, the fist of the two verbs
almost alvays takes a special form (called the 'conjunctive participle'),
und the teral translation of the same sentencesin Nepali becomes
having come in I sat down and having eaten the ce I went out
A participle is a form of a verb at may be used adjectivally (to
dcscribe nouns) or as one pa.rt of a verb phrase il certain tenses.
Nepali has a variety of different participles, each with a different
cnding and its own technical name. In this book, ech paiciple will
be referred to by the ending that distinguishes it ftom all the others.

The conjunctive participle of a Nepali verb is most commonly

formed by taking its past tense base and adding the ending -g{
-era
to it. Therefore, we will call it the '-era participle':

Vetu Pasttensebase
,t1
TRt6 5 'l

q1
F{

Ais-

rTff_
{-

{ ':r+ gm *q{ dcr{fE; r

+n pmiciple
.{

f"<
\'t
rg{
3nS{
}TC{

having done
having walkd
having taken
having gone
hauing conre
hauing fuune,
hauingfun'

Note *The baseof t is always{- for a participle. F- is never used

as the basefor a participle.
The -era participle refers to an action that takes place before tIrc
action of the main verb - that is, the final verb - of the sentence.But
otherthan tht it doesnot really havea tenseof its own; the tenseof
tle sentenceis the tense that is given by the verb at e end.
Therefore,the action describedby e -era participle can be in any
tense:past,presentor future:
Nepali
q qr{ { |
q 3nq{ iRE I
qrfr qrqr q*o r
t trm cr\r{ arflq1rrE I
q rrm qr< qrfl<qro r

fu r vmer<*116<
vr;q r

English
I came and sat down.
I come and sit down.
I shall come and sit down
tomonow.
I ate rie and went out.
I eat rice and go out,
Tomonow I shall eat rice
and go out.

In the English sentences, both verbs are in the sme tense; in e

Nepali versions only the main final verb has a tense. The subiect of
the Nepali senrenceis usua.llysrated at e very beginning of ttre
sentence, as in thes examples, but sometimes it is not mentioned

until after the -era participle:

r{raqrq< q qr{qFE t

rs qrd{ ET\re.r { qr t

Having eaten rice I go out.

The -era participle is formed in exactly the srmeway, no matter what

or who the subject of the sentence is: the level of politeness is
indicated by the main verb of the senrence.lf e main verb is
tansitive and in a past tense, e subject must take -.

l-uffiqrfrqs{qr
r
fr<g-rrf+
-av

qrc{ qd

c'i- qq rr\r{{rKqrfiq |

He satnear the window and

ate a banana.
I shall wash his clothes and
give them to you.
Yesterday Ki shanji came
into ow shop and bought a
pair of shoesThey went m Khumbu and
cmbed Mount Everest.

|qT,the -era participle of 1 o be is also usedto meanvia.'

mat flight goes via Delhi.
r* +qrcd T\-{q=E t
{-{ {g T{r C{ fs-qrd t Thei buswent to
Kathmanduvia Pokhara.

l The nportedspeech-marker
can only be used as an appendage to a sentence, and never on its
own. When it is added to e end of a statement, the word indicates
lht the person speaking has been told what s/he has just said by
lumeone else. It is usually possible to ascetain who o what the
murce of the information is, but sometimes it is left quite vague, just
ur in English one reports a rumour by begirning 'I hear that... ' or
'they say that... '
lf someonesays:
tcfffiMTfiiiltfr

Your son is hungry

(+ reported sPeech-marker)

thc Dresenceof dgTiF SfrT vour son ln the sentence means that the
pcrson speaking has probly been told by your son that he is hungry,
in which case the sentence could be translated your son says he's
hungry, Houtevel it could also mean that someone else has informed
the speakerof this fact: one can only be sure if one knows the context
in which the statement is made.

suchas:
Similady,a sentence
3nq 3fuq E{ |

(He) won't go to the office

today (+ rcpofied
speech-marker)

could mean he says he won't go to the office today or she says he

won't go to the office today o they say he won't go to the office

oday. Wiout kno\/ing the context in which the statement is made

you really cannot choose between tlese translations.
This kind of confusion should not occur during a conversation!
because e meaning is always clear in its context. Sometimes,
however, a speaker will add to the end of a statement in order to
disown responsibility for its tru or falsify. The following statements
suggest that the speaker has heard the news s/he reports on the radio.
or has read em in a newspaper:
srrqcfftdq
Ttir+ eyqfr

|
+rE cF{ qn6 I

They say it will notnin today.

The Inan president comei
to Nepal today, I hear.

If someone said someing but you did not hear what they said, you
mit wish to ask someoneelsewhat was said.A quick way of doing
this is simply to say:

What wassaid?
EXERCISE 3
Conve the following pairs of sentences into one
sentenceby changing the first verb into e -era paiciple.
Example
q q{ SF | a4qqfS q q'TTrqrrE | =
I shallgo home. After that I shalleat.

1
i

v
k
(

q q( Trq{ qTqIq.l;6 |
I shattgo home and at.

q frq1sq;s| e+scfuq dqir fuft c6 r

q qr< mqdcfffi Fq r
fi-sf{{rq td;81 resqcfbdqrw qrsq r
fr e+-qqr rer6!:i-fr ffi r
q3rfurqrro tqffirm{r
|
E{ {rrr sE{fr t+{ t E+ qrqr qsrrq r

EXERCISE
32 Construct
sentences
at tell someone
to do two
things, one after e oer, along e following nes:

<qrqI Trdr{|{ I (f,

you / eatrice / sleep

r afr r q' fl11 +rq rt

1 aqr 7ft!

q 7q{ rq

r ffirg+eft.rq

ffir{r+qrq{gcId{ r
You please eat the rice
and go to sleep.

"

r acrr tddd T{rongteq

r ftr q.sqc.{r+{,{rs{ { dq/ Srqrqm/il+T{qr

sq

E tg A chanceencounterin Darjeeling
Srrbiris a residentof Da{eeling,and Asheshlives in Kathmandu.
Sore months ago the two men met while Subir was visiting
Kuthmandu.Now Subir is surprisedto meetAsheshunexpectedlyin
l)urjceling.
rr.iIJ T dw {i + rri flq;, r aqliaf i;'rs: q 6aa cr t{ : cfif,.

<rfrFr.qrffi {-Sqmf+ ++rS r

qdrq ffi, t q'dKfuq+ ++<eiur
rrrqrnrt rrq rfrr
qrq cf q crdqr a nrq {i fqq r

{l.ft{ qFc6FdqqE'o <rffi-f,'q t tfu*n vf o1 r

,ffi { u{l{F qlro1r< @
Jq
or 3rrqqqqrk r6"b
r,H s.t{ Ef ', rl{r srf{ 6 +i rn rw<
r. T@s.rfrq
r<qqrRuf fi-{T Tdc.q r
.ir+{rT
dfr6- o1.r+ +rarnr rar=o1
tffi1 'lqqrfq
fr{ 1.iclfl
qrfr qfr e dnffi
srdr, fi r m qrlEfr rffi trq
B? q;T 16lq I

JruF

A *ft nf **<rg*
+

g r+@ e* <nF.r+rqe qr

q rqrqr, i ffr

r*pqr ffiq

frRfu go1 t+,:rres-+qfuq tcc r

s"nT-{F fu

1r{qrF{ q

ri c r-ffi,=

qFq ?qt frq ?

3rc fr, ew=q

rcrq qsmq<ro r<fT{r r{qrqrq
sffisrqqq
{T@fi-{s
sfi{ { q{rqEq.{{
qqq r$qWqwaqr.nffi
r
fffr{ &+ \ir ocr3r+ff qRq qqEq
qrra-or f++
qrfEsf. frrqfrs r
3rfrq q tqi' q-qr+qratT-fi hq'' r-qq +r'" frs' fi E rlcf$
rm qii 61q;6;r
fi-i
R qFned firq qiq { ffi. e{fr q o.ir {rrfi{qr {{
vrfi-{Frrrrsfeqrqfrqfoq{vt tq<qfeo1 rar
3q
Effi
$rs rq aqrirrqfr qrfqsq q<dcrffi
lr+er@,9<
?.fr 4r iqfi-fi frl {c+r g.o r
r]'F{ qqrtfierc{ qrs{d\q ( r{dr<{ |
S-1 r, fqqr ffi rrfr rkqr q{ qre r3{il{ tr, "ffi
1qrfu1r o,vrfr,qN,aqwR I

vmfi to be surytrised
Q o see
*nr{vi to move ouse
q what?
sq foest
<'I ur conservation
-q depatment
uq to eave, quit
qscrlq r's tme
frF youngest
e.ldesr
fi,n to begin to be, End towards
w progress
ra ere (emphasized form of em )
qq to study
cr< memory
rnRi second eldesr
{ o rget
d- q ro swr'm
ffiq
s.fopp

Subir

g{ oopen
qfuq last, frndl
grlrft wlic ?
qfiw exxemely
rF< to put place
rf+ up, above
eqi steep,uphill
1{ fo comeouf
firlal ro end
u, that one, over there
-q asfor
g{re indrec
qrcd o sow
T7 to circle, wande

qr.I ectly
ffi
slowly, gently
ffi it's oyer
ffi cold
3{{ 1aeness
erqfi sopkeeper

Oho! Wat are you doing here? I was surprised to see you,
you know! Have you moved to Dadeeling or what?
Ashesh No, I've been working in the Forest Conservation
Depadment since one week ago. Last year too I ws doing
the same kind of work in Nepal, you know.
Subir And how long will you stay in Darjeeling? Ae e family
with you too?
Ashesh My wife and daughters are with me but this time we came
without our sons. The younger son is 13 years old now, the
elde is just 14. If they don't go to school they won't make
progress.So ey are studying Lhere.
Subir Yes, you have tbree daughters, now I remember. The
youngest is called Lakshmi and the eldest Sarasva, is that
not right? But what is the rniddle daughter's name? I have
forgotten.
Ashesh The middle daughter's name is Radhika. Now Lakshmi and
Radhika are swimming at the Everest Hotel. Sarasva and
my wife are shopping in the market. The schools open from
tomorrow, you know, today is the last day of the holiday.
Subir
Which school will ey go to from tomorrow? Loretto
Collese?

Arhesh Yes, they will go to Loretto College. I hear the school is

extremely good. Wen we got to know that we put em in
at school. They will study there for two months. Afte
two months we will etum to Kathmandu.
You did the right ing. Are you going to wlk to the
llublr
EverestHotel now? It's a long way up, you know, and it's
srcep roo.
Afhsh I forgot and I came out of the house wiout any money.
That's why I'm walking. Where are you going?

My offrce work finished at 5 o'clock, and I was sitting in

that teashopover there, chatting wi my friends. I'll go
home in a little while. My houseis in e samedirection,
you know. But this path is ratherindirect. I'll comea little
way up with you andshowyou anotherpath,no?That path
goesstraightto the hotel without any diversions.
Ashsh But pleasedri you tea slorvly and then come, won't
you?There'sno hurry.
Forgetit,* the tea's gonecold. I'll come without drinking
Subir
thetea.It's 6 o'clocknow,it's late.My wife will be cross.
Here, shopkeeper,I'm off, goodbye.
*
Note r is a colloquial expressionmeaning that'sove anddone
with, or that's not somethingthatneeddetainusfuheL
Subir

Grammar
O4 The continuous telses in -E
The continuous presen tense refers to actions tlat arc occurring even
us the verb is being stated, and is the exact equivalent of English verb
phrasessuch as l am going, they are watching, we are eating. Jus as
in English, the tensecan also be used to talk about the future, so long
us someing else in the sentence makes this clear: I am going
lomoow, we are eang out next Sunday. This tense of a verb
consists of a word that is the Nepali equi\alent o going / watchiitg /
catrng, followed by the appopriate form of@ is or arc. To form the
irst word, the ending - is added to the present tense base of the veb.
ll the baseends in a vowel, is vowel must be nasalized.The ending
is invariable: that is, it is always the same no matter what o who the
rubject of the verb may be. 6 is e verb that must change according
l() number, gender and level of politeness.

tigarnu

to do

rfr,Arfi-{

fr{frTrE

, qr,FTr(m.)
s, q, a{t (t)

c--
---
s q t . t q i t . ^r ( 1^ ( m .)

m+-o
rr{+-<6t
rr.+-st11

= rfE 6

\*'id

\* -18
.q +-5P1

=
=
=
=

\r-<81

\ *- s P

II\*-5181
fr,firfr,afrrrt
qr. qr. .Jitg etc.

ElT jnu o Ao
q

rf. Fr+f6
d

frr{,fdmqs

-.

w +'+ -og
q t+

+ - q !9 1

q r+ " + -o
S, ?rt,aq (m.)
q T + + -< E
s, fl, aq (f.)
sr, r.{.tr, t(|. (m.) w+]+ ,.pq
fr,ffi,ffi111 qT+ + -< TFf
qr. qr, s.llE- (c.

q lq t2
qf q t9r

I An polns
we ae gotng

qrq f

you are going

-l.-

qr +'+ - o

s.S

-rs TK 6t
rI{ E
rfq ft
rf{ 6{
-r!.-:
rf< Eq

I an doing
we ae doing
you arc doing
you are doing
he is doing
sheis doing
he is doing
sheis doing
they ate doing

=
=

= qSY
=

qfq6

= vsPl

= qls
=

qfc te1

heis goins

3rcrirqrqn c{ g-EI
Continuouspast
qr{rr*{r.rfEq r
s.ftT-qr.rrtr
3rgrfu{rq-6rtd I

trott is a specializedcontinuouspresentform ofEt Is. This is usedto

lly thtsomethingexistsin a paicular place,contraryto a listener's
tlpctations,or to stateor emphasizethe fact of its existenceplainly.
h occursonly in the singularform o o:
Nter all, we do have a house
cr{, ftqTrqr r q{ I' o t
Pokhara.
Thereis an airpon in
r{crqr {qrilq{ 6 E r
Kathmandu,you know!

sheis Boing

I!(ERCISE 3l Change e tense of the verb in e following

Fntcncesinto the contiruous present:

they arc going

| ffir{-*een rq1-1e2
r TET|E\68 I
I q{r{<w;q I

heissoins

Tlte connuous past tense is used to describe what was achrally going
on at a particular time, and is the exct equivalent Of English verb
phrases such x I was gong, they were watching. we were eang.lt
is formed by adding e invariable ending - to e presenttensebase
of a verb to ceat the Nepali for gotag / watching / eating, jvst as in
the continuous present tense. Instead of ending with E, however, the
verb phrase must end with the f- form of e past tense of
1,
meaning was or were. Wi High pronouns, these tenses end wi
*;6 in the present and {;u in the past.

Continuouspresent
qrrr{I*6s fi-oinso1 r
c.ft+Frcroq r

fuorntically, the negativeform of ese tensesshouldbe createdby

ch|]lgingE to , fir to fu<, andsoon. But in rel life theseforms
ltt vcry rarely used. For instance.if someoneasks: <crq rc tri
lrt'l ureyou workingz andin fct you-a.resimply readinga book,
q fddr< ra.E No, r rn
ir unswershouldbe alongthe lines of {rt,
lng a book.

Ourfriendsarcsinginga song.
Younge sisteis eaditg out
ap@m.
Mother is looking at the
newspapeL
Our friends weejoking.
Youngersister was
performingpuja.
Mother wasmaking tea.

r s4-{sffi

wqr q

r/ rd s er f{qk$

r
GE I

IXERCISE 34 Change e tense of the verb in the following

tcnlencesinto the continuouspast,andmakeany otherchangesto the
$nlencesat thusbecomenecessary:
"
r
r rErfirqnqeqrd

r
r
r
I

r*af+-G'q-e-rtt
qrqrfrTrsrffi r
efi-es.*.r
+rcrfr+rrr{rrt

Which one? This onet The uses of -qG

The word srQ is frequentlyaddedto adjectives,or to words suchas
fr, e, 1n to replacea noun. In this contextit can be understoodto
meanone:

fiffi
ffi

thetall one
the edone

?q I 18.

wrucn one!

ETQ
qlq l

that one
ws one

acrt+q{ffiqr
qrq-qr i r

rq<s<

Whichoneis your house?My

houseis that tall one
over there.

q{.Er*r"qi?(dqr

Which one did you buyT

I boughtthe cheapone.

FF I

The secondusageof al

is contrastive.Here it meansas for

trr *qcrqo q=s l<fqGqq I go n Rato Bangala School.

qF|*r,3f5qsTt-.EI
As fu elder bother, @e) does
q"qr{,.M+{r<

not go to schooL he goes to

the ofice.
This man is a Brahmin, but
that one is a Newar.

ht pt'uctice, affirmative forms almost hvays take the -g{ ending,

whllc rrcgativeorms most usually take the -e'{ ending. Because
tn is the longest of the three possible endings, it is emphatic.
( ltnrklcr the differences between the following pafusof sentences:

r qld qrg{ {r{TrE I

t fld qrld qrR TrEI

'hc irm endingin -i is lesscommonlyused,thoughit is obligatory

lRccrlainidiomaticexpressions:

ctrr{|
qfr !'ffi

ffic r,r qq q I

66 Other orms of the coniunctive participle

There are two other forms of conjunctive participle which mean
much the same as, but are used less fequently than the -q{ participle.
These forms end in - -i and -+c -kana:
Ve
rFI
c:t s.l

gFt

to do
to walk
to take
to 80
to be

cl. ota. 1
rf{{
t E'

qc{
rTs{

cj.W.2

r EEl
tqF

cj.ptc.3

F**

ir*F;r
!rid{

doing, having done

walkin!, Iaving walkd
taking, having taken
Eoing, having gone
being, having becone

The negative forms of all participles are formed simply by adding the
prefix - na- to the affimative form.
cJ.ptc. I cj.ptc.2
iFfa{
I1^
.rE5r
<F
.r tq'
fl1g

rr{
iq{

,T1
1{{

cj.ptc.3
4!p
not doing. not having done
7Id1{,4 not walking. nor having watked
+l4rr+4 not taking, not having ta*en
+1T6 not going, not havingEone
Yliffi
ap1}d;g, 2ot having become

I ateardwentou
I wentorlt withouthauingeaten

!F q-{ { {Er, .r fa{

t
ffi

I sinply haveto neet you

('havingnot metyou it will
notbeall dght').
My daughtersimply hasto
go to the cinema(li:terally,
if my daughterdoesnotgo
to the cinematheeis no
happiness).
Dasaincamebeatingthe
drum, Dasainleft, having
given us debtsto bea.*

Notc * A proverb.o qqg..to play a drurn; mr is from the verb

r,rgc, which is the causativeof dst ro carry Dasainis Nepal's
n'rostimpoant annualHindu fesval.
Incidentally,Nepali poetsareblessedby this wealthof choice,which
nrokesit mucheasierfor them to adjustthe numberof beatsin a line
0f verse.
rl{1 olTderqF {rd:q( R l!|FE{ | My ci.l&er washtheir
handsbefoe they eat.It's
un <t'+c rrrd qt #fi { t
not good to eat without
washingyour hands.
cF{
she takesa showerbefore
fWc'{ SfE li{d s@
shegoesto bed. Shenever
$Gqf
goesto bed without
showeringfr$t.
EXERCISE 35 Construct sentencesthat state tht each of the
pcoplein column 1 performedeachof e verbsin column 3 wthout
pcrforming the verb in column 2, us producing 12 different
tcntences:

emrrqs
fr qrqr
ffi

2
t

3
( 9 t.l

qq(qrT

{frfr
q

67 Explessionso age
There are several ways in which a person's age is expressedin
Nepli. The most straightforwardis simply to define a person'sage
usrng :
roffiv<v
ef {1
My son'sageis 20 years.
cqq- S{rfr dr rtffi Ef r
Sanjay's
fattw's ageis B0years.
More commonly,however,a personis describedasbeing ofa certain
age,usingthe possessive-d :
fr afr qrt{ ffr r
My eldestdaughteris

qqrfrq^+i+'"ffi

,tilff|,"'l,,0

^o -,

In all of e above examples, the veb at the end of th sentence is

equally likely to be the past tense rt, indicating that this is the age
that has been attained or reached by the person concemed:

sMv<fiqafrr
cqq-+q+rq<qsf rrd r
&afrErqsEffrrr
qqrfr{a$nlrEr t 4ffisqffisaffirl-qq 1
68 Further relationship terms
The various offspring of a family eachhas a title that indicatesthe
relative statusin terms of age. As averagefamily size decreases,
some of tlese titles are falling into disuse,but five are still qte
cotmon:

or sons
Bmthers
d
qrffi
qTk
T
fFd

Sists
or daughters
i
qrt{fr
sri{fr
rrt{trr
{'r;

eldest
secondeldest
tltird eldest
fourtheldest
youngest

Thcsetens areprimarily adjectives:

+ drrr q{rrq d{Errcqr My eldestson stayeilin
Biafrtagarfo someyears.
d,F t
yss1el4sy
hissecond
H 3efr tt bffi f4q1qfr 1
daughtcrwasmanied.
You are ree yearsolder
aqr{ qq-<r fr{ Ef r g{to r
thnme.
Alough w is usedto meanolder or seniorto.bolt 5p6l416 cr
mall canbe usedto nea'lyoungero junior to.
Youmetre yearsyounger
ffi qr<r fi-{ fli iFF6 E |
qr.sr
thannE.
frfi
fi-{ af {f 6 r
f;gr andat areoften usedratherle nicknamesfor children.rfi6l
and+t! youngest can also be used to addessor refer to young
childrenwhosenamesone doesnot knol:

grr;, q+fu;r+er+r* r
g ftF6r, fqra{rg !

Hey giL, come here a minuE !

Hey boy, bring the tea!

E tg out shopping

&l
gl

II

'
4+{
'

.+

Anjali and her younger sister have gone to the vegetable maket to
buy food for the evening meal. Dil Badur, who has a stall at e
market, sells them some of the items they need.

o
-r

er6fi rr r

d+qr<{ tqrffiridqr@r

rq ecrrfrvrto t "
fq-d*qrg{ cr*6 , dqr r * ac+rfr-wwfr rqtd+
t+ffiac*rt
frqr qr*6 r

3
qt

qrgdErqtt

o
+

qg ffi
qro $rt 6 6 R :ng ffi
o
tFrqracdrt+.dq{qr@r
trqGffiofrr
kq{dE( rr q{ ffi s m 'Me cfr o rgr*rtq fd{6
frt
{rffifi-{ffirqt1fr{rqrqor
{+qg{ srffiEq{Frqr
srq
+ffi@qr<rffivmgor++fr{r
kd*qrg< d.r

In this unit you will learn

. how to discussthe prices
and availabilityof vaious
foods
. how to declae nedsand
wants

fc<*qrg{ g6 q-q{ffi rdqrffi of qr@ r

q-qfr
qdTsrm'1QqlffiqSs1
qq1Erqc{sr
r e-qr q, rq r* ei-+rfr-qfi{ frt qrrq r Ercd qrr r*
qcdqr qr1\ r
qoq{ r

rcq qQrql

ttgcf{ qAcr rqrs ffiqr

qFE"6|

crt.6 1aqnor vfr

6;o twqrfrsw-d rsrr ?

+ fuc, q ffs fi.i 1q, {qf'q {ffi r r
q{ vr *e qre tsrnl 6 ?
de-{g< 5. ;fr qqql 615q1 awffi
qqifi qlf6 "
rq q q Q I q ( .

srf(ir+rwcrlrfr { r

c*qlg{ 6d {d +rr r v ffiEsqr qqifr q-{ cd, { ?

aqrffiqfirffi*rr<
I
qns,
qrqttt
qr*
3E mfi6s o1 r
ffi r
ar
rwr
s;Nfirqnrqqr
|1 o be wanted, needed
dafifr yegefables
crI to be available

latuc rype,kind
rd ceap

q\ potato(es)
a1q price
ccrs onior(s)
rrd mustard
ffq Sreens
Xa bunch
aqq uncooked rice
s{ .len.ls

Anjali
Dil Bahadur
A\iali
Dil Bahadur

qK meat
fir+rffi
Klrclrapoklrari
(an area of Kathmandu)

qrortrs
lxra'fi to addup,calculats
a nore (of cunency)
nFFl change
qrecr problem

chillipepper(s)
ffi
qfr tfusmuc
3rri strange

fr spr'ry
trrtn

nowadays

Shopkeeper,hello!
Hello sister.What do you want?
Arc vegetablesavailablehere?
Yes ey are, sister,why wouldn't they be?This is a
vegetableshop,you know! In my shopeverykind of
vegetableis availablecheaply.

How much are the pottoes?

Arali
These red potatoesare eight rupees a kilo, those
Bahadur
Dll
white potatoesare six rupeesa kilo. Which kind of
potatoeswould you like?
Well, which one tastesgood?
Aqlali
They say the red potatoesare tasty, but e white
Bahadur
Dll
onesare fine as well. Which will you take,sister?
Give us threekilos of red potatoes.Do you haveany
Aqlali
onions?
Dll Bahadur Yes.Tenrupeesa kilo.
Give me onekio. How much aree mustardgreens
Aqlli
per bunch?
Dll Dahadur Five rupeesa bunch.How much do you want?
Do you
Justgive me onebunch.It's a bit expensive.
Aqlali
haverice and lentils too?
Dll Bahadur No, I don't. This is a vegetableshop,you know!
Pleasego to anoer shopfor rice and lentils.
And meat?
Aqlali
DII Bahadur You can't get meathereeither.You can get meatin
Khichapokhari.You can get fish theretoo.
All
right. \Ve'll go ere now. How much do I owe
AnJli
you?
Dll Bahadur One moment, I'll add it up. Right, it comes to 39
mpees,
I haveonly a 100rupeenote. Do you havechange?
Ar{sli
Dll Bahadur Yes, at's not problem.But don't you want any
chilli peppersl
No, we don't. This is enoughfor today.
Aqlali
Dll Bahadur What a strangething! All Nepalis like chilli, don't
they?Don't you like spicyfood?
we do, but nowadayswe have some English
Yes
Aqlall
friends at our house.They don't like spicy food at
all.

Grammar
00 leeded and availablei qr{ and crt
The passive verbs tIfi to be obtained/be availabte md qrfft ro be
ocdedlbe wantedbelong to category of verbs called 'i-stem ves'

becausea short i vowel (O is addedto the veb baseto createtem.

It is a featureof Nepali, andoer relatedlanguages,that verbs such
as to want, nee get ae expressedin passiveterms: raer than 1
teed, Nepali-speakerssay is necessaryto/fo ne; insteadof f got,
they will often say wasobtainedta/fo me. The thing that is wanted,
neededor obtainedis madethe subjectof the passiveverb, while the
wanter,needero obtainerbecomesits indirect object,ma*ed by the
postposition-{r.

ss qrFrrqrt ffir

a*fi qrt

r A healthypesonhas
no needof
absolutely
medicine.

qr[T
Thepassiveverb qT{f,rrcans to be obtainebeavailable,andit is the
paosiveform of the v srbqq b get/obtain Its mostcommonusehas
the senseof to be available:
q , +d qrq crE ?T{ ${ 1 Hey elder sister,is lodging

"ri

qTfq ro be needed/ wanad is the passiveform

of the verb qr( ,o
wis.{f{; is usedmostly with otherverb I wish to leave,I want t)
leamEngsh(seeGrammar ll0), whereasrfu{ is usedwhensome
rngis neededor wanted.
The habitualpresenttenseof qTk is usedto denoteneedsthat re
regularor hitual:
-.*t*
qrtro r
Whatdo peopleneedin lfe?
T@
qrlE
peopleneedwate.
c]-.EF-n?cf
I
rr6tcr rs vrl6o ?
q;F-fl l
T{T ct{ st6

Whatdo sick peopleneed.?

Sickpeopleneedmeilicine.
To expressthe senseI want something,Nepali usesthe simplepast
tenseqT, e.g.:
I want sugn.
He wantsnoney.

Such sentencesdenote a need or desire that is very much in the

preser, despite the pas tense of the ve. The person who is
speakingconsidersthat this needor desirearoseimmediatelvbefore
s/hegaveutteranceto it.
The negativeform erft;t is grammaticallyin the presenttense,but
it is usedas the negativeform o1 6sd qr-E alr6 qfm to meanrs
not wantedor is not needed:
q , dsr{qr ffi qrftq ?q, Hey elder sister,do you want
qfQ<{ |
somesusar?No I don't.

w{{{{ri+

Sometimesthe active and the passiveform of the verb are equally

0ppropriate.For instance,if you wish to inform someonetht you
rcceived the letter they sent you, you can choose between the
following:

qfrffifffifficEl

What elsedo peopteneed?

people alsoneed.food.

ffi{F-drrle6?
ffies-eqffirqrlesr

q-{ffiqrR+l
ss-{{rqrH r

qmqr rrqtrr

availablehere sir,go and

askover there.
Yo cannot getbeefin Nepal,

qkac|-ffifficrrdr

I eceived yo lette the

otha day.
Yo lette was eceved the
other day.

If thepassiveform is used,it is normal to leaveout a mentionof who

rcceivedthe letter. This will be understoodto be the personspeaking
unlessit is statedoerwise.
aboutDialogue19:
EXERCISE3 Answere followingquestions

r
r
r
v
r

q {{rc<ftqqqra-c*rfrcr-6 r
<rqr-*Erq+fr r
*frerg<rrfrt
q{dr'qrscr{.E?
q +{r<<a
rrRI{B cr;Er ?

( {sdFr{

<[.r' qrr.E FFfllq{ '

70 Food vocabulary

qrwrftffiqiF{fr

Whatthingsdoyouneed
for taday?

ila{rt

Vegetables

potato
cucumber
{rs.sr*fr cauliflowe
cabbage
+d.sr
tornato
chickpea
EllT
omon
5t
putpkin
rash
{rTdfaq
okra
fl{

sqTT

Fruits

3rFq
'f le
rrft
+{ |
liqqr
gn:f{lr
.qls

gltava
mango
ume
Dmana
rcmon
onnge
appE

qN
lqrrfrrrg

Meat
cfucken
rleat

qF

greeas(of severalvarieties) qfrd qrq goat meat

beans
<qrq
butra1o
leat
{gc* rq pig mear

ffi

Other foods
qqI{

chutuey
millet
ghee

fus
<IT

3T*{T

tr{r
qTq

lentils
e88
tce (cooked)

{l
qTSt

cQl

ranr

frsh
butt

qq;t

gnger
chilli
rice
(urrcooked)
yoghut
.
soybean
corr"maize
garc

71 Using -crinstead of -+qrr

Although the principal useof -qr is asan ,objert-marker,,it is often
interchangeablewith the postposion-* eirrfor:

1-cd'fltT
{q.TrdrFr
{rft

or
or
or

fr*frfrqrcmr
gS|q

cq lq fQ

Io IatheI

+ qffi

for a month

+rqf E

IoI me

Thisgift is for my moet

.For[.rsa(dedicationon the
title pageof a book of
poems).

EXEBCISE 37 Create ten sentencesusing e elementsbelow,

first stting whether people need e nouns sted in the middle
column,anden wheer buffaloes(dfr{s) neede samethings:

qt'Aa-q1

r{t{s.{rr

crfr

{|{r

tisErK (fodder)
farer(educadon)
qIa (eecmciry)

l l Qc "l
I l l .u Ora-----ai-

-----c-

treO n placeto stayin Kathmandu

l)ip and Mesh have both come to Kathmandu to study at
'lichandraCollege.Their first needwasto fird placesto stay.They
comoarehow eachhasfaredin the searchfor accommodation.

ri
3l
,(nl,
ol.
.-+/
-oi
l

4'1
]
.
.-l

3l
.l

1+

II

o at+
3o
oo
3
@

aq{r qfu+qcls_fi{4lt
q-{n , qmi rqflq,r rr rs<{tra{qrfr qr +arqrt tdq
t
ffr+ rqr Es <r q rq qr.rqff{qr rg41mffi eq tva
wGfutd{.< frq qiqR.qrcFFo rrs Fqrtqre fu.o t
q{r :$,rnt+fu+aroq-r rsr+EraT qiq fu{ rqfi.
\d( {R-{ qrfu;rfi r qqdrflqr q; r
frT{ <r<crffi {rfr {{ q o r
qE!
ar o ra-<q<cfrsT.qrer@qFfrto t*d'r wfr
+n Rc r
dF rFft{ 556137Y4
fr.m ri+ qF ?
F{

rf
I!
=

o
In this unit you will learn
. how to descib eelingsand
impressions
. how to discuss esemblances

sqlrf.+ ravr{fi qfi cr-{ q{r gr-t"*a,$-sr I

rnqr 3rRi6c frfu.6 tr
, rTqfi Ts rrE rsdrlil{ ffi
eqrr q1eEs+ q, rnn ;6 |
qeT gtdrn(?
frw qr+rf,r qcrqq rt r+ rc_et{rct{qw 6-.fu6 taqrq
S{-g{ t sqr-reqa rqrq a-fr Er qs r gfi r6{
s-d {et t\-q g<{ { snd rS |
T
+

<t lodgings, rented accommodation

{+q eas.i.ly
q"{ad eventually, in tlrc endl
5 a locality in north-central
Kathmandu where many tourists stay
y{ eally, very
{FrEq< Bag Bazaax a locality in
est-cenhal Kathmandu
e Es Trichandn Coilege
IFq to be eached
qR window
{sl to be seen,visible
qq sghtly, a little
g any
(Rq louns
Tc pop
fa musrb
{<1 to be hemd audible
sT fo snke, ffect, seem
ct /i&q srnuTarro

q<qRlandlord
@ to match,accord,
cometogether
r{IF 4amg(certral
Nqsl)
err ft'lq ess
ft1 to be spolen
rrct larlguage
s place
@w theHimalayas
Eni clea4 clealy
@ wind, ai
{-ggsighing sound
*{-Tff{ uyersadsfearrt
rt+o e soundof nmning
water
trfr sourd
s@ exceptfor
g<< beautrftl
zr< peaceful

Dipak
Did you find lodgingseasily?
Mahesh No, I didn't. It wasratherdifficult. tn the endI found this
litde room in Thamel-What aboutyou?
pak
It went very well for me. I will stay at a friend's placein
Bag Bazaar.From his house you can reach Trichandra
College in five minutes. you can even see the collese
om the window!
Mahesh Oho, my lodgingsare ratherfar away.you can't seeany
college ftom e window. you can see only shops,
restaurantsandtourists,andyou canhea only pop music.
Dipak
It seemsthat you don't like the lodgings.

The room's OK. But e landlord comes from outside

Kathmandu.He doesn't speak Nepali well. Sometimes
we misunderstandone another.
is he ftom?
Where
lllpuk
He's
from
Manang.You oncewentto Manangtoo,didn't
Mrheeh
you?
Yes, I went once.Over therethey don't speakvery much
DIpak
Nepali becausee peoplehavetheir own language.
Mrhesh But how did you like the place?
I really liked Manang.You can seethe Himalayasclearly
Dlpak
from there.You can't hearanythingexceptthe sighingof
the wind and the sound of running water. It's not like
Thamel.It's a really beautiful andpeacefulplace.
Mrhcsh

Grammar
72 Feelings:the use of nouns with qr1
ln English,peopleactively experiencephysicalo mentalconditions
ruch ashunger,thirst o happiness:I feel hungry, I am thirsty, I was
happy.ln Nep, however,the relationshipbetweenthe condition
und the person who experiencesit is reversed,and the condition
(hunger,thirst, happinestbecomesan activeagentwhich affecse
personwho experiencesit. That personbecomesthe indect object
of thecondion.andis ereforemarkedby e suffix -+. whilethe
condition becornese subject of the verb eflr which can be
translatedin various ways aocordingto context but here means,o
effec be felt.
As with sTf, to be wanted, if the person in the sentenceis
experiencinge condion at e time the sentenceis uttered,the
vs qlr mustbe in the simplepasttense,to showthat the condion
has affected that personor beenfelt by him/her. Thus, an English
phrase such as I feel hungry becones in Nepali translaon
me+object-markehungeraffected:
qqri r+ mr t
I feel hungry.
If thepersonin e sentenceexperiencedthe condionin e past,the
verb drrr shouldbe in one of the various past tenses,including the
simplepasttense.However,if the simplepasttenseis used,the time
needsto be mentionedto avoid ambiguity:

f{frqqr{ fisrr* I

I felt hungry yesteday.

If fte verb qpq Ir itt the hitul presenttense,it implies a regrlor

habitualoccurrence:
+ t qfs q-fir( q-{q + qrrs r I feel hunw at about
5 o'clock every day.
ln all suchsentences,
despitethe fact that they translateasffee1,you
ae, etc., the gammticalsubjectof the verb is the condition at is
experienced,not the personwho experiencesit, and so the verb dFI
to be felt car takeonly third personsingularendingsltnoron+ or
rqnqTrr).
t +sr er{{qd
@
ffiqrr
|
ecrfrr t r-{ gsfr qr I
{rfr slrqr{ E-ir
R-qfg{qr qrqt I

rfr ffi

rfrqrqra-rnqsr
r
q+fir*rl g'e fl'q 1*

yesterdayI atea lot of

ctilu'Ia andI was thinty.
I am verypleasedto have
met you.
In the ght he felt cotd.
A few dayslater he caught
a cold.
Rame'smothered in (the
month o) Cht and
everyonewassad.

qqrt qT{rdft-{r qrl r

I fell asleeparoundmidnight.
*
.dr{,
Nore
terally to fa.l/,is usedas an honorific ve meains o
dre.The non-honorificverb meaningo dre is Tf.
In statementsof generalfct, the personor peopleaffectedneednot
always be mentioned:

Tqq{c.r qr qr"6 r

In the month of Pus one

feels cold.
On the buseshere one
sometimes feel s suffocabd.

qqt{r q.lr{arr rri

s-f{-T {rr5 |
Anothermeaningof cffi is to apply rn a moe heral, physical sense:
qfrqqr@{rrr
My shirt became muddy.
qrqr 3nrinr r
The house caught ftre.
EXERCISE 38 Construct sentencesthat say at the following
peoplefelt, experiencedor contrctedthe following things:

\
Bxanryle:
I

(q{

f{

r <frefr
r frsrl
( fr fr
,, {rfr
r
r {r
rr q-{
r {

(qrfr)
4ppiness

qqrqfr rt t

tffsI (l((E | ,
nungel \.lttnt t

saress(<:r{)
aroea (f<qr
areless(qs{
cordness(q lsl
a headcold GI

acoug1ffi;
embarassment (<4q)
deep (ffir )
fear (e{ )

guor(r+fr )

73 How do you iike Nepdl?Using adiectives

with cr,1
The veb o{Tr{occurswith adjectiveswith the basicsenseof o sike
ore as, or to seem,a'f,dthe person affectedby the ver takes the
postposition-{r. The questionrt trrfr'! menswhatd you think
of it?, how did you like it? or how d you frnd ir? th referenceto a
paticularpoint in time:
How d you ke Nepal?
t <cffi I crd {R qr. t
t
I ked Nepalvery much.
qnt{rrrmr

dtfrwrqrrqrrr
"
rqrqsnq.rr qr.fr r
qwqrftrnmrdqrr
<qtnqr gq.norr

How d you ind the

Engshlanguage?
I found it vety difficult
indeed.
And how did you frnd
Iapanese?
I found thatlanguage
evenhatdet.

The questiont qrter with the verb cF1 in the hbitual present
tensemeanswhat do you think of it? o how do you ke i?in more
generalterms.Contaste followingpairs:
frlrffiqltrl{d{rfr?

ffiqmr*'dqrr6r

How didyoufrndrcfad
lastnight?
What do you think of Nepali
food?

S sqrqrq {R iil. r
ffi
ilfa-sdcr{{r nd qrrei r

How did you like thatnovel?

How do you frnd Nepai
teatre?

Oftenthe passiveform of the verb is usedinsteadof e active form

to indicatethatsomethingis or is not possible:{fT canbe}reard.is
ttotDe. qtq-v

w{ arc{reqfuo f+ gft t

EXERCISE 39 Consftuct sentences that say that the people in the

left-hand column did not find e things in the central column to be
as described in the right-hand column.
Examole
ffi
I

{rififfqr
\:l lQ

dTT
k

+t, | tl

this food

goobsrig = dcr&ngerqrffiil

thar song
his village
Japanese
India
Nepali

sweet-sounding1ffi)
shange (fi)
diffcult
nice
easy

75 Simirar fo: qR
ft is a memberof the group of words that also includesrrd l&e
tlls, s or i{R ftfte ar, andt< lfte what ?/ how? lt is ]usedrl
two slighdy different ways:
qd canbe usedasa postpositionto meal similar a ot like:

Every transitive verb in Nepali can, at least in eory, produce a

passive'istem' counterpat:

qqd qF r
aqri b{r rrs$

Examples o active and passive verbs

S-g
{q
A
ql1

to speak
to see
to hea
b undestand
tu say
to eat

qFr
STFT
GIT;T

to arive

wclIqrffiTrs{ffi{r

SftX

A personke me.
Yow sonis ke my younger
brcther.

s t

Yow languagesounds

ilr@rrrqrffiSf+;ot

like Nepali

to be spoken
t b seen
to be heard
to be understood
to be sd
to be eaten

The following phrasescan also be appendedto a statementto make

It lesscategorical:
...it seems
...qRo t
... it seemsto me
...q* qqrl qn o r

...qd rtn qrrfr r

qrqqffrq*o
r

There are also a few intransitive verbs that can do the same:

ST

canyou o canyounothear

my voicefrom thete?
ilt.+ti..re $ralTsn rrffq k s t From Nagarkot,Eveestis
easily visible.
a-*6rfr ir qt slrcrI gF6 t
Now ow village can be
reachedwithin onehour.

74 Morc passiveverbs

-o'"'1
eq

can De seen. ts vtslote:

s qfE qr$bqR

b bereached

{q il{

...it seemedto me
|

It lmks like it won't nin aday.

It doesn't seem to me that he
will come today.

qrd sT1ef qR qqr qrrfr t 1rseemealto me that Nepal

wasa heavenon eafih.

In lapan the Nepali

70 Making adiectives into adverbs

ffi-it'q-srrdrctr{rdqFi6,
;i#i:,"i::i'*

Adjectives (words that describenouns) can be made into adverbs

(wodsthat describethe actionsof a verb) ir a vadety of ways.Some
huvethe postposition-frr addedto them:

cm'iqr-
rEsrrq ;qqi!f i l i,ii #] ;
d*H
"'
+r."q'nffiqrcdr
Hi*fi,ri#^;""

&

ffi

quick

ffir

f6-if

stow

Rq

quickly
slowIy

qfqqt

e a sy

rrfr

{Ff.r

good

{r,r

easily
well

Some adjectives can also be made into adverbs simply by

emphasizingthem:

quick

quickiy

Oers can be made into adverbsby adding the pososition- to

them:
.I IE

n{r

fficult
difficult

r r r g it1

with difftculty
with diffrculty

tM

The two setsof adverbsin the following box arederivedfrom the set
of adjectivesto their left:
Adjective
rtT

h,ke this

eqR
orsfr te ar
q<
*f

Adverb
{qt or

in this
mannef

<q(frorst qorsd in at

simitato qs or
xe wnat !

{ql' o

,ffii

6q

how?

Theubiqtousadjectiveq- canalsotakee advrtiialform{trfr.

dmrnfim-cffi |
Thatwod<was
dorc

#!"fft**"^,.
{q*-.**.1q
gr qr qT{ Q.;iqFi {rsi E | Thatman is
Gennm buthe
speaksNepali well.
EXERCISE40 Insert-qr or in ttregapsin thefoowingsentences:
r q_ffi{l

I Trs
v
r

u
.
(
p

s.rfuarsffi r

3c_
{Q qr rr qrr r
ffi qrqr_ Ts-rl{rr t
fic rnq r
{rfi-As_
s{_
ilRr_ Trdqr |
qnafrfuqsd-{r{r.E,
aqfdc _
frq{r rd qr. r
rT-a$qr
r+frqrd r
Ofr_

IXERCISE 41 Tanslateinto Nepali:

I
2
3
4
5

7
I

The Himalayascan be seenftom my window.

The Magar languageis spokenaroundPokhara.
Your (High) voice cannotbe heardftom here.
Your (Middle) village will not be reachedin an hour.
It is said(that) thereis a witch (bolsi) in tht house.
In Tibet the Nepali languageis sometimesunderstood.
Pleasewalk slowly (High). We'll reachthe village easily now.
I am very happy to havemet your (High) son.He seemedlike a
very clever (calk) boy to me.

21 A late start
The Paudelfamily haveoyerslept,andto makemattersworseFaer
hslost his watch andey do not know what time it is.
qr,{r,q@ffi{fr7
!Ft

n
qcfr
tT

qrOrafr lqrwqqrs{H{r rrrrEffirct

d ro
Er rq*qiqqrorqs r
ssqr sars +E rc{r ffi H ild.rq{ Tfid fir-s- {
T6iT I

crt
{
{rqT

ceff

sl

GI
al
4l

-aJ
:.P

ql

o
5 o
o
r

(ffi

rF
J

aqT

ffi <rqsffio 1qq'qft firS 1

qerfr,g cefr I qr{ *@vw t

qrqrrtqr{s-iri R;R vr 1vqr{2

3nq+q,
crqT retofr, ffi *rg+wtr-* grnqf<Et
qffi sfr rqrqqrt-ffiRfr tmtdrq*gfroo rq{Fq{rn
vqr$ofrrq,k{r Rrr,qr{\ rErqfr qr{qt
qfr sor\-{Fqrqr
qrqT q, ll, eqbfr{rqq.q rqrrre-qr

Ir

st

o
{r

{r!{r !qr{Hfl, fiq{ffie t

tdscr
rqrqqRffiq rffi rrn e rq3{F{sEq
qcrif{@r

qsfi

ll,

6*q rqkqrqe-et<q& qfc.{scfuqn rs{sf$E r

scr.qesrq-*?ffiM?
, Sh q t ffi ravr{ @ g+ *a +rc-rv t oefrrr
-a,rq t.rc+ firfr effiqr 6rqs e tiq.ds fd t

In lhis unit you will learn

. how to us the complted
tnsgs
. how to stte th time of day
. how to port what othes
havesaid
. how to us verb forms to
specify causes

q father,dad
qt{+ now
rq o in& stnke
mw perhaps
qritug be(seeGrrmar 92m {r)
aqcfr sll, evennow
vrel m rouse,lift up
cR frs (adve)
N down, below
fir-q wa c1oc.k
t well; I don't know
,lq who htows? searchme!
e coa

4q to wear
fir rnner
qffi pocke
orn n feel with theha
.i a quarteto
< well; I don't know
sFT to cometo the boil
trai immediately
& laundryman
sffr sar'; woman'sdress
$r codres
this evening
sWfr father anddaughter

Lakshmi
Father
Lakshmi
Father
Lkshmi
Father
Mother

Lakshmi
Father
Lakshmi
Mother
Lakshmi
Mother
Lakshmi

Mother

Father,Father,what time is it now?

I don't know, daughter.Perhapsit,s 8 o,clock.Is your
brother not up yet?
No he's not.He is still in his own rtrom.
Get him up now. But first go quickly downstais,look at
the wall clock in the shopandcomeback.
Very well. First I'll look at the clock, and only after that
I'll getbrotherup.
Uma, where'smy watch got to? Have you seenit?
Well I don't know,I haven'tseenit. Whichcoatdid you
\4/earyesterday?It was that black coat over tlere, wasn,t
it? Feelinsideits innerpocket,then.Is it ere?
Father,faer! It's not 8 o'clock,it,s a quaer to nine!
Oho, we're really late today. Hasn't your brothergot up
yet? And haven't you madeany tea?
The waterhas only just boiled.Now l,ll mate it right
away.
Lakshmi, oh Lakshmi! Hasn't the washerrnancomeyet?
No he hasn't,mother.You haven'tgiven him my new
sari?
No I haven't, daughter,I only gave him your broer's
schoolclothes.
Then that's aU right, you know. Todyis Sunday.It's
brother's schoolholiday. He'll bring e cloes by this
evening,you know. There,the tea's ready,pleasecome.
Fatherpleasecome too.
There,ere, father and daughterdrink your tea. I,ll get
brotherup andbring him too.

Grammar
77 The completed presnt tense
This tensedescribesan eventor action that happenedin the pastbut
still has somebearingon the presentbecausenothing has happened
srnceto supersedeor negateit. It is the equivalentof the English e
hascome,she hasseen,tlrcy havedone,but in Nepali the Englishas
is replacedby the Nepali for rs or are (b, Eq, 6 etc.)
The tenseconsistsof two words.Tecbnically,the frst word is called
the 'f,erfect participle', becauseit describesa action tht has been

'perfected'or 'completed'.lve shall seelater that this participle can

bc usedon its own andin othe tensestoo. It is formed very simply
hy addinge ending-g -eko to the pasttenseb-aseof e verb or,
In the case of e High forms, by dding -Igdr -bhaeko to the
dictionary form of the verb. The -g participle describes the
conditionof its subjectin termsof someing it hasdoneor hasbeen
ln theDast.
Highfoms

All otherfonns

rrt + q+ = $${qd
cq + !T{r = EE{q+
= q*i<dr
tft*
"+
Arel+rrV*
w{ + rr = E|X\'+t
q + v+ = 8",\'+r
ffi + rr\r = eT\rdi

\{{d

+ qfr
+ q{
+ qdr

= q doae
= 4 seaed
=ffi
torypr"

ri-

+ qfr
+ \'fr
r (r

= {qd gore
=M
c,ted
= rrqd r*n

The secondword in e completedpresenttenseis the appropriate

lbrm of the verbE, ccordingto the numberandgenderof the subject
of theverb.If e verb is transi(ive.e subjectmusttake- because
grammatically this is a past tense:

qEr
ffiqi

snmoI
IriI trRffr Er I
fi-Esq'otqt t

'"

I have done.
You are not asleep.
He has bought..
We have fogotten.
They have not gone.

The -q+ participle can take feminine and plural endings,just as

adjectivesdo. If the subjectof the verb is feminine,the endingshould
bc -(fr -eki:
Youngersisterhasgone
sfr6{Trfr t
to school.
lf the subjectis plural the endingshouldchangeto -qrFT-ek:
|
Theboyshave saidhello.
@++Rv*o1
Theserules are observedconsistently in witten Nepali, but less
consistentlyin the spokenlanguage.As always,e High forms are
the sameregdlessof the numberand genderof the subject.

Although the completedprcsenttensegenerallyrefers to an action

that was completedin the past,certainverbsmust be translatedinto
the continuouspresentin Engsh.Theseverbs shouldbe thouehtof
asverbsthat indicatea specificmited action (for instance.qE-fo sir
down and gq ro go to bed or to fall asleep),or that refer the

beginningof an ction:sqqr{or
qrfr c o r
aredgro

qrfrsffior
s qrfo+ ft6qr{{ o r

He is sitting on a chair (he

has sat down on a chair).
It is nining (it hasbegun
to nin).
My headis huxing (my head
hasbegm to hurt).
The wateris boiling (the
water hascome to the boil).
He is slecping(he hasgone
to befallen aslee| in the
upstarsoom.

The completedpresenttenseis often usedto give negativeanswers

to questionsthat have beenposedin the simple past tense,because
the simplepast(asexplainedearlier) doessometimesmeanmuchte
sameas the completedpresent:

o + qr r
A

+S*q.a}r

Wo has cotite?
No one has come.

In everyday speech,e -q+ -eko ending is often droppedin e

negative,andif the baseendsin .a or - the yowel is lensthened:

+Sm'ar
q rn' I

No one has comeI have not gone-

EXERCISE42 Translateinto NeDali:

I Elder broer hasgoneto Da{eeling.
2 Sister-in-lawhas stayedin Kathmandu.
J
Has anyonecometo your (High) house?your (Middle) younger
brotherhascome,but apartfrom him nobodyhascome.
4 The waterhasn'tboiledyet.
5 I havegiven your cloes to the washerman.
6 He (Low) hasboughtfive new books.

ITGRCISE 43 Answer the following questionswith (a) a simple

prrt uffirmativeand(b) a completedpresentnegative:

Bxample
;wr rtsrqr+ t

a {, qrfr t(Yeseas).

(HasKdnchscrubbede pos?) t q,qrffiq

t(lVohe hasn't).

r fiafffuqvr1rt

qrlE T6,qr qrs--i}T ?

t mrt+ q<qre qF qrfr t

| ftff rfid qq ?

78 Stating the time o daYusing *s

fv is the simple past tenseof the verb EE, to ring o to stike.
Lltcrally, q meansit struckor it rang,andits subjectis a number:
lhrocrang,half past four ang, el.The verb rcmainssingular(that is,
li cndsin -d in tle affumative) in all instances.
Althoughit is gammaticllyin the pasttense,{d is usedto ask or
tcll thepresenttime.The negadveform is usuallyq c.
Is it 4 o'clocknow?
t@tn*dt
rt,qrc+r
Yes,it is 4 o'clock .
o

r{, <r<*ffin t

No, it is not 4 o'clock .

It is very importantto distinguishbetweenthe verb ... irq." baiyo,
It is...o'clocknow andtheadve ... { ... bqie, at.. o'btocki
At whattimedo you go home?
mr+sq{qq6t q flctq{qF
I go at half past 5.
|
qftqrq*, q t
It's quarteWt 5 now, isn'tit?
Yes,'11go in ('after')
fr,rr+rfrffiurq t
15 miuutes.
Statingtimesat include minutespastor minutesto the hou (oer
thanhalf andquarterhours) involves the use of two different forms
{r and e
of the verb qE o rngj theseae the -era
-participle
Infinitive form .r plus the postposition-s{:

qts{{ frq fi{+t

q'qe-trdrqfr{ffid I

Twentyminutspast 5.
Twenty minutesto 5.

EXEBCISE44 Answer the following questionsabout the

clockfaces
below:
q+rqr+qsr
qS+ I qsfr{-, r
q-S+lqrfr{dr
q+ r qr s Eq{"- r +fr q-s* a.r
qS1. qEq6fr2ffisfr6r

E ZZ Wtrlctrcountrieshaveyouvisited?
hascometo sit Om Badur andhis sonDhanBadur,
SuryaPrksh
undthe conversationhastumedto the subjectof foreign favel. Dhan
he oncehadin I-ondon.
Bddur relatesanunfornateexperience

$mnr or f<vrrtqr gry\'o I

drq+{rc(q qRq qffi slqqiqr qfr ldqrfr9
qf mrvr '{t trcr-'r q rrrl{srq qr qffi fu( a<q W qfe+rcr
q qrm.r( rdq{c wgT(rfrE r
c ,t.raq t q rr+ rh r d a'r trq +qr<' d ari 3Tqqs{

qffiorr+

ffivqrqr rwrqrqk{rc+ A qf{

Tqt\'fr |
Smnr awffi aM$rg {r{+6 r
q rErc{Fr{qr s rqk q q qffi

ffi

q-6 {r+c w.

11<1 fir tqug-ffir (qrqr 3FTlFrdT

fr rqss rm
qrq {H -{rqr s{fi qs .cr q{r cf r{ r

qfwrn rcr
r a-6rg'q , q-{rar<.1,i mrrr$-trc fl sqr r+rs c !
ftrd t{r
tr d{r$ {s{ ( {{r lq{ ffi + {q {fqfd( fqffi
qfcsr erdrrfr < crfr q q ffi +{ e+qrq{,TE t
*e @"ncrr ur $-aqq\rfrq 3-dqrrffi scr{ r
Es
sqr { qfF3xr { iq{q qk ffi
ffiqr
r
rrs{ qr\r{q #srqF

qfn+nr *,+frrrr
u*qr{i s{r { qfirs*{r+rd qFzfiffi( Tr+ ffim
q+cP{qrcrW t
qf r+rw wewvflorr t
qrd qrg(rs{
traa6g *.cv< vr$ qcq qrtts ffi rssq-cfi{
rgfi {rq-S{ rq eqr{ ffi t
?
qfr+rw @+rs
fi-+<C<r+fq{
ua-qrg(fu{ rcrm 6<rt
q<rqtffi \'scr3qfi cr6fufl, fid ?
trr rErg<lfr vr
"cfr
ur a-6r< qw<rfui r

fqlnabroad
{rsffi conducor
Ta to xave|
q. ticket
cqi Burma
qT o a.rk for
+{ q|{ 1asyear
scr bag
rrqfr 1ast,prewous
<re yzllp1
Ts ,ftts (the nameof a mon)
iiq. to extact, take out
1v ,Europe
rIIrq to Itn away
fulfuei coursq process
q{q of goodLfiMt
hrjst
q414expenence
grkr secure
c incident
$cr'r, aoylce
thefamilia form of the son'sname *+
thing, item
#rT Story
ro be .los
Q{T3T
qTtime, occasion
sqfr useful
qc sea
ct lessoll
-+s{r besr'de
f{T o lean
Surya Prakash To which placeshaveyou travelled
abroad?
Orn Bahadur
I have havelled in India and in Burma too. What
aboutyou?
Surya Prakash Up until last year I had travelled
only as far as
Indi4 but lastpsI wentto EDgland.
Haveyou not
visitedEuoDe?
Om Bahadur
Europeis somewhere
I haven.tvisited.My eldest
sonDhanBadur got to Londontvo yearsagorn
the couseof his work. Apart from him, no_onein
our family hasvisited Europe.
Surya Prakash Did your son like London en?
Om Bahadur
He says.it's very pleasant.Just the other day he
lvas saying at after a little wbile he will go to
l,ondon a secondtime. He hasn,t forgotten the
enjoyable experiencesof London. But when he
stayed in London one unpleasant incident
apparendyalso occurred.
Surya Prakash What happened?
Orn Bahadur
Oh Dhane,comehereandtell Suryaprakashyour
story,\yon't you?
Dhan Bahadur Certainly, father. One day my
work had finished
arounddusk,Because
my lodgingswerefar from
the office andbecause
it wasnining, t boardeda
busandwenthomein that.BecauseI couldn,tfind

SuryaPrakash
DhanBahadur

an empty seat before the bus set off, I st down

beside another man. On the way, the man who was
sitting beside me got up and left, and a little wlile
later tle bus conductor came and asked me for the
money for the ticket.
Yes, and en what happened?
The man who was sitting beside me had taken the
rrallet out of my bag and run away, but I had not
loown at all.

Surya Prakash And what happenedafter that?

The conductorwas very good mn. He advised
Dhan Badur
me, saying that I should from now on keep my
moneyin secureplace.
Surya Prakash Apart from the money,no other thing was lost?
Dhan Bahadur No. Only e moneywas lost.
And, having lost money like this, you leamed a
Om Bahadur
usefullesson,didn't you?
Dhan Bahadur Yes,I did!

Grammar
79 The completed past tense
The - participle is usedwith the appropriateform of the veb Fr
(was, were)to describean ction that occurredin e past and does
not necessarilytell us anythingaboute present.The technicaname
for is tenseis the 'pluperfec(. Often, e senseis that the action or
or negatedby someotheraction
eventdescribedhasbeensuperseded
o event.This tenseca usually be tnslatedby using e English
word ad but in Nepali the tenseis usedwheneverthe speakerfeels
that thereis a ceain remotenessbetweene eventthat is described
andthe presenttime. The following examplesillustrat the conast
in meaningbetweenthe 'completedpresent' tensethat takesE nd
the 'completedpst' tensethat takesffi:
q E{ s++ 6 |
t haveetumedhome (and
thatis whereI an now).
q r{ sffi fqEl
I had etumedhome (but I
an not necessarilythere
any more).

qFfrfrt*O**a+1|
ssfrf*qrrfrE
|

sNf+.areqHr
affi*frareqF{
crfi ce r
crfr qfir r
arefrgto r
a-e+g+M r

His elder sisterhas not

married (sheis currently
unmarried).
His elder skter had not
maried (but thisis not to
say that shehasnot
mmried since).
My sonhasnot ead thisbook
(and still hasn't rcad it).
My nn hadnot readhis book
(buthe mighthaveteadit
byrcw).
It is nining (it hasbegun
to rain).
It wasnining (it hadbegun
to nin).

rcport her words verbatim to you mother: 'the vr'omansaid "I will
oometo visit your mothe tomorrow".'
Thc ntualplacefo a Nepali verb is at the endof a Nepali sentence,
snd so the Nepali for saidot askedor old usually comesfter the
wodsthat are being quoted.In addition, the word for sardor asled
or old is usually precededby the -g{ -era paiciple of the verb crT
to say, (i.e. rt<, but occasionallyrfr; *t"n servesthe Purposeof
markingthe endof e quotation.Speechmarksarenot usuallyused
when reported speechis witten down. The basic structure of a
that repots what someonehassaid is:
Bcntence
quotrd prson+ - - verbatim quote- rrk - said / told / asked,
tc.
t He askedme whatmy
sqffi rq r{ qtn*s
namewas.
ssftgnsrrt;arq

My headis huxing (my head

hasbegunto hut)
My head washurting (my
headhad begunto hurt).

EXERCISE45 Translareinro Nepali:

1 My father had neverbeenabroad.
2 In 1978I went ('had gone,) to Nepal for the fust time.
3 They (Middle) were sitting in the bus srarion(bas bisaun.r-)but
e bushadnot come.
4 It wasraining but Ramehad not broughthis umbrella.
5 His (Low) headwashurting but he had not tkenny medicine.
6 They (Middle) had come from Iln bur ey had not broughl
ny tea,

80 Reporting speech using rr{

In English, when one reportswhat someoneelse has said, e usual
construconis 's/hesaidthat' following which onesummarizeswhat
was said: 'she said that she was going out'. In Nepali, however,
speechis usually reportedby quoting the actuawords at a Derson
hasuttered:'shesaid"I amgoingout".' lf a womanhastold yu that
she will come to visit your mother tomorrow, in Nepali you would

q6r t He rxlercd thebry b ptt

hishaton-

ffi uS q qrSEa< ficr qrs{gq You fiend hassd thathe

q{ { o I
wiIl come but his mothe
will not.
If the personwhosewords are being quotedwas making an enqriry
of any kind, the quotationwill end with the interrogativewod fs' to
showat it was a question:
He askedme wheer I had
s{ qrE ffi qrF{{ Tq f{ {-{
beenout today.
cSIfr t
q{r{
eFd
My gide askedwhettrcr
.nwcrqrt
I wastircd.
t
fqrrfrq
EXERCIS46 Reportat the personin column A said e thing
in column B to the personor personsin column C:
I
2
3
4
5

ABC
my youngerbroer
that tall man
moer
the teacher
father

it won't rain today

are you English?
is your friend hungry?
closeyour books
don't go out tomorrow

said to faer
askedme
askedmy siste
told e children
advisedus

81 Eecause it is, because f was: the _rr+

participle with -
The -q+l +6 O*ciple is usedin combinationwith the word s.r<ur
(cause,eason) plus - (e subject-markingsufEx introduced
in
Grammar 59) to show that the action of a verb is the causeof
somethingelse:
@ rrfr-v
c--:i .
-1/lqll,i r

ffi'r q'sr

Because
it wasraining
yesterdayI bought
an umbrella.
areft qla rr<q' q ++ft q E r Because
I had a headache
I styedhome all day.
Th word FRoIis very often droppedfrom this construction,leaving
only e -6 participle plus - :
3rftTrqr qFfl'{fr E\r+
Tw;;r Becausehe hadno Nepali
|{ flrq t
friend.in Ameica. Krishna
felt lonely.
er ffi crgTqd {{f ffi
Because
he dnnk hotte; his
-.I |
bngue got bumedEXERCISE47 Combinethe pairs of sentencesto producea single
sentence,
alongtlte followingIines:
.Exarnple:r+r ffi

6 t.{ qrt-{ r= qnr ffi

r aqfiqnrur-trd

{+ qrt |

re+
avrcr
sr qrr r

{dfsr q._gfi reot<6 qa q|!{q 1

i {rfurrrtr-Er.q'a+qqd,i
r g{rrdq rs-s( fu& { I
k {+*q|{ffi6r
rere{qS:qcnr*|
82 Using the -u-participle as an adjective
In English, sentencescontaining construconssuch as .the man
who... ' or 'e housewhere..., are very comlnon,but in Nepali such
constructionsare rare. Insted,a phasesuchas .the man who came
yesterday' becomesin Nepali .the yesterday_cme
man' and .the
housewhereRam ves' becomes.the Rarn-vedhouse,:
atC- qF

he man who catne

yesteday

Literally:
yesterday-came
man

Ram-liYed house

the house where

Ram lives

rqqq<

kft Tfrr g{e e thingsyou said

frfrtwtlvrfrte

min nt fe lastyea

-qr theme we wentto bed

Erf-{{lr
\r+ {{K

by-you-saidings
last-yea-fallenrain
we-slepttime
goneMonday

lastMonday

ln thesephrases,the -9fr participlebehaveslike an adjective,andits

.o cnding must changeaccordingto the number and genderof e
nounsit describes:
the man who cameyesEdaY
Frflcfrffi-fi.
onl
5t
thegful who cameyesterday
tq | rqcr
the boys who cameyestrday
fuu+t+raqs
ffiffiffi9ffiQr
aqrqilfr.fuqdqro
c-'{r q&5
qSfl r

qirr fdrF{{s

Wich is theletterthat
Devkota wote?
I me dayI metyou seems
ke just the othe day.
Educa@dpeopledo not ead
book ke this.

83 Ordinal numbers
Theordinal numbers(frrst, second,ft4 etc.) funconasadjectives,
just as they do in English. With five exceptions,they are all formed
by addinge suffix - to e numberin question.Thus:'
r
q
qR
fourth
four
fifth
c
c'q
five

frs
frq

20
33

ffi
ft{

2oth
33rd

The following numbershavespecialforms:

sd
sE
-{

one

---c--5
YQ't I

frst

tw o
,

ql ql
:-__5,

second
third
sixth
ninth

urree
.

slx
mne

qrd
q rqrcrsrftr<m+
qm-Tqqr t

(|t,l
l--$

t9cI
q l

Thisis His Majesty's eighth

tou of Nepal.

qfl.+^cH f{iaT
q rntrr qt{ Or the frl]jt day of Asarthere
rr\rdfi I
hadben a \andsdein
our ullage.
r@, frsa can also be used as an adverb to mean before or
previously, by chatging its endingfrom -o to
-:
cF{r ccm 3rrgnrq ?
you
Have
visitedNepal
Tr
{rEI, q {if frrCEq t|d |
previously as well?
No, this is the frrct time
for me.
Whenit is addedto ceain largenumbers,the suffix - modifiestheir
meamngsin a ratherdifferent way:
{|ir
{ER
418

hundred
ousard
hundred thousand

{.'712 En mion

i+r< gcrrlrecr@-.{'r
fiq,{-qF qFfr lrFF
qf{ FIg I

EXERCISE.A

hundredsof
thousandsof
{qR
qrc
hundredsof
thousands
of('lakhs of)
s.d
tensof milons
of ('crorcsof )
Hundreds
of thousands
ot
peopte dedin the Second
World War. mee were
thousandsof Nepai
citizensamongthem too.
( |q I

Trnslateinto NeDali:

I The guestswho cameyesterdayareall English.

2 It's raining outside.Take at umbella you (Middle) bought in
the bazaarlast week.

3 The month whenyou (Middle) arived in Nepal is Baiskh.

This is thetenthme thatI havevisitedNeoal.
The housethatyou (High,plural) stayedin is veryold.
o Last Friday I had not receivedthe letter you (High) vote.
7 He (Low) is not the man who camefrom India.
8 This is not e presentyou (Middle) gaveto mother.

lq/
{
4

l
I

CL

o
q)

n
g)
-

br

tr
I
I
I

In this unit you will lean

. how to say ho.vlong ago
somthinghappened
. how to talk about seeingor
headngactions peormsd by
othrs
. how to discuss intentions
and the maningsof words
. how to use dates

23 An exchangeof letters
This text is adaptedfrom a passagein TW Clark,s Intoduconto
Nepal, fiIst pubshedin 1963.

+.racre
1"8k /t /l

qfrarq
Rfu q q'rq|fi lqpq r.fiqr i qfuq fe{ frrd rffi{
r-Tq{rq qr< qll s-+r
qfl rqd1ei r6d rq6 r
-fd'rr
crqq
+tr
\rcr
ffi s'- {r\'+ rr qnqrr rq
qfur*ra
qF+r
frr{
sq
iT
W.6-diq
i{RI +lesq g rr@r
\rsr rrt sfi{+ ffi |
{rqF14{r++fz fi ,rqr+, Vffi {qrq-+{r ftii t
q qtffir rqaq s-+r t+q+rno.+
;ffiil gr+qr
'{ffid cfl
T. # rq ffl
W qr.nrr s qri A +' r+ r
{F+qErE'ftrt Tffi qlrrqr rfulagrffi
{q-+{+{ dird
tqt q-{rs 5i m qE {qr+qq qir fqr r
dcr{+ re ncr+ rr r qs
r dcrl < dcr+rr
@*i
rqcrqr {v{rq+r r
-
tcfffifud,+'{K

-T$'

R! SiRJ lct

frq fq-{frqrt
dfr{ 6.r6n+qrcc6\r+ fu qrqrGrfrdrr trrqEqB{rfu

a' 6r+fet 3r r g rrq +tui r

T TrT
Tg qm
T+qrs
qld
rd{ r|'{tcr-"S
es I

frfr + qd+ qfuc is {sr qriqfi M r rqcr

eerctqnfiffi +r( rs-{+i-rctqr rT!-sffr
rr+ qrrq

qrq lffiqrq{qra

q-{

15r;rr616a lqaqr{rHgrl

ci{ q {{r q rrt {-s frfr il{ ++r qro aqr;,

{ffi qi{r q } r3fiffi;{qr{
s-q:il' frdr ErsdT
{r.{ qrsfirfl |
3rqrtr T{qR T{r$ rffi +ffiqr
q a6nirr eTqrqr.6 I
'
*{+ qdq cr+ ct{ sd qr r{fra,irrq.qrsc,

ffiffi,<rg

snto ene
ffi o undersand
+qq,loved
ones
q love
qmrr+rgood sases.)
frFebruary
csf{ osend
E s eply
snfuroam
q( e(s)
q fo unr'fe
qr6tforgiveness
qtoflow
qrFa merer of a casteof itinemnt qq account descripon
T{c{rs1 o .Lke
village singersor minstrels
@ to btow (a peson)
I-qfiq chilood
{ I rnk
time,0m
qqrfogiveness
n<fi frddle, Nepali vion
rrc1o flng
<{cF{.to get to se sorneone
(ultra-polite)
<etrs{toplay music
TTtrMEMOTY
ffiitl
{w clolera
eG 1nosr
ei to dle
lrq dear
lqz friend
.\ near to
ewgn sand upright
t'( a game played with pebbles
q'e< schoobnaste
qq face

Kothmondu,2045/9/9
DeorriendRoiu,
trom tomorrowI will notgo to school.Todoywosmy losldoy ot
school.I stoodneorthegoteondwotchedboysyounggrthonme
ployingwithpebbles.Whotunl A mqsiersowmaqndoskedme
why I hodn'tgone home,it wos lote. I turnedmy oce owoy
aorswereflowingfrommy eyes.
becouse
SlowlyI reochedthe gote. A Gqine wos stondingoutsidethe
gote.In my childhoodI hqd heordhim singingond ployingthe
iddlemonytimes.I puto littlemoneyin hishondqnd oskedhim
why he hodn'tbeento theschoolfor so monydoys.He sqidthqt
he hqd beenill, thothe hod coughtcholeroond neorlydied.
Fqlhersowmeenterthe house.He oskedmewhy lwos so lqte.
I did notonswerhim,buttotherseemedto understqnd.
ls beeno long time sinceI receivedq letterrom you. Now
pleosewritesoon.love ond goodwishesto you ond yourloved
ones.
Yourriend,Kumor.

Dorieeling,25 Februory 1989

fficrqflr'+6Fdft-{T

How mmy days hasit been

sinceyou cameto Nepl?

Deor riend Kumor,

I wos hoppy when I receivedthe leiteryou sentrom Kqihmondu.
Since lqst month I hove been intendingto write but I didn,t write
becouseevery doy some iob or olher come my woy. Forgiveme
ror orng so tqte.
he descriptionyou wote o your lost doy ot school wos very
touching.lreqd il out lo on editor friend. His nome is Kumo'r
Bhqndori. He liked it very much. He soys you should write o
slightly longer occountond send it to him. He soys you should
wrilewhoeveryou like.lthink KumorBhondoriis someonevour
brother knows, is thot not so? But he soys he hosn,t met our
brotheror mony months.He hos moved here rom Sikkim.
Pleoseconvey my greetingsto your moiher.I osk her orgiveness
tor not hqving wrillen o letter.ll is mony yeors sinceI hove seen
her, I connot rememberhow mony yeors il is.
Yourwell-wisher,Roiu.

Grammar
84 Using the -\-dpaniciple as a verb
The -g+p6i"in1";s usedon its own, without any auxiliary verb, to
form n abbreviatedcompleted present tense. In this cse, the
negativeis formedby addingthe prefix -:

s6qrr
@qn't
fafi-esqfq ft ftTrq r

,1fufraa-+rq+ryr
I
+rrdftfr?
qfr5rqfifr I

When did he come?

He came yesterday.
Why dn't you come before?
Well, who knows why we
didn't come si!
llhat have you done?
Iust my own wok

6 How long is it since...?

The -* pafticiple is usedto expresse idea of tirne having elapsed
sincesomethinghppened.For example,if you wish to asksomeone
how long they havebeenin Nepal you can phrasethe question,you
Nepal comehow much time happened,:

Thc word F<<day(s) is optional here. It can be left out, or have

ttroer word for a period of time (e.g.qr week q+r mon, or +i
yda)subsnrtedfor it. A personwho has,ot sited Neplfor a long
lime might be askedthe queson
fcffcrqT,rs*6Fda{rr

How many yes is it that

you have notgoneto Nepal?
(i.e. sinceyou last wentto
Nepal?)

qTq{qr+ EqfrTr r |
@fufq{rqr+6

It's two monthssircI alrr]F,a|

It's beena |ong time since

I watcheda Hin fihn.

8 Seeing or hearing another penson'sactions

The -d paticiple is usedto describewhat sorneoneis doing when
mother peson seesor hearsthem. The sentenceson the left-hand
:lde below say t someonesaw or heard someoneelse. The
rcntenceson e right amplifu them by noting what e personwho
lr seenor heardwasdoing at the time.
In such sentences,the - participle translatesas gong, singing,
playing,speaking*c. andin the word orderit mustfollow the pe$on
who is being seenor heard. If the person who is seen-or heard is
prforminga transitiveverb, then s/hemusttake the suffix -d
3TFqrr tf,qrqrs qq I
I sow you tvvo d.qysago.

qkqftrffiqq.rdr

$rT{rga"t |

e-{r iftd rr\r+ {q

Father heqrd mz.

Fathzr heard rne singing

a song.

qrqre-qr{-d\rfr r

ryr-a-<r{rr,+

Mother watchedthe children.

Mother watchedthe chillren

pbying pebbles.

I saw you going to school

two dnys ago.

rcI t

IXERCISE 49 Translateinto Nep:

I She(Middle) sawhim (Low) playing cadsyesterday.

2
3
4
5
6

I heardher (Middle) singing that songlast mon.

He (Low) sawhim (High) coming homethreedaysago.
I sawyou (Middle) smokinga cigarettelast Wednesday.
He (High) heardher (Middle) speakingHindi last week.
They ffiddle) saw you (lr,iddle)going ro schoolthe day before
yesterday.

87 The - participle with or *q

The - padgipls is also used in combination with the appropriate
form of the verb { to form a completed present tense whicb
idenfies and emphasizese subject of e verb (is is less common
than e combinations with n and r):

c-fr+rq v{qa r
sftfr*l,fu.r5a

That job is one he d.

She is my girlfriend, we are
not maried.

The -g+] OrO" Ot" is also usedwith fr or Stt to form a comDleted

presenttensewhichemphasizes
the factthatsomeinsis or is not e
truth:

rrqr6rffifir
fi-Esqk< q\rfrrfi

It is not fish thatI bought.

It is not true thatthey went to
the temple..

88 Thoughts and intentions using :+{and rr

The primary meaning of the verb q.{ is o say or o 1e11,
but it lso
has the important secondary meaning of to thinklto remember. you
might find it helptul to think of the -qr participle of .{, (i.e., r+{)
as meaning saying to oneselfin the following sentences:
q l-tqr qr1q qf E rr{ q
Renembedng (,nyng
E!(kT{ qFr |
0,r myself) that guests
.,)
were comng to my home
in the evening, I headed
for the market.

Q-+raqq arero rr< e4-q<qrqtr, They setout carJringrice,

<rd,T{{qrfr+{=&I

dL,saltandte\ remenlaring
('saying (to themselves)'
)
thatKhunbu is far from lid.

qgrqrffi sft s fr tT{ ss

fir* t

wondering('saying(o
himsel)')if therewasany
millet left in the
pot, he looked inside.

ltc -* participle of {r followed by ( or {r, (i.e. rrfr 4. . or v

t(,,. ) means I intended to but...lt follows a statementof what the
tpaker intended to do:

{rqfu{|{{qRqFqr{d
r qrrrq{ r

Fr&cqvffiaefrrrfrt

This moming I thoughtI'd

go to themaket, but I
didn't evenhaveanymoneyI thoughtI'd write a |ette,
but therewasa power cut.

@ What does this word mean?

Another use of the - participle of 1.1 is to state or ask e
mcaningof a word.
{+ t dfrqr what is the meaaingof the
fitrqr'frdrs'
wod 'fuaw' in angsh7In
'f+-crq' t{ book |
Englsh fqf,Ia' rEarrs'fu)k'.
what is themeaningof the
ffiqI
'book' T+ t ffiqr
word 'book' in Nepali?In
'66st' r{d =rdwS t
NqalL'tunk'ncas'aw'.
A secondw^ayof askingthe meaningof a word involves the use of
the word rr, meanr'ng:
Themeaningof himlayais
Mqf'frq<t'homeof snow'.
q{ lgw{ Themezningof
gKdr(T+ 3igR_r,EFfr
'pusbklaya is home of
t+ +-flqd t
b<nks'.pustakmearc'bak'.
EXERCISE50 Fill in the gapsin the following sentences:
q rldlmger_{r

dfr{rffi+_
Al
r dfrqrqr{ffiI
r qrfr{r letterT |
r ffiqr
1 ffiqr

lacg:{ffi rn6rthrr-

3'I{rfr1

90 The Nepali year

In Nepal,most peopleusethe traditional Bitram calendar,the fr*;q
q"l.insteadof lhe Westemor
Gregoriancalendar,The Bikramvear
beginson the first day of the springmonth of *Fnq, which a[s
sometimearound rhe middle of April (on April 19 in l99g). The
mons are solar raer than lunar, so the correspondence
between
Westemad Bikram datesis sghtly different from year to year.
The Bikam calendrical era runs 56 years ead of the Westem
clendarfrom January-1 to the first day of {ro, and J7 yffin 2hsad
from the first day of i{rg p11ilDecember31.Thus,Januarvl99g
beginsin themiddleof e monrhof rr{randendsin e middlof the
following rnonthofqTCin the Bikram year of 2054,while September
l998teginsin e middleof e monthof rreandendsin themiddle
of 3r+E in rheBikramyearof 2055.
Bikram Sambatdatesmay be expressedin full:
r.rr slq srfufr 11T qrf{r(
Friday, the22ndday of Kttik,
lear 2054 (= 7 November.
1997)
or in an abbreviatedform:
'ks q{r< l q
31st day of As, 2054
(= 15 luly, 97)
The word G meansday of the solar month.Thus, if you want to
know thedatein e Bikramyearit is comrnonto ask
qqT'{G?
What's the date today?
qM\r4s'rgq rr |
It's the 21st today.

'l'hcword{r-T is u_sed
to referto paicular years.instead theoer
^of
ya,
which
is used for periods of time tfrc s' ree
lbr
word
^E,
qr onehundrcd years)-Nepali-speakersoften omit e
Jann, q{ {rq
rwo
fousandwhen mentioning a particular year, just as
$ trcn
might tlk aboutwht happenedin '97, rathertha
speers
Bnglish
in *tr vn
So,
instead
of salng at someinghappened
'1097'.
f he yea 2007,hey will often simply refe to that year astl qr(T
lhycar sevenmr{ gl vrmr r@ rr+ rre
qT-{I t
qqR{qfu,qttefrwffrqrE

Thc monthsof the Hindu year haveclassicalSanskit nameswhich

lkc slightly different colloquial forms in eachof the lnguagesof
South Asia. The classical names ae used on formal or official
documents,the colloquial namesin everydayspeechand also often
In writing.
IXERCISE 51 Translatee following datesinto Nepali:
Tho months o the Npali year
I

.fu+rfrcqrr bomin 1g3. In which

month?On the 23rd of the

month of lune.

Classical nane

Colloouial name

tt*

1**
q

mid-May to mid-Iune

gTqr6
fi4qr
Tt
3nfi

rf +if .

nto-Jtne

qTirt
r{
qqq
6rttrfr
rflgT{
f{
qTC

mid-Iuly to mid-Augu't
mid-August to mid-SePtembe
mid-Septemberto mid-Octobe
mid-Octobeto mid-Novembe
mid-Novembetomtd-Decembe
mid-Decemberto mid-Iaruary
mid-Ianuary to mid-Febntary

+l

mid-Mach to mid-ADtil

v{iq

6rffid

The Bikam Smbatis usedlesscommonly amongNepali_speakers

outsideNepal itself. In Nepli-speakingcommunitie. in North_"^t
India and Bhutan,the Westemcalendaris more generallyused,and
in this casethe word rr is replacedby e word<rfrq, dai of a montlt
in the Westemcalendar:
f{u qr tr l&fr+ q;q r 1.F My youngestdaughterwas

rfurrrr r w rr@

In which year d you tust

come to Nepal?
I I camefouryears ago,in the
yea ) t.

qTfrf
qTI{
q|i
r6fdttrI

t
t

r
I
2
3
4

Thursdayl0 January1921.
Tuesday10thChaitra2016.
Sunday26thNovember1956.
Friday lst Phalgun2042.

mid-Aprilto nid-May
to lwa-Juy

EXERCISE
52
rgry5qI
$q+ ffE wcrc.rq+ g +i tr r ,r vrq ErqqFr q{{
gW
scr {r tr{r gr rg 6wr + ga <r H
cfr qrs-1"{tr<rs fEfl qr
'-t es rcr{sr {Trr B-{r
.{q 6rrq .rer qhq o1 r+ q.ilr afq ilfi-{f,.drc r-i"
flil vfagdrq saqqrc-<tTq rartrret+f
furr
qr q-++ql{rqR nfr <qfr fuc IgW
ffir-{r
SizT
+rQr rvecr ear sq{r cr* qrt{ r'r( r+rt firtr

<rtr-{sfu* 1rq-qfum grr#"ra t<s+.mrr-{

\.orr

vtfuM
rvc q +mrn o a<qrfi qrqrfr g-s
rq- ftmewdr a t3rrcrr< (Tg.E.+fr tficfo ilr +rT
.ilcr{rqs +lrl q
11r6ufr refud <qffi r.o+ "
' srr{i'E{ r il[ +nft+qrrq-ffi F{rTr-fuci
+ . qnfmr
qvrffi rilffi
c ftfr 1 wrrnrgo, gf*q r r
ffi{

I
ts Erqqcn {+ +fr sf rrr
g<+ <rw vrrn-*ra q-are-_qr
r
<rv+lffrrr {H fsi{ERcr(trsr 6a ?
gH mrfrrftarc+rqvq+ fir r
gW{fu{cTE4.rqrf6 ?
t wr+rgrftrf+tRvqrrr

II

rf
$
{
$, t"+
IT

F,qt
.

a
I
I
t

In this unt you will learn

. how to construct condional
smences
. how to exoess doubt
. how to maks suggstions
. how to discuss whethr
somethingis enough

CIZ+ Out trekking

fqqqrqr

e-sSfuEgof+r

Subhasis leadinga group of foreign visitors on a trek from pokhara

to Jomsom.They havejust arrived at a lodge after a long wet first
day. As they eat their evening meI, servedby Oitmay-a,Subhas
discussesthe route for the next dy with Bekh Bi,radur. the
lodgekeeper.

sTrs

rrnqffiqr

qqrcr
grrre
fs-{flcr
gTr{
{cfqr

6q, acdc sa-d{ tqffiErqofd t

srrdg't
<rcasm rflfi-{s-qr
gQ-cr rr@e ecfrrrrasqt
aracfrsq1,fit
$,s'@+kawvror
$Tr{
q a-rgiqfr ffi{ ilvrfr w< u6g6.o,frt't
q-dfl rqsrrtqtr
$Trs
qq qQrs. q-{rcrc
lvrfr Er qfi 1 q;q6 qi ar s ta<rd
lrrfu dr E.s rec-+qrqr qgrcrfrfl er
qffi
qr<s q er S r*fr vrft q-* rr cr{S'
il{rEr{A\,ctdvffi$er t
{TTq
eqr{rrmdrfifuc{r tcrfi-{rc{rfrftr fu;6
r c6<6e, qft t
rfgrq f fq.ft{F-+
dqsEs{ d o fr m q* rrfr r -drqr-{raA cf{ Fiqtqrs
qwrffir (.{{drawgfl6, flt t *frsrftc
STr{

{crsr <vrfuswrlar +<vmerg$q { a rft wrcfro f+ rrr r

sTrs qfr qraccrsn+<g. frcr ra-srf o t* r
{qrqr

g,nv@r<r+s3io r

e*Uermfr arrtqt fdrfu{ qr. r

sTrs qrsfr g{ sk ffic<
w rffiq116"

qq--q{

s-{r *fu
qvqqmlr r rfi-{FqirFd(
d-ffi EEfifcr rr<+rw
qTfrc-q'T qfu ,rdr -drrqr ffi
Td F{ cfr
Fo,
Rr fd<rt QC{il-d.rfr qqraqqfr{ dr tRR{rq
dl-dM SFrsTrfr-+-qf+rv+ e r
arcrfiTqr ilq {+ \'sarqf rngo rqrqrffi r
v6 <reaqSq a rrn5*qrqe frf ra<erctqrearffi
qrfEft-{wi, {r qFi r+r qfr s tilcri{F.{ {R
q {r rqRvqmr,rnasr r

d, ftrgfrqracrrfrvfrv I

TqrdMqff{r
q6, sFqr<1u-*q(icrtfr

qr< cookedrice,food, meal

!X(l) to be enough
rrr<per4ps
i eeps
quefr the Gandakiriver
g< bridge
uf to tlescenil
ffiq
Jonsom (a village)
cq ryeaer
ssr clea
rrcr Tatopari(a village)
!A(2) to rcach,arrive

t{ctfr<r

qrq{n-ta stay fo a night

-q<ta below,lowe tlown than
bes4befer
ca ta add, suwlement toP up
{ft-d fo be fru1sed
ffi
Gorepani(a village)
qrq6 Ganung (a llage)
c next, firther
dTI to divide, frtcat
uaqfqR.Dhaulagiri (a mountain)
a{ desire
fr? isn't thatso?
eqrwe ryrllmeer(probable
futrc tense:seeGrammar 9)

Dilmaya

Pleasesit over hereandeat.Will this muchrice be

enougho not?
Subhas
This muchrice might not be enoughfor me, sister.
Is thereany more?
Dilmaya
If it's not enoughit doesn't mater.Thee's heaDs
moe.
Bekh Bahadur 'Whereare you headingtomorow, eh?
Subhas
We'e going down to the Gandakibridge anden
towardsJomsom.The path is downhill, isn't it? ff
the weaer is clear tomorrow we,ll probablv
reach Tatopani around dusk. But if it aiso rains
tomorow like it did today it will be rather
difficull The path will be slippery, and walking
slowly we probablylvon't reachTatopaniby dusk.
If we don't rech Tatopani by dusk, where shall
we lodge for the night?
Bekh Bahadur Below Tatopani there is anothersma[ llase. ff
you are slow on the way stay therc.I've forg-otten
the nane of the village, though. But from therc
Tatopaniis higher up, the path is rathersteeptoo.
If you stay there that will be better. Oh Dilmava
where'se rice?
Dilmaya
Will you havesomethingmore? '
Subhss
A te more rice, please.
Dilrnaya
Thereyou are. Shall I put vegetblestoo?
Subhrs
Sue,pleaseput vegetablestoo. Is therea tttle bit
of dl too?
Dilnaya
I'm afraid the dl's finished. Have your friends
had enoughrice?
Subhas
I expectthey've had enough.Foreignesdon,t et
such lot of rice.
Dilrnaya
They don't eat with eir handseier, do thev?
Sbhas
Yes,it's a bit difficult for em.
Bekh Bahadur Tomorrow you're going via Ghorcpani, aren't
you?
Subhas
There'sno other way. How elsecan we go?
Bekh Badur
From herc, the path to Ghoepniand the path to
Ghandrungarc one and the same-But from the
next village the path dides. The lower path is e
pathgoing to Ghorepani,the higheroneis thepath

Subhas

Bekh Bahadur

Subhas

going to Ghandrung.If it ains hevily tomorrov,/,

go by the Ghandrungpath, it will be a bit easier.
You probablycan't seeDhaulagiri ftom at path.
I gatherthat you cn get a good view of it from
Ghorepani.How they long to seethe Himalayas,
right?
That's true, but when it rains heavily nothing can
be seenftom anywhere.Next week you will come
back by lhat path, won't you? Only go to
Ghoreoaniif it doesn'train tomorow.
Right then,thank you. Now it's time for bed.OK?
We'll meettomorlow.

Grammar
91 Real conditional sentences
A real conditionalsentenceis the equiYalentof a sentencein English
at begins with r and talks about events t might happen o
situationsthat might exist in the futue. It is calleda 'real' conditional
sentencebecauseit alwaysrefers to what will be or what might be,
andthereforewhat it describesis possble i it doesn'train I will go
ou. There is anotherkind of conditional sentencetlat talks about
what might have been,but was not, and is erefore impossibleor
unreal:if it hadn't rainedI wouldn't havegoneout This secondkind
of conditionalsentenceis introducedin Grammar 130.
To form a realcondionalsentencein Nepali, you taketwo sentences
andlink themtogetherwi the word q. { is a participleof the verb
A to say that is not easily translatedwhen it is usedin this way,
becauseit simply marksthe endofthe 'if clauseof tle sentence.The
closestEnglish parallel is found in an informal expressionsuch as
say/ supposeit doesn'train...'he 'ifl clauseof the sentenceusually
comes before the main clause. When it is referring to some
tense.The
possibilityin the future, its verb mustbe ln the simple^Past
'ifl clauseof a conditionalsentencecanbegin with a< lf, andin fact
it often does, but c if is not essential.rT is essentialin such
sentenceswhether{ is usedor not.
To constucta Nepali sentencethat meansif it doesn'ttain I will go
out,begin with the simplepasttenseof lo rar'nasthe 'if clause,then

add q to show at the 'if clause has ended, and then state that you
will go out:

cqft)qrfr{
(I) it dn't min
(condition)

lrtr instance,shopkeeperA is skedwhetherthereis any rice in his

rhop,andhe is suret thereisn't, so he answe$ categorically:
Any ice, shopkeeper?
Q qr{fi, qr+q o t
No.l
A tt

q"l
q flrtr EF6 |
(maks end of ifl clarrse1 I wiV go oit.
(consequence)

= qr.ft q { q qrf{< Ef r
q ftrfr qr\ri { q \r qFqt

Dut shopkeeperB is lesscertain; he thinks thereprobablyisn't any,

but feelshe hadbenercheck:
Any rice, shopkeeper?
Q wqfr.arwo t
Pobably not...
B dhr I

I it doesn'tnin I will go ouIf you.don't comeI will

ak *r+rlg'r .r cfr{Fa-{r ,fl,l-**

oo- ,*r-

the dl it won't tastegood.

The second half of a real conditional sentencecan also take the form
of a request or command, instead of a prediction:
cdcrffi
_1c':Ar{I

wr{rrq*arqr

rrfr ewcw-qr
16A. {q ?

It probably won't ain today.

{E|{qrq|-gcrifi{r

futow,hepobablyis athofiE.
Youpmbably won't get any
meatht themarket.

qrqfiffr{r q o ?qrt, vto {cr rls clnstr athome?I don't

ak<rcngdfrrrruq,++a 'j"T.j;ut anychitriin

fi |

{rE qffrc{r I

The probablefuture tenseis intoducedin full in Grammar 96.

fyou feet tired, pteaselie

down in mv roam.

09 The - -ne participle as an adiective

lraqa w nc+ m If garc is ot availabtein

the market, just buy gingen
do you understand?

This participleis simply the diconaryform of a verb th its ending

from -1-nu to - -ne:
changed
dictionaryform
-ne participle
qr
ql1
going (adjective)
(verb)
go
o
[{r
(Yerb)
earing(adjecve)
o eat
r
rFT
(verb)
doing(adjectle)
ro do

EXERCISE53 Translateinro NeDali:

I If you are tired, pleserest.
2 If you are thirsty, pleasedrink this water.
3 Ifou guestsae hungry I will go to the marketand buy fruit and
vegetables.
4 If you (Middle) do not cometomorrow,motherwi stay at home
andcry.
5 IfI do not cometo the office by 5 o,clock, pleasemeetme at the
temple.
6 If faer doesnot sendme a lefier this week I will phonehim
at home.

Thelust useof e - -ne participleis to describenouns:

e mad n Pollnn ('Pokhangoingn')
frq{rqr
thingsto eat ('eang things')
q|gAqr
next week ('coming week')
bedroom('sleeng oom' )
rlf;b
rFT
a working man
rrr
a Nepali-speakingpercon
ffiffi{rfu(
It is importnt to distinguishbetweenthe - participle and e -g
participle, becauseboth are used to describenouns.However, e
-fr participle always refers to actions or situationsthat are in the
pastas compaedth the main verb of the sentence,while e -
paiciple refers to situationsat are either coterminousor in the
futurc ascomDaredwith e main verb:

92 Using {r to mean pertraps, might be

frw is the proahIefirnrre tenseof e verb fl to be, and meansi
@robably) will be. lt can be added to th- end of sttements,
regardlessof their tense, to qualii' em and make them less
ctegorical.

rG

Arfrcr<{ +qrqrr
qrfr crq {ficr r

Wen we lived in Nepal

Wen we live in NepaJ.

g.11qrq1ffi
qF 1
qtrtqPr 6 qr; I

A person who hasclimbed Everest.

A person who does/wiLl
climb Everest-

q-{{ fufr qr |
aq-{ qF

The person who gave the lectue.

The person who gives iecal,,],s/
will give a lectue.

The negative is formed simply by adding the prefix _ to the verb:

iclr
fdffi
.{fr{qqFMffr.fi
@ftrfiz
3ifri--{dMdnfrqrfd-{
trr.ft.irir
crcqr cr "F{rs-drrrg
sRr{ qr;6 |
qr6i{t{q qrsr|{qrrr

unavailable
nor eanng
unfogettable
Wy have you givenraksi to a
person who does not drink?
Why do you tell off a boy
who does not undestand
Engsh in Engsh7
Frui* that are not avlabhe
in Nepal can be found
eveywhere in Ameica.
r Because it is clottd.y today
there's no chance of seeing
Everest,

94 Using the-participle to talk about uture

actions
The seconduse of e - participle is as a kind of grammatical
shortcutto talk about plns and intentions for the near future. It is
used frequently in informal conversation,nd people who speak
Nepali as a secondlanguage(both Nepalis and foreignen) findit so
convenientOecausethe verb endingis the sameno matter who e
subjectof the verb is) that they sometimesuseit excessivelv:

awtErfrwr
frrr,frPq6,o:"r;,
<c{rqdsfrqr r

Ae you leaving tomonow?

No, we'rc staying tomoow
and leaving the day after
tomomv
Will you dink tea o coffee?

q lrtrn qr |
l'{qrqrffi<nt
k r<rd, gmrn t
q{ Er, { ?
r, qi(rr,ffiqfr{cfuq t

I'11drink tea.
Shall I put sugain the Ea?
Don't put sugaLjust Put milk.
We'reoff now, aen't we?
Yes, it's late, we'll leavein a
tle while now-

'l'hcrc usagesare acceptable,but it is more polite to usetle variable

vrbendings,especiallywhentaling to someoneyou ae addessing
$ r.

06 Tlre verb $T to anive, sufficc

Thie verb has two different uses.In the first, it is usedto mean fo
nacManiveat a destination,andin this contextit is intransitive(that
h, thesubjectneverneedsto take-):
This flight eachesDelhi at
fr t{crc s -{ { ffi gre t
half past 3.
Although it is an intransiveverb, $! also hs a passive 'i-stem'
vorsion,which is gfiq b be eached:
My village is quite a long
'nas tsffq cfr
way away. WeWbablY
t
SFtfl
won't reachit even
by nighfall
Whenthe subjectof e verb o arrive is coming towadsthesperker,
ratherthangoing awayfrom him/lrcr, thenthecompoundveb 3{g{
(consistingof the 'i-stem' of qfu1 + gq) is comrnonlyused:
i, ir <, <rrrtrffi

frw

wn

"v.

There,look, rc Varanasi
flight has arived.

The seconduse of 5{ is to mean to sufficelbeenough,and in these

contextsthe verb is transive (i.e. its subjectmust take -Tin past
tcnses,andwill most often tke - in e habitualpresenttensetoo).
The peson for whom the commodity mentioled suffices or has
nufficd musttakethe object-markingsuffix -e. For instance,if you
wish to say at five rupees will be enough money for you, tlte
will be constructedasfollows:
Nentence
qis{Frq
q-drq
$6
suffices.
+
-
five
rupees
for me

EXERCISE&f Write Nepali sentencesstatingthat the amountsor

commoditiesin the right-handcotulnn were or were not enou for
thepeoplein the left-handcolumn;
I the touristswho cameyesterday
2 e Sherpawho helpedus
3 the womanwho cookedthe food

food
/
ten rupees
X
a kilo ofghee X

EXEFCISE 55 Write Nepali sentencesstatingat the amountsor

commoditiesin the right-hndcolumnmight or might not be enough
for the peoplein the left-handcolumn:
I the touristswho are coming tomorrow
2 the Sherpawho is going to help us
3 e womanwho cooksthe food

food
X
ten rupees
/
a kilof ehee /

q
q,

l
{
/.H
rl

q
sl
J
3l
-

I
I

GI

o
o
x
=

1+

o
q)
-

In this unit you will lean

. how to use the pobable
utule tense
. how to talk abouthow much
time and/or moneyit takes to
do somthing

CIZS Goinghomefor Dasain

Saroj and Krishna both live and work in London, but as
the great
annual
of Dasainapproachesthey begin to wonder whther
-festival
they might
go hometo Nepal to celebrateit.
vq dcreffir<qrrq<qrgs
\
?
T".

sq
Twr
rq
T*
cv
TE"r
T""T
{q

TtT
Ft-q

T5"r
{q

{vcq rsq qr rcc6 f r

{rcrt* rrvrlrr ra-<vr

w{et, q.SvFr+r6ofr r
+ qqr+ @ avncr fr rc eqsr {r r qrrqcq
s - q q r sl rq mrmw rg rr+frvr cr c,'
wqv rr lt< c+ rrsreqrr6,{. ?
eeq-{rq-drc
qts
{ Eqr.fi rqfr {-+rqErqre
qnrrrrr Tqfr ffit
d,
qE d ?qt'sntrra
qq+r
Es
e +.raqrdEr.6e r
qF6q
16a
@ $e ec6ss
+trqrqfqgr<+fun gqwrmrqrr
3ii{frqrqE-fr<nqwr+gflwr
2fr ft-qrqr
fE{r
'r rq+rtu-6rr*reqrt Er q-dscrq6 r
<ffi qrqrdcr Trqr+ + {n1 e r
S{-r( 3nqrW6.E r +ror < vrqr flEq cfr ;q | {
a<nqsvfr +r<eq rv,r-cr++
Tsrr Tr rt gipr i
qfrfrr
fr-{ sf qfu r fc-{Tr r+@vr* s-fr6 vrq rrn ffi
ilfT crdql'fr@ rqrqcqrsfr{ r
qrfiTrr-qrQqr+?
rrfrdr6rm-<*r$rorqqcrfr rs qrfu{.drrr q

r a r vrr
@ fr\'{ qnqEqq qd qlgqrr i 16r fr q1q

*
{E

ins St 6{ r+qffi qfr vfu

fer vcer{ r
3r.d{r+rfrqst fu<fr rd gs r rrn rqil ft r
qr
,r -qT.d dcr{ t-r g-<n<eqr*
s <t rc.nqrr
ni;a rq6 o1=qr*

s-{ qfl qdq{

fir{

r eq-qrqr

Om{qrrTcftrq{ffflr rvfr qrfr qr, n ffi

E TTfl !

rd

< (the festival o0 Dasain

ftrqq,r{ to decide
gw marn
cr3's pound
Efr as muc as
a6fiqr s6.l9as1
uA<@ excqt fir / ryt frrngoing
3rTrqmeAns
r+n relaive
qiT{tc God

Saroj
Krishn
Saroj
Krishna

Saroj
Krishna

Saroj
Krishna
Saroj
Krishna
Saroj

Krishna
Saroj

Krishna
Saroj

1n lcbdness
+r snointilg
qd a maid wmI's PenE'
home; her natal home
q<s Aabia
sE to eIm
Cdq pAlArc
TasIq Pomp and.splendour
q 17-to celebrate

Will you go homefor Dasainis year?

I haven't decidedyet. Wat aboutyou?
If I get e rnoneyI'll go. But it's not just the money,I
needtime off too, you know.
You'll probably get one week's leave, you know. That
won't be a problem.For me the main problemis money.
How much doesit cost to get to Nepal thesedays?
If you go by air it costs!500, doesn'tit?
Yes, it probablycostsabout500. And if you don't go by
air how else will you go? Does a bus or a train go to
Kathmandufrorn London?
Sometourist busesdo go. But to get to Nepal by bus will
pobably take at leasttwo weeks.
And will the bossgive us four weeks' leave,indeed?x'I
think he v,/on't!
He won't! Therejs no altemativeto going by plane.
But who will be at your houseat Dasain?
Faer and Mother will be there. Youngest and third
eldest broer will also'be ere. Other relaves will
probablycometoo. If God is kind I'11also get thee.
And what aboutyour elder sister?
Thrce years ago my siste got maried. So far she has
cometo the natalhomeeveryyear for Bhai Tika.*' She'll
probablycomethis year.
Won't your secondeldestbroer corne?
My secondeldestbrothermight not comethis time. He's
beenworking ia Ambia for two months.He saysthatif he
doesn'ttakeleavethis yearhe'll probablyget it next year.

But this yearhe saysthere,sno questionof coming.After

a yearit will be a bit easierfor him.
Krishna What is life like for Nepalisin Aabia?your broer
must
havewritten?
Saroj
It's-probably hard,but you watch! Within a few years
he
will eam a million and come back. Then he,il eo to
Pokharaandbuild a houseke a palace.andwe.ll sy in
it and celebrateDasain with pomp and splendour.ren
we'll look to seewhoselife is hard!
*'
Notes The addition of makesa questionrhetorical:
e person
askingknowsthatthe answeris ,no'.
A-* is a day of e Dasainfestival when sistersanoint
their
l' ".l
brothers.

fr,{rfi-{

-tsTT
-q'{r

-if{

ffi,f{fiE
s,*,e(m.)
s,,fr(f.)
efr,firfr,ffi(m.)
rfr, fi;ft,fr-fr (f.)
fr, fr, efi-qsetc.

-q-{r
-{t
-qF
- t-l.l

-qF

Probable future tense: verb bases

Thefomrationof the verb basesfor the probablefuture tensehasfive
rules:

Grammar
96 The probable futur tense
Nepali.has.several
different waysof expressingthe future tense,and
e main differencebetweenthem lies in ttreiregree
of certainty.
The habitual presentand continuouspresenttensescan
be trsedto
refer to the future,just as they can in English:
f rrrg rradqFb r
Totnonowmy brotherges
toIria
frfirrrrcdqt61
Tomonow my brotheris
going to India.
Ofcourse,both of thesesentences
would be in e presenttenseif the
word were removed from them. The probabte t
tor" t"nr",
however,is usedexclusively to refer to ttre future, unO
it
within it a measureof unceninty:
"onia.

frrrrs Tnesrrqr
r

Probable future tense: verb endings

q

Tomonow my brother will

(probably)go to India.

rn the affirmative, e probablefuture tense

consistsof a verb base
plus an ending;e endingsare asfollows:

I The endingsare addedto the basesof C-verbsin a regularmanner

(q irqrr ; do, rnis you ual dq fefr mtcr youi\I do,etc.l
2 If the baseof a V-verb ends in -, the endingsare addedin a
regulamanner(q qfi{T I will eat'r,7q;lhe will eat.rfr qrcq
he v,il eaL ec.)3 The V-verbs 1 to give, f<1 to take,andfl to be are iregula:
a 1 employsthe base- in first personforms (q kqr I wr11
gve. 614tca"tr we will give\ and<-in lLloers {s ;{Te Ii
gtYe
b fll employse baseq- in fist personforms (c fus4r I wili
rafte,{rfr ffior we s{r,rai(e) and- in ll oers (g lre .[
rake,
c fl employs the base{- in all fonns except the first person
singular;thusr{ {r 1 wil.l be,but ef {fr1 she will be.
4 Verbsoer thanft1and frl whosebasesendin -i (principally the
passive'i-stem' verbs) take an intervening-- betweenbasend
ending,e.g.ger ft will beforgotten,cl*<I it wi be obtained,
etc.
5 The baseof a W-verb is usually the norml presenttensebase
(e|rs- from qI, fus- from &q etc.). But for e fust person
forms the secondvowel is dropped.Thus: q {f{rr / wiJI cone,
rfr qrqt{r we ra come,but g fisqT e wltt come,fr{ qTg-qq
thev will come.elc.

Probableftrtue tense
K f o b e qE ogto
"11

! ts"| |

&tdr EFftdr

s
ffi.ftm-{|.qrqr

s(m.)
s (f.)

Erorl
r . 1l
Q l ' l l' 1

,J.t| (m..)

s-ft(f.)

qlFfo cone g Ogrv

rTGT
rR'dr

qriqr
qr+dr
3rrsqr{
qrq-{r

{r
l+-{r
flrfcr

3ITrFT

dr

iFTRT
IRIT
tl

TdT

qrfr
ETiFT

q,.'l

fr,fr,sfr{FrflI

.rf roao

"*d

III

qrefr

TFT
qT{r

3rcft

3fiBqr{

qsfl1

fr

&

-flT
<fl{

Formally, Nepali grammarcontainsnegativefomrs of theseverbsin

which their endingschangeto -+f{, -md{, _*{q, etc. but ese
are enconteredvery rarely indeedandere is very little purposein
the_foreign leamermemorizingthem. Generally,the futur ngative
is formed eier by addingthe prefix +- to the forms listed ab, or
by usingthe habitualpresenttensein the negativeand adding
frtr
terhaps o e end of e statement.The meaningvaries stigtrtty,
accordingto which form is used:
q Efefi |
q {Efqr I

q qTrErI^f{T- |
-

I'11probablygo.
I'11probably not go (with rhe sensethat
thepersonwho is beingspokento woutd
preferthepersonwho is speakingnot
to go)
I probably won,t go.

s IqqE Ttr{r I
He may not be a soldier.
s fec { d-d |
Heprobabty won,t be a soler.
Becauseof the slightly doubtful tone of this future tense,it aj to be
usedin sentencesthat refer to e future and begin wi the word
sllfE,peaps;
qrq qq rpn fu-sffiEr{r r I
won't go tody.perhapsl,ll
go tonorrow or theday after.
The following proverbusesthe probablefuturetenseof the verb rIf,
to frll:
ir.ft rrfr fr q-qiTc+ crfr I
() you're a queenandI,m a
queen,who rvill f l wate
from the weLl?

The High form of e probablefuture tenseconsistsof the dictionary

form of the verb + {cr . It is erefoe identical to the Super-Polite
imperative (see Grammar tl4) and in fact the two meaningsdo
converge:
tlr+aqrarqr F+e {qr

cmcqra qcr fre q{cr

ft t

PIeasewite me a letor
from England.
Will you write me a letter
ftom England?

97 The ininitive qr.{,What does ft cost to... ?,

How long does ft take to... ?
The verb (Tri is used to mean:
. o cos when it is combined with a sum of money:

rfr srtnror
frs lFrqler.st

How much does it cost?

It cos* 20 ntpees.

o o ake when it is combined wi a quantv of time:

+fr (t{q {rE r

How mch time doesit take?

It takesthreehours-

fi-q qq qrr6i t

Note: there is no Nepali equivalent of the English 'it' in these

sentences;and, althoughthe subjectof the verb qq may be plural
(e.g.tree-ours),
the verb behavesasif it is singular;henceeFrtru-ar
grT
qq.
ifT.E,not ilF
Thesesentencesmay be extendedby prefacing em th a verb,
rvhich must appearin its infirdtive form. This is very simply the
dictionaryform minus its final -u:
Dictionary fonn
qE
fis{
Sf

Ininive
lTF
qiFT
Tt{

jna
una
pugna

to go
to come
to rcach

Bo forms of the vetr C{ and-) canbe translatedas ogo, ro come

and so on, and there is very litde difference in thet meaning.
Howeveq only the form ending in - my be used in this kind of
sentence:
16r
tqrqrq+,frfl
How much does it cost to go
to Go*ha?

rrqr qr{ fr{ q!-erqt'E r

{qrqrq{3rr{ Kr fi{dt.6

It &,kesthre hoursto ach

Gort:,ha
| It takesa wholeday to go to
Gorkhaand come(back).

If,the sentenceinvolves nouns or pronouns(e-g. how long

doesit
taKey9!..., o how much doesit cost@._.) thenese musi
takethe
postposition-{r:
qTEri Fffitv$l
s-frqscrqfi It took thema weck to reach
QKrqr.q |
Mukinath from pokhara.
Tq.r4f gql T FirlE{ BqT h prcbably won.t takeus a
q[rfi
Q{r. ii_qrr tfq qr a|rr r weekto reachHumla from
Ium14 it will probably only
take us thee or ow days.
D gXgnCSg S pur the followrngsentences
into rhe Drobable
futuetense,substitung
the wordfr for |di in each:

t @cq{rtr*firr
t t+ir ft=tr+railacrd qq <qrdrf {rr r

8
r
t

rfl T{f{Hi <J{r E-rq-c rffF.

Trrcr @ {r. |
rqr q]Ir{ qr'rg{{r (Tw qfrq I
qrrs-{. <rrq mrq r
fuf,1ffi| 1156
r*dlrF{r qrrFt+qq rrw fi-t- ffi{ qrqr |

98 Wods lor approximately

Nepali has various words that can be used to mean
about o

approximately:

-ft-i

about1wi expressions
of me only)
appoximately, rougly
aboutasmuch as
almost, vitually

vt t

FT

The postposition -< (see Grammar 47) is used with

expressions of
time to loanat roughly such-and-sucha time
E{ {ffi

q[g{{

pleasecome at about

ruares-d,lrnfr{trd{
,n* , ii"!'i,iiir;uicktvwewiu
aive at aound-dusk.

The word +tq is used before an exprcssionof quantity to mean

aboutor approximately:
gt cft{s flFr A'ffi ri-{ < ftr We will probably need
abottwo kilos of salt fo
I
Fqrdr
a monm.
n-qi"E + T{ gr{ 6e-q <q fud r|16 t takesaboutten minubs
n rdt my hourefromhae.
he word qfr is usedafter an expressionof quantityo time to mean
asmuch asot asmany as:
As mny as 12peoplefrom
m Tr+r qrq{r Efr rrf{ff{F ffi
is village ed in the
|
f*cc-{dsrq
Second\lorld WarBt hasthe senseof almosto vey nealy:
qqft{{{
6rsr C-{ q \rd It took theseta.tersalmosta
q<f cfr t
week to teachLhasa.
EXERCISE57 Tanslateinto NePaIi:
It costsf,500to go to Nepalby air ftom London,andit takes15hours
to reachKatbmandu.I alwaysbuy an interestingbook t the aiport!
\ryhenI went to Nepal last year I bought a very fat novel nd it took
me aboutten hoursto readit. I will probly go to Nepal againnext
year, and I might buy two novels this time. In Nepal' I went to
Bhadrapur.Ifyou go to Bhdrapurby busfrom Kathmanduit's quite
cbeapbut it takesa whole day to arrive therc. Therc were a lot of
people on the bus going tq. Bhadrapur and the road leading to
Bhadrapurwas very bad. I didn't buy a book for that joumey,
becauseI was going with one or two Nepli friends. If you go to
Bhadrapurby plane it costsa lot of moneybut it doesn't take much
time.A planegoing to Bhadrapurleavesthe capitaleverymoming at
l0 o'clock. If I go to Bhadrapuragainnext year, I will probably go
by plane.

Dl26 Arrivingat Tribhuvan

Airport
International

*l/
*"
'
|.)
'\)

CLJ

o
r

rrr

q,

Haish hasetumed to Nepal e n absenceof 20 years.He finds

the alrpo completely unrecognizable,nd he enlists the help of
Nirmal, an aipot attendant, to see him through the various

t+

formalities.
{Ri !
!r
ffi
affi qqq 1dqqrsrd qrss{s-dft
qi, rr<s q=gr qrc. g. * qr+fl tg1-{q t, wr
tfur
qr ffi t
qrq r-qrq-+ qf !r rqffir+erq q-q-<
Tqq , sirqlt6, 'r:filrr't
c--S+tq
t"t
&r o, q <qrffi qrFT{q T{r fiffir$o rffirffi f{tI
qr@r eqd q ffitdrri s. orq-'rqrsfir{c6 r
q(ffiFrfc{fr
r
rfrrei@
Rrr
q, qrs.Fi{{ re, qrrrrt qnqr rq-d{nqn qr* |
frfq
srqn a qftsq trffi |l-q q FiIifF
EREI

Ir

o
C
o.
-

In this unit you will larn

. how to usa Expessions
maningshould,ought, m.rst
andhd to

*r

t{fr
ftsr
fq
firT

f+i{
ffi

t' {mr ri wvt+ffic qf qF{ |

rqislffir)
rfl q q+q |ffi
6r fu + { r
fudr rrfti tq fir{
qr{r{ fTfrrbr <acr{
dcrffi
qqet{fiR@r 'r\'{
q{firq?Trrffiwra rcrwgr* r
se+dto re+fl.rS{
sr--g{r
Gtsffi
rr r iiSq, crffierqrtqrtgfr rqE<cfffi
qrr
r<rifa< vn5rfr r
(qRT{qD

rfFFR, 1FFRI
fuT
q-qR 3ftr5 vrversgfrq a rsrq
+kra qrefl(r+ r
qrre{qrd
r
f.sr
;{TcfrW;

r<n qrta @

rOf frr*dqrir* racr3nqrt {a

$r
{Rtr

S,*r;wrwr
rhr

tg{n-srcrqrqs{r +s r*rvc S

r;qR 3frffi eq'qr, d'rArfi' tr, qf r q, *fi s rr r

ffi

{RT

ffi
Rqr
f{dr

*rs@q6w<rmrffivrft-qnff
ffi6
rqrrr cfr
f<11, ac I err+crq*{r, q +E6 |
qq,.ror r
avrtq{FqEr*lffiH?
t'iq r<rr q<oq-{smcr r
ea rq-Atqra
++srqgq aqrffiqr +'{q {firq qfr qFE r
qh acr{{qc { tqtr{ ltra{f( lftdcr
r

3I's" R (Royal Nepal A

Corporaon)
f-q< cowpastue
firqr yisa

xluTt e6"i"1
+mr passport
qtq ,o open
w-self,-oneself

t!-q queue,line
wrtq cizen
fir;4 luggage
fa to pick up
fi to wait
rq qfr si1.|
r<r.ri ro worry
q..dto exchange
tr{r{ oStOmS

qm,ri ropack
En-vra clothesand suchlike
ur< special,pnticular
q,fl to be tied
q to carry
.r.eary
ffir reseryadon
Tnr{ Naxal (a disictof
Kathmandu)

llarlsh Hello!
Nlrrnal Hello sir. Have you comefrom London?
Harsh Yes, on the R.A. flight that hasjust arrived.Listen, I have
not visited Nepal for many years.Before, the irpot was
just a cow pasture.Tell me, whereshouldI go, what things
do I haveto do?
Nlrmal OK, I'll organizeeverythingfor you. Do you needa visa?
If so, you haveto standin that queueover there.
Hish But I'm a Nepali citizen, you know. I don't needto get a
vlsa.
Nlrmal Oh, pleaseforgive me. Look, the luggagehasarrived.Now
you must pick up your luggage.
Hrrlsh But my luggagehasn'tcomeout yet. Doesonehaveto rit
a long time hee.o what?
Nlrmal Probablynot. It usually doesn't eventakefive minutes.
After frve minutes:
H^ it been lost on the \ay or
Harlsh It still hasn't
something? "o-"'.
Nlrmal No needto worry. I'll go inside and get you luggageout.
But you mustgive me ten rupees.
Hrish Ten rupees?I haven't any Nepali money.I must exchange
somemoney.
Nlrmal There's a bank over ere. Go ere andexchangeit.
After frve minutes:
Nlnnal

Done?I-ook, your luggagehasrived. Now you musttake

the luggageandgo towadsCustoms.
At Customs...

Harish
Customs official

Hello, hello.
Show me your passpo then. Where have you
comefrom today?
Ilarish
From I-ondon.ShouldI openmy bag?
Customsofticial Yes. We haveto takea look inside.Did you oack
it yourself?
Harish
Yes, I packedit myself. There's nothing special
in it apartfrom clothesand suchlike.
CustomsoIicial That'sprobly how it is, but we haveto look,
whatto do?There,thar'sOK. It,s done.
Nirmal
Comesir, I'll call a taxi for you. Give me your
luggagetoo,you mustbe tired,I'll carryit.
Ilarish
There'sno need,it's not heavy.
Ninnal
How far are you going? Have you madea hotel
reservation?
Harish
No need.There'smy brother,shousein Naksal.
Nirmal
That's that then. To get from here to Naksal by
taxi costsabout100rupees.Ard you mustgive
me 100too.Thankyou. Seeyou again!

Grammar
99 Must, shoutd,don,t haveto
The combination of the dictionary form of a verb with third person
singular forms of e verb c1 o .ai,(c and vi in the presenitense.
and cI and f' in e past.lis used to express meanings such as
musL need to, should, have to, and ought to. The two words Ie
joined together when witten:
Stt
qE

"

must be / should be / hasto be / ought to be

mustspeak/ shouldspeak/ hasto speak/ ought to speak

If the sentencementions a person upon whom this need or obliqation

'falls'. s/he must be marked in the sentence_
with the pososition
-rq lt tne verb rs rntransrtlve:
d@rf{qv-

- or wi - if the verb is transitive:

you do nothave to
cotne tomorTow.

ar-@snqwir

Boys and girls shoud speak

the tuth-

The affirrnative constructionis commonlyusedto pescribecorrett

behaviourin generalterms:

rfqsXrqr<\irt

qffiqrAwil
ffiqrffqrqrrfffir

StudentsshouldreslBct their
teacher.
Everyoneshouldbelieve
in God.
A husbandshouldlove
his wife.

ffrs mB?
omurq drrfiol?l

stqdr
t,rfuor?
tr6 ddr
t ffi rr{rdI
w6 RRgrd t 5{
r k*r fqrEtqdr
rn* qraq,rfri
'rffi
rm r nm at* an
rr r r rr{ac-.{rfli

es c-'crsBrcrcfrqt|6r
mvreftp m q r
qM d {ra r dt
r.ftltfirqqhs-d{
e rc 'rd dffi ni
rcfrt'clTir sq{

ilfr a{fi Rq @
rfro ft q SGc

aft{ wrEcfr{{rqfrrisaF I

rfrexrmwftrr
,rg I

aS5wntr rrn r rtln

s qd 'fr' {rcndq{
q{qqr
drdrstdr{ srun
arndr

ffie

in Npali
I UNICEFadvtisment
ho flainhadingtransldes'To b ablgto live heattilyis a hu[an ighl,every'r/omn
dtooldgtis rtlht

The meaningof the negaveconstructionwith is not exactly the

oppositeof this. Rthethan sayingt it is wrong to do something,
it simply sttesthat thee is no needto do it:
I will tell them,you ilo
ea-{{r q rr'a.,dcrf ta i
not nedto.
avrna{ r I have two pens,you do not
r{rtgrawro,
needn buy (one).

f.<ffi.rEqr{rs{qfu r

A pretty girl doesnot needto

wearjewellery.

The word d& is commonlyusedon rts own, rvithout beinattached

to a verb.to meanno needor don't bother
q dsr lrrrcffr q( :rrtq r i*, r bing
somewaterfo
{
you, OK?
qrfi-ftrg*arrrfro r
No need,we have two
bottlesof watet
If a needor obligationto be somethingo somewhere.falls, uDonan
inanimatenoun, that noun takesneither nor qt:
ac+ q-ffiqr vr d {wi I
There simply.mustbe money
n your Pocket.
EXERCISE 58 Change the following statements of fact into
statementsof genealobgation.
Example

e qt+ t wfuewro |

<r*r q+ < *fur wr-rqtir

He goesto the office everyday. = He hasm go to the ofriie

everyday.

e6+fel+fwut
He doesn't go to the office
every d.ay.

sFort qr fi qFFqEr-{qi
= He doesn't hdve ta go to the
office every day.

r frffiq-srqr

t
I
v
r

rrnA*csrqrrdnF6 I
{rq {r , {rfi-qfussrc
s-fi-{sfud
+qrm+r3+q
r
qifl{ q?qrffi rarq qrscr
ffi

e. qtq q rrd q-frsFfi 1ifr ffi

rrd r

6[sa5;5 I

The obviousmeaningof a verbfottowedby e simplepasttenseof

(I1 ro fal
lcTd e1v) is an obligationin thepast:
yesarday thee weeno
vegetablesin the houseand

*r* qtuq{< ftr,r.*{Rqr

** .:i; f:r:Xi'-ioI'*
rrq qEq
"
r

YestedayI had to run herc

and thee to manyplaces
in town

However,the sameconstructionis usedwhen the speakeris talking

aboute irnnediatepresent,becusehe considersthe obligationthat
pessesupon him as he speaksto have 'fallen' in the past tense.
Becausethe obgationhasalready'fallen', e speakerexpresseshis
intentionto carry out the action without further delay:
rffi qrnqr & qrl, ffi {-"{c-S I Mud hasgot on to the child's
clothing,now I mustwashit.
q,f,{frqrs"r
lffitd-dm{
Laok, teacherhasanived.
Now we mustopen(our)
rqg- t
booksandrcad.
qd qtq fi{ffi
{< F t{q{r
The estaul.antwill closeiu
'
ir" minutes.NowI must
-Sr.fr r
pay the 11.
EXERCISE 59 Change the following statementsof fact into
statemntsof pasto immediateneed:
Example 3rdq sFE I = a|-dlref sl1q- |
@qcr{qt$t
@r'rq{t=
r ffiS{I c{cflc-+ qk{ Errrq; I
|
ffifilfr qffirrrlqf
3rdTsvtE I
! r"Tqq tI{ +IITITFTI
r *AsT{{flrtTqn1
|
( ttsf sTFfl{qr{ E|{q |

10 The verbs frq andfrrrit

The verb E is very versatile, and can mean to come together,
match,fit, get along,etc. It is bestexplainedthroughexamples:

1OOMust, had to

@ wr+r mE;rfr av rqr rqR

{rr-r I

@rr6tnrcr +ar-wr
ar*q$. t

office was shit, so I dd not

have to go to town,

aqr + tSrr r-{ R{

fqrqr fr qi fu++ q I
$irao+ rr fm'{I I
qq #gqi afr qTq3rf{ fr{

That colour rcally doesn't

match with this colou.
Thiskey hasn'tfitted
thelock.
They cameto an agreement.
In this sentencethatword is a
little unsuitable.

 a qrsr sffirr

<r*nrfrs

rMy songers alongwel with

The veb fqrr. is the causativeof fuq. That is, it causesa coming
together,a mtching,etc. nd translatesinto Engshas to uo*gl
assemble,adjust,fuing togethe, sot out:

de qfrrv, vrffr r<rq

fucrc{1{qr

That'sa little expnnsive,

shopkwpr. Pleaseadjust the
price for ne

fr +fr * \z r cw frerv.ar=
r Whattine shallwent
tomomw? We must aange
a time.
r+vrrftere.ar=fr
whvfuq{
r Waita nmnent, won'tyou.
I haveto tidy my hai.
a-etlriEed g<rfua1q6
Now you are in agreement.
rqqrs{d{ |
Pleaseshakehands-

&)

qt

I
I

rl
fJr.

-q

o tr
oo
CL
o
1+
u

II

In ihis unit you will learn

. how to ask and stat what is
ight and what is wrong
. how to ask and state what
one is allowdto do
. how to identiy some bsic
facts about religionin Npal

El2Z Americansat Pashupatitemple

Jirn has been living in Nepal for tbree months, and he is showins
someAmericanfriendswho havecometo visit him thesits of th
KathmanduValley. He wondersif he might take themintashupati
temple.The policemanat e entranceexplainswhy he cannot.

or+rqrasd E{ g{r qrs {t

fqc ffiE
fi

q;6

ErmT iT\r+ r q s+ 4 r6

lilr q{r+ 3iitr

FF ?

c6i'qrrrfr dqrrr<r "i( s .fr F Fq 6rH d

o teqs{rt

yrwfr rr=o1| ilrftF Er.Ffrrr a d g<r rc*raa-frq r

qFrlz1r{t|wfr q|d fu;6 rFrE rr.qld,frT@
Td*qETgq I e{s+ s4 Ffq { ts 3r{kd rE I

+rwr

fwr g ra<t.refrrro r svqst r

r6t fsr, yerfrrr^grrtr!ryreSqtil *"\:ofr $ of rerd

qrqqr E{ qqrqkflar+ qk{+

fli tr E{q c6l

fuq ircicrz qt<tr + tr< 6-.5t

r6t o, +<&+ e ra<ffi,r
sr,Sr@.nqc
rg,rafo.sa
1
$<
c8 there:in that veryplace
frsr{ fo feac
qqffi
a follower of a region
rqr< utteance,somethingsaid

fqq fr qq{fi{qn ;6 r
*tffr avrif. E<rr+reqrfi(r ?
fur 6rfi-qqfudw qrq+ r

sfr{ ?{fr ffi

+qioavrrur{o ffi rrw +-qfttr r

frq {i 3{f-frrqr3qfr ffii Iqf,qq q+ fi-qtr,nrr rr.v

ilfrqF<<rd..
i-,
srFadrqrqt{ ffi rqrfufi qE"6 r rrqrcr fr\r{ rqrfr
r{et

furrs qrfrs-{E r
fwr rvr< oq rra*e + grfrvr<Frrra il.6 f{ gfi?
l-6t evrftatrtie-qS6go r
fqq rqiffi* q g r gr r
eqt Trt+ Tilc-q,
dqr{R gSilr
fu F,*tqa-*
tqr$-{tq n\rqr
rr<vracrffi

qdi meanng
rtq ancient
frfiqq place of pilgrimage
ffiv special
i.r+q le
@qr leathe
q to be made
qftq cos11y21d,comlnund
{rerftqfl fe Barna river

r*cs

-!F<rc\ the other side of

aq to be covered
qd tulloc.k

ft ro"ross
1< deadperson

Er31 to bum, cemate

ffiW
to takeaphotogryh
q1adimqoper
fu vq.Shiva temple
<w vrew
fru.ri ro be careful
grq trouhle
..

s it all right for us to go into the temple?

Which country haveyou comefrom?
We havecomefrom America.
Is that so?'WhatgoodNepali you speak!Wheredid you
leam the Nepali language?
Right there in America I leamed a ttle. Now I have
Jlm
lived in Nepal for threemons. Can we...
Pollceman Aho, can you leam Nepali languagein America too? I
didn't know. Are ere peoplewho teachNepali?
There Ie plenty. Tell me, is it or isn't it all right for us
Jlm
to entere temDle?
Jlm
Policeman
Jlm
Policeman

Rlqq?
c-t { frF r qrlcffi
{k{ ffi
{r< Fr-{ frFq-{
ra
avrfi
-{r
fr
flcd rosq *; ffiq fTffif rr6a 1
fqTfr" fuq+-dqa-ftr* cq f{@ r+frftqTq'c s

Policeman
Jitm
Policeman
Jim

Are you a follower of Hinduism?

What doesdharmvalanbi mean?I didn't unde$tand.
Wat I meanis, are you a Hindu?
No, I am not a Hindu. lvin you not allow us into the
templebeausewe are not Hindus?
Policeman It's a bit inappmpriate.This templeof Pashupatinais
Nepal's mostancientpilgrimageplac.Thatyou should
know. So special rules apply here. The priests only
allov Hindusto enter.And evenif they are Hindus,noone is supposedto wear anythingmadefrom leaer.
It doesn't matter. It seemsthat becusewe are not
Jim
Hindusthereis no quesonof going inside.But canone
get to look at the templecourtyard?
Poceman On the far side of the Bagmati river over ere, the
hillock covered by trees, right? They call that
Mrigasthali. Crossthe Bagmariver by that old bridge
over there.From the bridge you can seeRajarajeshwari
Ghat.* ere, Kathmandu'sHindus bum their dead.lt
is not right to take a photo of that. It is extremely
improper.
I've understood.But what is there at Mrigasthali?Just
Jim
Aees?
Policeman No, at lVigsthalithereare many Shiashrines.Therc
ae lots ofmonkeys too. You cansit in the sunthereand
look at a very fne view of Pashupatinath
temple.
Is it all right to take photo ofe templeftom there?
Jim
Policeman Yes, that's solutely fine. But be careftrl th the
monkeys. You shouldn't give the monkeys any fruit.
Tbey'll give you houble.
*.
Noe A gh is a steppedplaorm leadingdown to a river. Ghs
are often used for e performanceof religious devotions and s
crcmationsites.

visable is / is not aI ngfu. Often,no subjectis mentionedin these

sentences,
which are often generalstatementsaboutwhat is and what
is not co[ect behaour:in suchcasesit canbe understoodto meanone
should..o one shouldnot...

Grammar

Allower+ -
Personallowed+-qr{ Infmitive R (o alow)
q q{cr s{q T qr { r
I did not allow him to smoke
a cigaette itt the house.
Thepocemanprobably
r6ftfrffitktrrgtrcret
won't allow you to wear
l qr I
shoesin the bmple.

12 Is it ail rtqfi b... ? Usingthe infinitive

with 6<rfir
The combinationof the infinitive of a verb + fo / { expresses
meaningssuchas should/ oil not,is / is not pemifred is / is not

qkrrr Tdr{rs{ {r

One shouldnot wear shoesin

a tenple.'
According to Hindu rcgion,
fq rrri nlvr< .n +q gia I
it is wrcng to kill a cow.
qrt
trliq--{fl-{
|
Ewrff
&{ Accordingto Istamic
t'Sfr t
eligion, it is wrong to
eatpok.
*
Nofe The solesof the feet o shoesare unclean,and shoesshould
be removedbefoe enteringthe interiors of houses,temples,e!c. It is
alsoinsulting to sit with one'slegscrossedin sucha way that the sole
of one's shoe is in front of anothe peson's fce. Sirnilarly, carc
shouldbe takennot to let one's fet passove any pa of a Nepali
penon's body, nor shouldone touch anotherprson on e crown of
the head.
The alternative negative forrn of fl (E-q instead of frt) is also
frequentlyusedin thesecontexts.The subjctof a verb in a sntence
of this type musttke - if the verb is transitive:

f(frfiriqf6.,
qfrffifr qf( |

You should not eat no mwh

spicy (fnd), but it's OK to
eat a Litle.

1@ They dont allowyou to...

Nep uses the verb f<X to give lo mean o le or to allow. Tbe
subjectof { will usuatlytake - in all tenses,to makeit absolutely
clearwho the subjectis. When oneof the fist pesonponouns(r or
qrfr I ls tle subject,howeve,it is unlik to take - exceptin past
tenses.The sEuctureof sucha sentenceis typically:

q-frfu{{<rrqfrfr?{frr
rqr erc-{RTsc r

Why haveyou stritcheil off

the ght? Switch it on and
let me read the newspaper,
won't voL!

16r<r vrfv wn a1rvQv Qheg;on't tet you go

sr{I6 |
higher than this.Theteis a
dangerof landslitu.

*
Note The Nepali eqvalenr of ro suacon is d!
o sm?coffis .< q. ro sur

ro open.while

EXERCISE60 C.eite fi],e serrtences

along the following lines:
allower
allowee
place/ time
verb
allow?
I
people
in my house
smoke
X
qqF,kF-drfrqqqrs-+
=
qr ffi 1
I
2
3
4
5

allower
mother
ey
elder brother
father
you (High)

allowee
my friends
us
children
us
touists

place/ time
in ourhouse
into the temple
in the moming
in the evening
in the temple

verb
ajlow?
drink alcohol X
go
/
watch TV
/
go out
X
wear shoes / ?

104 rc{ being and rrs{cfr dspit eirig

s{\rt,the -q{ paniciple of g , is commonlyusedto point out the
cause
of something,in much the sameway that the
-6 participle is used
in combinationwith - to createa pa of a sentencebegi;ing with
because.When T{ is used, however, the cause is state bss
ernphatically:
qrc vqi e+{ ffi
TqTqFT

-*o +o*

tr5nrenr$vwr.{rctrq
rnqr

Being Newars,ny spak

Bhashatoo.*
Being old, my grandmother
very seldomconresout
of the house.

*
Nore The ofEcial namefor the Newari languageis yir vrw. The
KathmanduValley, whereit is e indigenouslanguage,wasknown
sqqFTuntil the pesentcenttrry.

The English translation of each of e above sentencescould eouallv

begin becausethey are Newats... urd. because sheis old...
The addition of c (even, ajso) ro r\rr makes e sentrencemean that
although what is stated is indeed the case, oer things are not as
might be expecled:

+r<vq{ cF{fi-{F ffiq

drcq r

Sqr<firftqwmrr
r*T qt-<(qFtd.6
|

Despitebeing Newas,they
speakonly Nepali.
Despitebeingold, my
gandnothegoesto the
templeevery day.

105 Religionin Nepal

Religionis anintegralpa of tradionallife in Nepal,which is e only
countrJin theworld with Hindsm asits official region.Theconcept
of qq Gightousness,duty, morality, rcligion) ervades maly
acvities,andregiousconcepshaveplayedan importantole in the
Bhpingof society.Mst Nepali-speakingpeopleare Hindus, though
there are many Buddhist Newa$ and Buddhism is also prevalent
anongthepopleof thehigh mountainregions.Islamis represented
in
mostTarai towns,and thereis a Muslirn communityin Kathmandu.
TheChristiancommunityis very small.
For Hindus,religion consistsin e worship (fw) of specialbeings
(gods:, ia6r; 4 Oarticularmes(certaintimd of tte day,holy dats
of the weekor month,annualfestivals,etc.),in particularholy places
(ata fanily alur, at a temple,etc.).Theysharea beefin theprinciple
of rebih. theconsequence
of ctions1rf). andtheillusory;atureof
lhe mterialworld ({crQ. The ultimate aim of regiouspracticeis
dcliverance(frq) from the endlesscycleof bir anclrebirth,but most
Hindussimply hopefor a betterrebirth throughe accumulationof
mcrit ouq).
luddhism and Hindsm are closely intertwinedin e Kathmaadu
Valley towns, and sornetimesit is difficult to decide whether a
plicular temple has a Buddhist or a Hindu dedication.For many
Ncpalis, the distinction is meaningless.However, Buddhism is a
distinctreligion which, unlike Hindsm, hasa founder,the historical
Ituddha called Gautam4 who is also given the title Shakyamuni.
Buddhismsharesmany beliefsin commonwith Hinduism,but it has
n tlillbrent conceponof the conceptof deliverance,which is firqiq,

ihe 'snuffing out' of desire. Unlike Hinduism, Buddhism is also

practised by monastic comnrunities. The religion has its own
pantheonof deities.Of hese,tbe Bodhisatwas(beinsswho have
delayedeir own attairurent of ffi
and have vowe to work for
the enlightenmentof all sentientbeings)are widely worshipped.
To sttethat a paicular deity is worshippedat a particularplaceor
time, usethe verb phrase-d F* W
*$<<wr6d1wro
r
Mahdevis woshipryilat

worshippedin thegreat
festival of Dasain.
EXEBCISE 61 Translateinto Neoli:
A

Which god doesthis templebelongto? Is it alt right to go inside?

B This is e temple of Gnesh.Yes, it is ll dght for you to go

A

B
A
B

A
B
A
B

A
B

inside,but you must tkeyour shoesoff.

Is this a very old temple?
Yes, it is very ancient.Peoplecomehereevery moming and do
pj of Ganesh.
Why do they haveto comehereevery moming?
They do not haveto come,but it is goodto comqhereevery day.
If you do pj of Ganeshevery moming your day will be
successfirl.That is a belief of ours.
What shouldI do now?
You havedonedaan of the god, and that is good.pleasegive
a ttle moneyfor the temple.
I do not havevery much moneyon me. But perhapsit will be ll
right to give ten rupees?
Yes, that is fine. Pleasecome, it is late. Nolv we must go to
Paupatitemple.It is not so far. If we walk ere we can reachit
in half an hour.
Which deity is worshippedat Paupatemple?
Shivaji is worshippedthere.

q
{1.,

z
oo
I

qt
I'
rl
{

g)
r
sl
I
II

o
q)
I

ln this unit you will lean

. how to us ths Nsoali verbs
that meanca
. how to describvs
. how to talk abo leaming
and teaching
. how to talk about wanting to
do something

Cl28 How manylanguagescan you

speak?
r
ri{TE fir{{if,{crrnqr*qvwr.v
ffiqq
flffitqfu fqqqrcrduE rfrq rnqr qmrqr r
erfuq rrrqrqrqrd 1u qr r
efirrq fqq rrrs dqrfi Erqr {r, a< acrffi qrrTrfr c
*rrr.drrqrqdo, { r
r+rqr, il{ fffr sfu q qffr
ft-q*qfuq rnqr qrqwe m
qrc{qr
qnrrqr
rT I qm q-.qaru
$rqr c drq I
ffirrrcrtdqrqwraffirncr
r
irrw r +<r{qrac qrgrrrqrr sr<{rg fr g *f r cq6o r
ffifr fl{r qft ffi rnqrfr ffif;r r
ftrqkrq {df{ qrq -q 3rr${|
a,irrq r*qr$q r
frrqmecfrrn,mwqr$s+{w r{sTI cffrqr firr *nsr
tq-E rar rn6rffi-qF'{Ffl,r<T Er{ qqR-+ qrfir
{rE1 3rq{r+rq t rr ld qrf{Fas o* q+ Trsnrrd
*oT r.-+rr{"Tcfi-{F{,qnd rqilqqfu+qfi
r
rfr 1er$t-6= t r* Ev rnvr w q q-{q r
qfi.Tq frq{ vrderd <crn
T{ T{ Eces q{q qfb r
ft-qnqq @ Sff wq t l1fr wfr -q ch {e rcrrfi-{{
H Tn rqid qr 5*t rgqrq{'{- ffiqr qrcr F
ftfrr6s & r qFr+rqvrqqr .<rfi qfr eiiqrt.E rF $
{$ gar-{sfr qqffi qr-.oqmqrr
^
re ll g<r+r z-qs qrwr qqfu q<r srd
ehrq deS
q41.gn-r e r +ir*.6{dgqr Mr cr {, s c q
r-ecfuffir
fttltf{nq m;zEw fe-r, {-fr vrer *e rd g gr6s v o1
d* nfl re-q q sr qrff+ R'q qFb r*fi
q? -{, 8-+ qrr6s a fr-S vrvr r.er fi wq rrrw*d
T<r rcd vqfir q{r qfr fi'frfua qc qr fir* r
dcil{F dr-frf6qaq r
{ti{rE dffi I q qd{ { er {f, sk rqtqrs .rf, e qq ir.6 m
ei qr crft rqrqr

fiqT language
q to speak
q\ to be able to
Rr mrik
q!{N mothef tongue
c<s eality
qg one t sef
q.r birr
s@ word
g bo
fircaqrq to get by, fiincon
cz at al|
rra qd usualy, mosly

q;q 9ths1
qq to get to, unage to
gn old man
q! old wonan
{Er-{T-{ young men and women
1rE${ tte stalsnn Indian TV channel
' rarely
gui ancesor
{srqrfi Brtisli .rmy
ReE
ro reoeive('consume')
a pnsion
.rq surprse, amazement
Erq to k?ow

Harsharaj How many languagescan you speak?

Tilbikrm I speakthe Limbu languageever sincechildhood.The
Limbu languageis my moer tongue,in fact. For me
e Limbu languageis like mother's milk.
Harsharaj The Limbu language might well be your mother
tongue,but for you Nepali too is like a secondmother
tongue,isn't it?
Tilbikram The Limbu languageis the languageI learnedfrom my
mother, but I also speakNepali from a young age. In
reality, what does'moer tongue'men?Is it the
languagespokenfrom bir or the languageleamed
fiom your mother?
Hosharj I think you can give both thosemeaningsto the word
'moer tongue'.Can your moe speakNepali too?
Tllbikram Shecan't speakNepali.
Harsharaj Not at all?
Tllbikram It's not quite like that, but sheknows very little. Faer
can get by in Nepali. The men of our villge travel for
trade or they wok outsidee village, but the women
generallysty right in the village. So they don't get to
learn any languagesotherthanLimbu. And the old men
andwomenusually can't reador wite any language.
Harsharaj What languagescan you speakexceptfor Limbu and
Nepali?
Tllblkram I can understandHindi and I can speakjust a little as
well. It's not so hard for Nepali-speakers
to understnd
Hindi. The youngmen andwomenwatchHindi filrns t

the cinema. Nowntluyr. y(,u can get to watch

Doordarshan
in Nepnl {r wcll. It's rareto find young
peoplewho cannotun(h.r$tnt(l
Hindi in Nepaltoday.
Harshara.i That's true. And the chilchcnol the new generationare
not illiteratelike eir unccstors,
are they?In schools
ey leam to write and rt:rd not only Nepali but English
too.
Tilbikram But it's not just childrcn,thcreare alsosomeold men
in our village who cD spcakEnglish. Most of em
receiveBritish Army pcnsions.And thereare someold
men who cannot only spcukbut can alsoreadEnglish.
It's amazing,you know. At one time I wantedto leam
. English too. Did you ncvcr want to leam English?
Ilarsharaj I can read Engsh but I can't speak it. I'd like to
practiseit but I don't hove friend who knowsEnelish.
Whatto do?

Grammar
106 Io be ableto...
Nepali hs two vebs that mean can. They are each used in
combinationwith the infinitive of a veb. <q meahscan in a way
at refers to the ierent or physical capability of its subject to
perform the verb in question:
g qrr{qen qE $16 |
s grFqrqr qd {

He can climb (is capable of

cmbing)Evercst.
Ne cannot cmb (is not
capable of climbing)
Evercst.

In sentencesin pasttenses,the subjectwilt take - if the verb that it

was able or unbleto Derformis transive:
Present tense

oavrfrgrgav+

EXERCISE62 Vy'ritenine shortNepali sentencessttingthat ech

of the personson e left is able to oerform eachof the verson the
rigbt:
I
speakNepali
she(Middle)
cook Nepali food
you (High)
understandthis book

1O7 To get to, manage to

qTgl meanscan in the senseof getting the opportunity to/managing
o. It suggeststhatpermissionhasbeengranted,or thatcicumstances
are in some other wy favourable. The difference in meaning
btrveenqnX andqst is particularly markedin negativesentences:
q!-sffr q cf +fr crt{ |
In London I can't (alon'tget
the chanceto) speakNepai.
qmq d-fr fufl qr t
In NepalI couldn't (diiln't get
thechanceml leam Engsh.
3{q TFT'CIST
{.6 C\F|
He could not (d Dotget a
chanceto) climb EvercsL
qrsqqr dqr{ T<{ qt qrs- t
You won't be able to (won't
getthe chanceto) eat
gundrukrn london.
The passivefonn of cT<{ , i.e. ctq! , can also be usedimpersonally
to statethat somethingis permitted,or that the oppounity exists to
do something:

w-s+rnffiqqcrt-{

Past tense

s{ dcrga
gn Sa q+{ r

He can't understand what you say. He could,n understand what

you sat4.

qdfffireq-
(f<{ r
I canl read that book.

lVhen discussinga penon's abity to speaka language,a corffnon

construconhasit that the languagecomesto at person:
qcr ffi
qfu qfr qs r
I know just a little Nepali.
ffi-{trfr+dq3{rremqq
I can sryakhglish butI
ca nt wite t.

q ft-arqcq qH r
I couldnl rea.dthat book

qr *ffiqr

{qTEll-{ lr*f

v{{qTqrs-.dcr{{ |

CIFTqr6

In London one doesn't get to

speak Nepali-

Onecannot@etpermission
to) climb Eveest duing the
cold weather
One gets(the chance)to eat
gar&:!k in the Helambu
arca.

EXERCISE 63 Write nine short Nepali sentencesstating that each

of the persons on e left managed to perforrn each of the verbs on
the right yesterday:
he (Low)
climb Everest
they (Middle)
make a phone call
you (Middle)
ear gundruk

Rrs1 is the causaveof q

len o to teach.

108 Describing a verb

A secondveb that mensto teachis cTgd,vhich is actully the

custiveof g to read, to study. Thereforc,vari{ is only usedin
more academiccontexts, and only enrs1 is used in combinaon
wi the infinitive of a verb to meanto teachto...

Nepali usually uses the infinitive of the verb (e.g. fufl to lean,
leaming) wher.that verb is being describedwith an adjective.If you
wish to celebratethe easewith which you havemasteredNepali so
far, you might like to declare:
qFft fufr {ffi il.o I
gf+ qf<uf qf stn o fa{rg
+r."r sq+ rrfr qs rr o r

To leam Nepatiis easy.

His pronunciationis a
ttteodd. So ir is fficuh

rt.-*,.{rq.{qqrq;b
I i,"tff,,fff,i"lio#;0,"

nd it therefoe meansto causefo

{rffi ser{arrqfr fi'ne

frrr+ftr r
+dfi vrrre<{5fl qnfl{qE{
firrr$916o 1

ac6-drfiqrq

q Fl( c-drs6{d I
flqc{FqrERl,r.ifu+rg-S6
qrqqfi-{-{r{srs.r-iffiE

An old man in the uillage

taught me to sing this song.
Sheis teaching these small
children to read the alphabet.

What do you Each at

this school?

I teachmathemacshere.
r what will you tlrjh
tlrechilen to do today?
t TodayI shallteachthem
to add up.

for money,
35qf

and rt| can both be translated as difficu]t, but thev have

sghtly different connolaioDs..I| means dificult in e senseof
somethingbeing hard or tough. while 3qaII mea6at somethins
is probleac, awkward or tricky.

Sool subjects
Histoty
Edtq
rTfrl
Mathematics
Geogmphy
Tmq

fq-r{
3ifr
ffi

science
English
Nepati

09 Io leamto,teachto
fufl meansto lean.It is usedwith bo nounsand verbs;when
combinedwith anotherverb in a phnse meartg to leam to... , tJte
verb that is leamedtakesits ininitive form:
q crfr $rqr ffi-q t.
I am teaming Nepali.
qffi{rqr\a{mql
I am teaning n read Nepali.
q frr nqr fu+ fuE I
I was leamins chinese.
q fcfu4i rrqr +q ffi fi{qr
I wasleamiig to write
Cbinese.

rs. {r+ frfu+s r

T 93 oa** *r"*

Now Rame is leaming to

dive a ca.

u-

My daughterhasnotteamed

110 7o want to...

There are severalways of expressinga wish to do sornething.The
fust is to use the verb qrq to warf ro in combination with the
infinitive form of a ver:
q.ea 5n q-<
gefr r@
Guji wantsto tell the
cmqr dcr{ qrd cfil<( qrFr6Rr }I4haso of presensdo you
want to buy for your family
s.rqrc6. +a <16ggo ?
in Nepal?
The secondway of expressinga wish to do somethingis-to use the
past tense of the verb phraseffi Fflq ,which is $T Ftr4 . This is
perhapsa morc typically Nepali way of expessingthe sameidea rFT
{r meanssomethinglike mrhd suckor mind tended.It is in the

pasttensebecausethe personin questionhasin tle very rcentpast

conceivedthe wish to peform whateverthe verb might be: e wish
hasjust 'struck' himer. In their simplestform, suchsentencesare
structuedasfollows:
subject+ c - infinitive verb - II qrr
qr s It; qr I
s({r{ Tr qrT{ qrr r
The negativeform is qr itt:

acri{r{ffi{RT{q

I want to cy.
He wantsto go home.

t, frSqrrfl-errrst+-rr
rr cr r

Don't you want to stay at ou

ple?
We, why don't you want to
sing a song?

If the sentenceis about a wish that was conceivedin e pastbut is

no longe enttained,rF dTl{ musttake the completedpasttense:

rvrttq

T dfifiiqT 1161r wand to soyin wn

T{ {Frfi qq, < ql-{;T I

Anwican university, but

I could noL

qt qe Sn-!T{"-cfr-{r<-{ I wanted
n phoreyour
s.r $ qq qFFFsF,{ q{
kt qtt t

fam y whenI terched

Nepal,but lcould not
find the number.

11 Verbsmeaningto belbve
ffus Fnglisl yelb to beeveEanslatesinto Nepali in severaldifferent
ways, and the questionof which ve to use dependsvery much on
context.The ttrrcmin verbsare:
(-vqq
to accep\ rcgard we|l, espe.t
CqDffiqf
to
in, have faith in
qictsT
'.ust as a factual
to accqt
'..uth
q aqrir (rqrf q];g r
I respectyour elder brother
a lot.
qFfrf
qf {r, +d ql I betievein both Hinduism
CHql"q I
and Buddhism.
q sfi-{s-d F-fl-fi {r+rq rr |
I don't /rustin what they sayft-WrqtfrrgRir
I beuevestongly in thegs
nd gdesses.
v@tdgnroretr@er
It is difficuh to believe what
they say.

gt

c+

+
Ir
J

o
CL
o
o
1+
o
U

to
-

In thls unlt you will lan

. how o talk about pupos
nd bglnningto do
something
. ]ow to talk about
nnembering and oating

DIZS Xatyanivisitsthe doctor

Jivan takes his daughter Kalyani to see Dr Shresa because she has
been complaining of sore eyes.

-fi
+qqrs<vs r
sr. s q-{ r*g.( rqA-qa,qr
qS<qr{ qr\'+ rffi
fifi
<r+<erffi
fr o{ffi
rrq'
<n fer w r3rrdfe6ri arsa Era r'r 'rf qrfi rqfc iq
gcfu E<q lars1l-s rr< qffi-{s {dr<6aRqR r
er' aw q, es rr <crt... rrfr, ffi rq ?
fiqr! f{rqfr,sr{ v r

er.4q qfr ftrfrer r

{--qr!fr vr+ ili, er{ vr{ r
qr.,q t;r+ rs+qrq qH Erf, errffi r cer<r 3Tffi
frEt{ r
-+t 8<fulr"Er( ga.ri r@{< flArcdgqer
{rdT lqfr F|gl

gr. q rrqcrfr, lffirs

r
qiqr
r_(.qr!ft
gc*r-is
r
er. q r * fui 'rqror rr+qr 3iqr$qf 1r.
t"qrfi <qifl qE6ere-<r r
er" q qqrrq qrc* r
+enfr gn+n qc Scfu g6 qr er< qq rqfd-{r{qq di#
t+flqtr+rEq.tt
r
qq
er"
rs-qi{$b ?
+-erfr eire*Eng ffi, er+erv rrEafir rr* r
er.q qqr
+-c+rofr*rere< vri* r
er. q as ffi scq fri ffi 5S .s r
q-fi
+-qii q qsd {r {r rd er{ vri* rvrmffi
{rfr -fi sq d q1 s fir {fr rs{rsrr c rrq'+{,
sr. 'q qrqr o"nE-
rfi rrt q{rg{g;6 r
-{4 }werr<r@r
sr"q ffiftr

q-+r$a
t6rfrrfu n='r-$v
tEc,ert{ flq,rfrErs<rqr
frq si{ r
lq dcri{r
sr.s r{Frrgqc-{frrqffiqt{ffic+E
q{, trt ;q rwfr $ fetgrr t*6n <g;r ffi grr+
sifi srr.Fi&, a r
3c( @
fi-fi

ff{
+qgf'qq. rrqflE rffn frq +-araqqtcsr
er. w $ v ffir cs{cr crf,-Etq,f{Rqmq rqR ffi
lrt:r qqqrs{ ft qrsgq t
sr. Dr
ffi
rL
unwel (oppositeof t)
ffi
ers lead
Eq olu
qq to stat,betn
-cl-oafter
ctfr chiL1.tile one
ffi
tongue
qq afhoea

fi

fi-{-.ndlr4ae: adidoeattEdy
Afi cor*er,save,unking lnafii
ers{r frewood
llc smo.ke
ffi a Wil,pltute,cauehrrtb
3r'lq o boil
qre{ ocooJ
qqftr medrcine
fra o bY
f. again

Hello Doctor Seb.

Jivan
D Shrestha Hetlo. Sit down, Tell me then, what's happened?
My daughter'sbecomeill and I have come to show
Jivan
he to Doctor Seb. She's been unwell for several
days. This moming she beganto say tht he head
hurt. And when we heardthat \e thoughtwe should
show her to Doctor Seb and we camein a hurry.
Dr Shrestha Oh, you did the right thing... Child, what is your
nme?
Kalyani, Doctor Saheb.
Kalyani
your age?
And
Ih Shrestha
Sevenyears,Doctor Saheb.
Kslyani
Dr Shrestha Did he headonly begin to hurt today?Shewasn't ill
before this?
For severaldays she was saying at her eyes hurt.
Jivan
YesterdayI looked nddiscoveredthat bo eyeshad
becomered.
Dr Shrestha Tell me child, how are you?
My eyeshu, Docto Saheb.
Kalyani

Dr Shrestha
Kalyani
Dr Shrestha
Kalyani

Dr Shrestha
Kalyani
Dr Shrestha
Kalyani
Dr Shrestha
Jivan

Dr Shrestha
Jivan
Dr Shrestha
Jivan
Dr Shrestha

Jivan
Dr Shrestha

Just show me you tongueen. Which eye hurts?

Both eyeshurt, Doctor Saheb.
Wlrcn did your eyesbegin to hurt?
My eyes began to hurt after I got to school on
Wednesday,Doctor Seb. I satdown to reada book
and at at momentmy eyesstaed to hurt.
Doesyour headhurt too?
It was hurting this moming, Doctor Seb. But now
it's better.
And what out your stomach?
It doesr'thu, DoctorSaheb.
How is your daughter'shealthusually?
A few monthsago shehad diarrhoea,Doctor Saheb.
When shegot diarrhoeawe gaveher ,Jivan_Jal'and
she got better qckly. Apart from rhat, noins has
happened.
What do you cook your food on at home?
On a cooker,Doctor Seb.
A kerosenecooker?
No, Doctor Seb, we cook on fuewood.We ale Door
people,kerosene
cannotbe afforded.
The smokeinside the housemight have harmedher
eyesa little. I will give you medicinefor this. And for
a few daysdo not forget to washher eyestwice a day,
moming andevening,with waterthathasbeenboild
andcooled.OK?
Very well, Doctor Seb, thank you. Where shouldI
go to buy the medicine?
You cangetit in anymedicineshop.There,takecarc.If
sheis not betterwithin four dayscometo show(herto)
me agatn.

Grammar
112 Expressingpurpose
The infinitive of a verb can be used in combination with verbs
such
as !T1 to go, 3Tg fo comq and also with oer verbs, to exDress
purpose.In thesecontexts, the infinjtive of e verb mewts
in order
to do whatever the verb might be:

t'f qT
frq argr
|r{rcI
qrfi-qs<rwr*rqt {fr< s o t
qF,Ar
qrqfrfr c-d n-S+
lrrf,qrg6
|

to go (in oder) to watch

to send (in ode) to get
to come (in oder) to do
We ae going to the foest to
cut frewood.
This aftemoon a man from
the next village is coming
to |ook at our cow.

Sometimes,thepostposition-eTis addedto e irinitive of e verb

to emphasizee senseof purpose.This is especiallynecessaryin
spoken Nepali, when purpose is often expressed outside the
frameworkof a ftll sentence:
rfrqs t6 cq-{r s q ?ftcr
ftrr r
fr*ts frq s-{frTc t <rs{r
{r-{{rl ?

Why aretheygoing a
Pokhan. To watcha frlm?
why haveyou enteedthe
forest? To cut frewood?

Anothercontextin which purposeis expressedis one in which you

wish to saythat someing is neededin orderfor a paticula Yerbto
happen.In this case,the pososition - qrFr for is ddedto the
infinitive of the verb:
qrr qrR.o lq
What doesoneneedn takea
s fiffi
phongraph?To takea
|
tqffi{rF+{{rqrR
phogr$ryoutdacanwa.
q H q-qrc-i-d{rr gea a+raft In order m play thisradio
I had to buy a battery.
ffi,

13 Beginningto do something
Nepalihasfour verbsthat meanfo begu. Theseare:{-1,{qi'
qlq, ndqTIt.
$fland$d
$ is a nounmeaningDeginntng.Thus,gt{ meansin the beginning.
{{is intransitive,while 1t tr! is transitive;they havethe senseof
to commenceand o sfar rcspectively.They re bo used as the
mainveb of a sentenceandcannotbe combinedwith any otherveb:
qTqr FiFq rfr { $ '6 ?
At what me doestoday's
proganme begin?
rFft*
qrfr$
1
rre
The work is very overdue.
+rrsffiw
We must statnow-

e { and aTlT can bo be used with the infinitive of

a verb to indicate
the beginning of an event or action. Although yc,I and qrr bo
mean to begin, there are certain tenses and contexts in which one
should be used instead of the other, and in some contexts tlee is
some difference in meaning between the two verbs. Nepali-speakers
use these two verbs raer more than English-speakers use the
English verb o begr.
E!-I has the sense fo sa fo... In the past tense, it means at the
subject began to perform the yeb with which cq is combined, but
it does not imply that the verb is still being performed:

gqk<qrq

qe t

fr*fuewrfrr

He statcdto go to the temple.

My younger sisterstated
to cy,

qlq is tansive rvhenit is usedth transitiveverbs,

so e subject
must tak - in the pasttense:
q
$Frtmqffr

<rx<tw*r<qrerFTr+ffi

fom

last Wednesday.

r Fatherhad juststattedTorcad
thenewspawr.

qre is usedin thepresenttensein situationswhere

the subiectmkes
a voluntarychoiceto performe ve:

q qrrr-f,qrcs r

*frfueffiturqr"or

I shall sbrt b do it today.

He sayshe will start to learn
Engshfom tomoow.

dl.T
iTltif has the sense to begin fo... It is very rarely used in the present
tense, where it gives \ay to sITq. In the past tense, it often means that
the verb has begun to happenor be performed. but is slill on_qoing.
For instance. the sentences q q' -rq {r and c s qn mr+
E ,igit
be taken liteally to mean I began to go home and,I have begun igo
lrome but in fact they can both mean f anr going home or I am on my
way home'.

g rrr{, fr {ffr El-{{rrs ?

q6fi-qqnqrHlffir

rrffivncrt

Hey, brother,whereare
you off n?
I'm going to Thamel.What
aboutyou?
I'm on my way to Bhotahiti.

Compare e translations of the following sentences, one of which

usesfl{ and the othe qlq:

sqfuq Er{{rmo t
s qFq<qn qrRs t

He is on hiswayto thetenple/
he is aboutto set out for the
temple.
He hasstartedgoing to
the temple.

The fust sentencemeansthat he has begunto go to e temple, and

is currendy headedin that direction. The secondsentencesuggests
thathe wasnot previouslyin the habit of visiting the ternple,but has
startedto go eceny.
qr. is more suited than sflF{ to casual or involuntary ctions or
events,It never takes-, even in the past tensewhen the verb it is
lied wi is transitive.
Further xamples of erg and q]n1
qfic-{,ffi.-f,iliq?
q rkrq]-q d, qrqr !
crfr q'iqr.fr rffiErdr dn1q-S I

{rfrfuq@tudqqqfdffi
r crFEr

IeyDqak whatareyoudoing?
I'm eatingrice, mother!
It's statedto rain. Now we
mustopenthe umbrella.
From themonthof Katik the
wealhsttsto fu adw cold

114 After doing something

The postposition-rrfu ater is addedto e past tensebaseof verbs,
wi the -e- vowel forming ajunction betweenthem, to mean:

qrscfu
\tqfu
r{ffi

scfu
tTqqfu
<raqrffi {T{rfficR
f;Kreq q{ |
a1-qrqrqTfuff{rqqr{{
+,eqtit

after eating
afrergoing
after saying
aftergening up
after being/becoming
After he had a nighanarein
the ni4ht"he could not sleep
agan.
Ater motherandfather have
died, who will look afte the
small children?

td{rqcrs,-6ra-rv*qr rk I wentout aftc I hadgot up

ffi
qrffiqEr<fu r in thepale early itawn,
waslredmy handsandface,
and bnshed my teeih.

Nore * In Nepali, one 'sees,a dreamor nishtmare.

115 Rememberingand forgetting

Theverbfr mean
s toforget:
6fr45{1ffivr*
qr .l.idS.+ dcrfrrrc { r
3nEf(frW{reffifuqr* ril
Cr*+rgr

Don't foget us!

Pleaseforgive me, I have
forgotten yout name.
Wy d you colte home late
fom school today? Did you
foget the way o what?

N-ore * also the expressionqrq-r cTFiA\ ! terally, don\ kijl

affection,which means.don't forget me/us' or .keepin touch,.

ft is also combinedwith the infinitive of a verb to meano fose

to...
r+rur;.f,+ar.6 uo4tnr{r
tq r

pleasetorgive me,I forgot to

*o',.*<*"-"+mqrr{ffi
1 #:,i:;"#,tffif;:
maid he fogot to ask
for a girl.'
Nofe * A proverb which describeshow in one's rush to set
somethingdoneone can often forget somecrucial ingrcdient.
If you wish to tell someoneto rememberto do something,you should
tell them nor ro forgef to do it, using +T:

+flc-dsffEAffiffi,fl

Afte you etum to England,

emember (don't forge) to
ra'rteus a lette, OK7
trTn-Hqr g{FIRT|t
Pleasercmembr (ilon't
r*crq I
fget) to listento ihenews
on theradio thisevening.
There arc two vebs that mean to ememb _ rIrE and sFgT .
t
Theseare usedin slightly different ways.
inRr d !

qK is a noun meaningnernory or recollec'on.One way of saying

that you do or do not emembersomethingis simply to state:
('to me thee is
Ifqr qr< g t
f remenrbe.
memory').
qfi qTEq I
I don't emember('to me
thereis not memory').
Il pracce,this constuctionis usedmost comnonlyin the negative
to statethat someonehasno recollectionof somefact or eventfrom
the past:
qffiTlr
qr4 {[r I

Thisis somethingthat
happeneda long time ago.
Peapsyou don't
errrember.

tdcrffi

In the constructionsthat use zlf(, the person who is or is not

remembering is passive. S/he is not actively remembering or
forgettingthe matterin question.But the verb {F1 is usedto mean
ta emembedrecallin a more active sense.As explained above,it
rarely occursin the negative,becausee verb fi ro forger fulfills
thatrole.
You
At lastI've rcmembered.
r< vr taco{3nqr{
rTl\' ft, E ?
said to comeat 6 o'clock,
dn't you?
6fr {ri { flfr
qt< qitq t

ffi

I recall my
Sometimes
weddingday an'dI smiJe'

The causativeof {T{! is RTs|-gl, which literally meansto emind.

Howeve,it is mostcommonlyusedto meanto explain/counsel:
{f <r d.rf qr{ rssqr qk My sonrcfusesto marqt.
Justexplain thitgs to him,
{F{]!1q I
wouldyou?

116 Beoe doing something: postpositions

beginningwith -r-<r
Thereis a set of trvo-wod postpositionsof which the fist wod is
-rK. Becuse -rrt is also used to mke comparisons (see
Grammar 51), these postpositionshave at least a vaguely
comparativesenseto them. Three of em mean before,and canbe
usedwith nounsor verbs:

-T<rsR
-r<I3Tfr
-q-<rflrI

befoe,Wuious to, ago

befe, Fevious to, ago
beforc, /levious to, ago

3TFnrqi{ s^qfuzRIqqT\rscr Tenyearsagotherewasn't

Frlms{qfqq{ |
in is pat
fl:ashop
v{ Rrt I<r c r qqqrqr qrqiI BefE19@no-oneh set

++fq{|

fmt on the moon.

Thesethreeposposionsare alsousedth verbsto meanbeforc.In

suchconstrucons,-sf<t mustbe addedto the dictionary form of the
verb:
pleaseemembr (ilon't
foget) to t3,keoff you
shoesbfore going
into tbe temple.
wvqv<r wnt<Mi(Ir * qifr AefuE going homeI wantto
rtrr <r6q lgive you ihisgift.
fc@
Wby dn't yoi washyour
r<rr
6n g4I
l6;Tuq.F?
handsand feet beforcgoing
to bed?
EXERCISE64 Translateinro Nepali:
.
rF<-<Fr*rr<rv@Elrc"'r
iRFfgRI I

My elder sister got married two weeks ago. Now she lives in
Dhulikhel (dhulikhel). Dhulikel is aboutten miles ftom Bhalranur.
Last Sundaywe went thereto meethe husbandandher new family.
To get to Dhikhel we had to take a taxi as far as Ratn pak. At
Ra Pak we had to board a bus that was going to panchkhal
(pcskhl). Dhulikel is on the way ro panchkhal.
After we arrived at RtnaPark fatler had to go into a shop.He hacl
forgotten to buy any presents(upahiir). you have to give pesents
when you are visiting someonefor the first time. Fatherhad to eo
into threeshopsro buy cloth (kpC),sweers(mifhf and bangl-es
(cur). Mother beganto feel worried becauseit had begun to get
rathe late. We did not know that it takes only one hou to reach
Dhulikhel. We did not know eithe that busesleave (chupu) every
hour.
After fatherhadboughtthe gifts we beganto searchfor the Dbulilel
bus. A man standing beside a new blue bus had besun to shout
(ksruu) 'Panchkhal! Panchkhal!'Father{,entto the;ffice to buv

ckots.Before father etumedtl the tickets I askedthe driver

if the bus would also go to Dhlel' He said t it would.
dlo said that ere was no questionof not going to Dhulitel
there is a good hotel there. Bpfore the bus sets out ftom
for Panchkhalall the passengers(ytnr) eat thei
meal there, he said. Suddenlyit beganto rain, so we all
& Dlaceto sit on the bus. After a few minutes ou joumey
began.

30 The map o Nepal

tMoutrtitrlI Ssqt
lTowd 4
Moutrtil 2 qIur
lTowtrl5
qFr{q{TT
Moutrtaial3
flbwDl
tTovl I
tRiverlA
Tracrs
B
qInFInt
tRivl
[Iowl 2
q{r
Rivl C
llowl 3

r+
z
o
Ir

o
3 t'q)
il
4l

3
qt

tt

o
{

In this unit you wlll loam

. about th gogrplryo
Npal
. how to usa bham to mn
cd td dt,t
. how to discuss ph!/sical
locdiong

fr{lfE
5rS{
t<FR
6!rm

T=^+
rfFl[t

nqT g<r qrErcrs{

as1 tq rqvqrailr ffi
ffi
ftfirr ffi ltt gf* o t
vqgar qvcsfuffi
cm{r Szr6 <Ig-{q rvtrcrr*e o r*a sfr fi ffi
( q{q qrndr
qca r< qc s r<fuurqr
rrrr qtr{ rq,tdT{,
q
rq-{
q
cfr furE*
frFmqr<r c{
qEF r TfFctfrmq e
lTr.d-q
ffi
ffifr <tg {c-t t
a-wrqrr( {drcfi r
firqmfu u*fr< q-flrf q dqr* +i-q-r
cl-Efq"rffi
trrfr'+l{tcRffrsfuonrq-<ds tsffdrtffi{ ccfr
r.w retrt+qfiq q-6q6 qfr sd vi{ qrcc sd qtrFs rqtr
gw Ef q f{snEs qd ffi tr{ qrqr
+.rs
vfrcrl-qsirdffi n-<
sfr{s qf.c s'{ ,rf cr rs cffid c qr efus rffiq,
ffi, q{T{ { t{rrflR mri+r sr{c{A t e<riqrcl* q ,
ffi, frsEt, q-cfr,qrt t qq qrqr{q qftrFFt
qIfr r{r *e rrdfrqfi-crrqqfi+{ffi6
|
a-<r$
q-<T
frrE fi-{Fqr qr q a-qq&, qrq-{Fqlq q {rfr Tqq r
efi-6rrfr, ercr < erevr56sefr vrq rff{qr++ d srrr qE
-d{(Sf-d+-qtqr6'*qrqq*qrqdr*furqqftr<rq{rqift

(qr
qrfirqfrr+ qrr{ 6 t aq{ s'R!
"-qErdRqrffi
rqrrr qTfrRE
@rrq {rT+dq | 'IIn qr+rq rffi rnqr{+
u;Fw{g1 cqqqr{qrvt",m qq rr{crdq#r, g1q,rm. frq.
arcrffr{ irwr q+tr fiqls qF{fuq I
qArS
{ ffi" * o rq e.rcrrvr,q-flg, q-q!i, qq-{rfi

:r-< "rfu
qqr dqrc+r
vr<r q.qr re-,6 v-q r q-eiqqt rrr .
q-Ers+
qq-ffi
<+{r srfr s 1q{ i-{r{qffi
wrcraa
ncr{rfod6ts{-{F qtauf qFq qfr fiET+rr@q{qm {rqR
I
S{ frTTT si-s +d'E ffi{ rr.dd{erq rfrq sqiff.
rrrs { +fr +{F rq-6.Eq!iq rqrqrcrfi c qd r.+t {rt!r
fr
qfdr{s Er*qr sf{r
r
a*
sqircr
crfr
cffi
si, cr rrqqs
iq
rqq rd r#e enFrqrqr+rffi 's r
crqqr qrEF.t +,cq gl- +-r q-f,rc ik avr{ vrql crfi
vt--r6 t<ISTtqrcq,

r qf+tr ffirR q64 16r qfr qr_qrtFTq.

gr t ui ffi6e-cr qi
-ficf{ ftq*,
T*Trm4p
-qqr abou
ffft-+ geograpJhical
fisfr fluablr
fud np'gbour
<ty nation
sg< aorlr
rR povnee
cqrsare

$ o"r

sfro soarl
frqnr border
t region
qr<.rf to cross,nayerse
irfl- land
qqdq level, flat
r heat
vfrcrlfrcr long 4go
i\q jung|e, uninhabitedptace
rffi agfculrure,farmragl
wqr to cut down
fr agiculare, fanning
cft-6 emaining

c\ animal, livestock
qr{ o rea
ErdFrTya[e/
\ to be l@ated
dmrw P2g4a2
rrqilrd polica
stFfft-d culural
q cerfi
r-{qr popdab,
<4 n inczease,gow
fr searc
<fun to go abroad
{qs{ hrrplace
tl( euo,fa
csq res
qa mids-Ed<fr?lieto-Bunaan
frre< pea&
-+Et+qr co4parad to
a4{IC @cry)ation
qH mary
\ among
cr rivs

t6& z ihe hill region

un gowiag dce, paddy
E oplan
af to descenil
q+ naize
Sfr uflo
aw goat

c-{m{"i,qpoar
ir$ te cold season
s{ the nfuy season
qt4{qq necessary

7+ tuck
qr car
mqFt nonee less

Look at the map of Nepal. From this you can discovermany

things about Nepal. After looking at this Nepal's geognpical
situaoncnbe undestood.
Nepal has two neighbournations.In e north is Tibet. Tibet
hasbeena province of China for 40 years.In the southare the
statesof India calledUttar Prdesh,Bihar and WestBengal.To
the eastis Sikkinn,andbeyond Sil*im Bhutan is also seenon
this map. But Bhutan is not a neighbournation of Nepal as
China andIndia (are).
If you climb from the border of southemNepal towads the
noth you haveto cossthreegeographicalregions.In the south
is the Tarai region.Neps alsocall this Mades.The land of the
Tarai is flat and ere thereis heat like northemIndia's. Long
agotherewasjungle herebut bout200 yeasagofarmen came
hereto do agicultue.They cut down the jungle andbeganto
famr- Now ere is only a little jungle left. Nepalganj,Biganj,
JanakpurandBirarnagararetownsof the Tarai. In e Tarai not
ory Nepali but also Maithili, Bhojpui, Awadhi, Tharu and
otherlanguagesare spoken.
Above the Tarai region is the Hill region. Here the land is
mostly uphill and dowill. The farmers go down to plant
paddy rice in the valleys, and clirnb up to plant maize on the
hillsides.They alsorearbuffaloes,goatsandotheranimals.The
large valley of Katbmanduis locatedin the Hi region. This is
Nepal's political and culturl centre. Becausethe population
has increasedgreatly in the Hill rcgion there is a shotgeof
land for agriculture.For at reasonthe peopleof the hils have
begunnowadaysto go abroadin searchof work. The birthplace
of e Nepali languageis in far west Nepal, but in middle and
estNepal TibetcBurman languagessuchas Newari, Gurung,
Magar,Lirnbu, TamangandRai are also spoken.

Aboye the Hill region is the Himalayanregion. Here one finds

the world's highest peaks, such as Sagarrnatha,Makalu,
Annapum4 Dhaulagiri.The populationhereis small compared
to the populationof the Tarai andthe Hills. The languageof the
people who live in this region is similar to e languageof
Tibet. They believe in Buddhismand their main occuDationis
trade.
Many rivers emergefiom e Tibetan border and flow toward
India. Among em, the Kamali, Gandakiand Koshi are very
important-In the winter little rain falls. Thereforetheserivers
are small in the winter. But after rain falls in the rainy season
all e rivers and streamsgrow. That is very necessaryfor
agiculture.
You can discover at there are very few roads in Nepal by
looking at this map. Many buses,trucks and carsrun on those
roads.None e less,most Nepalis still have to walk to reach
eir homes.
EXERCISE65 Answerthe follorving questionsout the geogaphy
of Nepal:
r qrd-{F d-{rf,{ rl;E ?
-r ffiqrsmd
{ er-dcrqI T{ t iqr{F drfuq ?
qqF
crETefirfi
rrq Tq Fq ;E ?

ef{crqT-{ Eiqr{,.srfq;q r
: T-]*5|-5*
E q
?
3-{Td-qrEqR^csr
T_'E-*
: qr
qr{fl
qq
-T
?
cr{EF{
6 r|.-q{6 ?

Grammar

The town of Lalitpu falls

within the Bapmazone.

118 Above, beloq beyon moe postpositions

beginningwith -T<r
A setof two-wod posositions,of which the first word is -r;<r' deals
with e physicallocationsof things,in termsof height,distanceand
soon:

-rqr qrFr
-I<t dnr
.TI<I T{

r.rF-<rrrrfE{ffi rcr,n$rqr
qrfu+*co rmrn$r<raqa
rirr6sq rwr<r ac{ r-6rr
qrfr *n r r

above
below
beyond, on the far side of
Therc ae no setllements
above our village. Above
ow village there is nothing
but foest. But below the
village there ae many
fields. We plant rice in the
frelds below our village.

Of cowse,bothqrfu anda! arealsousedasadvesto descibetheupmusttakeplacein e

and-downway in which muchhumanmoYement

Himalayas:
fu{F{r tc-{r{qrArf ffq-{|qr
qrrq qrfu {S' rq-Iq'"iT<r

+fuqrfrqngfu{e-d t

In the pale ealy dawn we

cmbed up to graze the
cows and goats. Befoe
dusk fell we came down to
the village.

17 Usingc{with locations

119 The use of rr to mean named

The simplestway to statethe location of somethingis to usethe veb

fo be, w,lchin the prcsenttensemust take its E form. However,
the verb cT, bterally to faLL,is often usedwhen e discussionof a
locationinvolves somesenseof direction:
ilfffirn$ffirlil{qri:
Whee (in which direction) is

r$ ir ,t" - participleof the ve EE o say. It can often be

translatedas calledor named:
qfffir-qrq
a snalltownclld llan in
rqrsE{
east Nq{,al
a stangeceare called
{fr${d?isr"fr
the Yeti
rerqgtrrrq-affi
a new studentnamed
Gita Khadka

your village located?

It is also usedto locateplaceswithin countries,districts or zones,in

which caseit canbe thoughtof smeaning fattswithin:

qlkFr{ {Fd{ IFrrRt3t-i[gT q5 |

Note the word order of the phrases above, Instead of 'a new student
named Gita Khadka', Nepali has Gita-Khadka-named new student.

1l The use of T to mean t rat

f is also usedto link a question,a fact, etc. with its content:
ffiqrkifffr<T{rdr

me questionamseas to
wch hotel would b
the best.
ffi rfl qmss+rq-r.dr I d notknow thatyou had
srTcrs{ |
cometo Nepal.
avr{fi' frr66'or-r wrn.qir I hop thatyou will b
well soon.
It is peaps useful to think of the sentencesgiven above as
containinga questionor an item of htowledge that is describedby
r, saying:
the 'which hotl will be thebest'-sayingquestion
the 'you had cone to Nepal'-sayingknowledge
a 'you will b well non'-nying hope
Ne-p is rich in proverbsger{, which might also be quotedusing

rc{{sr

*rgr ta-r c vre< r

eqr{ r

TheInoverb that saysthatoil

ds not cone from

o'qffi.*,u++ #!i,iiili*r,*^,
ur+ { f ven r

ffiqffiqrrsqrtr

hmour memsa ggeatdeal

(but) wealth meansashes.
Theproverb thatsaysihatm
insectd$r't how the
valueof amonils

tr

CL
1+

o
o

3
o
x
o

In this unlt you ll lam

. how !o us o hattual
past teso
. Nowto tl3e o)lgiong
maringdrir and
as soon a3
. hovvto talk about hopss
and do6ir8

Clgt aao habits

An old man tells his gandsonout how he decidedto give up
smoking.

Trfr aql{1;tcTire-1q-d-,{q-c{rr
.{r q{rrrF",q-de{ r"rfi-afrqili+furg-aurtor r
rfr ovr aa urgg.v r
qgrqr .f, $ era rd{TsEff,car1-afq< cqre" rq
qr qFe{ 16r fqqr q-iERqfr g'ra rfr or+vcd r

rfr

r'tffiqrwr{{fr

rrqr

. qk r* rq I kqff{. qf.a. {Rrfr qrq. eqr iq

rKiF qFq. vT qFnt<r 3Tfuqf{. rrn qrqcfu qrq r

ffi

gaur;l, q{rdr 2

qTiq !

n tgrR{r
Edr g-drrqqloqr-e+erqrd a<fu<Rqfu5a on +fr eru*r
;b, {r.R lqrr+qqqflqr q{qrd t+ r r,qr

rfr 3r{
Eretifr rsfr rri,
6*c+r vr vfu s e{ { qr+len<rd Frfr rec
+{rm r+F*qw{qrarvr +fr r.ccrr rqre<+q sqt
4{rq r6*dc-+d-{, e<+<-e@erc-<rr q<qffi v
qqerffis-+c qfE ri{ rnfrrFiqtcr
rfr ere-<r+qvlor +6i{d'rS fr, {E<qr!
qrfi-nqorr<ed,{|(qR 16
AgcET, Tq|qrfr sreg:rcr
t<,torgffis.eol ,qft s rr+rqr s{r tfiFq? qin
rqr-frqrr 13r
+'n graqtfr 1q
+{r s{fi qrqrcf
q_drrn*rrf,srffit{;qf qEb rr{ |
{rfr +fr ga er<ors*trr+,
Sr
qg-ar A,6r<'lq=q
r+ f'z qq\r+ -qR AKMfuq-q;8

{r6;rts' qrq fa rr5ior qtffi

ffi Ef qfqrrq q-{FI
r*ir
o14a rr |
i{. ct cf E".T,
{...
1ffit<tr+a-t<.qfgH,
ilfr d{ dqd sfi-{ r ga ur, f{{ t
{g.{ET , effi rr r qsrrec w6fr mera: r@tw
rqM |fufi-t T{r + - !
S any, some
1a eq o smofte cigaretes

rfi-rr.{ arnful
qF1 to want to

*A to take out
GriI{ to set lglt o
-<rft wri,le
T{mt dream
r decisior
fiqe arnbion
qfr habit
r({c ealrh

{a awet
ecec craving
clPr< tadion
cnd to naintain, foster
qt drstncr
FqrJ1 to bing
4 to go wrug, tn cornpted

Grandson
Grandfather
Gandson
Grandfather

Grandson
Grandfther

qh-r{flr{ qEr qrg I

rfr

+drr<n

eg<-qrr*e
qTl"q

rqcrq rrrd3rfr{-qqf f{t{ qr<eilf TE

| il{ 1'rc Ed + HT <.y+ ild-d-{-q,r

qFT qT ]T{{

GT| qTq I

rf arr{erffiurg6t, frr
{srcqr q.ffis{

Grandson
Grandfather

rr@r erq+ F rqsfuqmrnttsqriqd

Grandson
Grandfather

Did you smokeat any time, grandfaer?

I usedto smokebefore,now I don't. I quit smoking
about20 yearsago.
Did you smokea lot?
Yes, I smokedheaps.As soon as I got up in the
moming I would get out a cigaetteandlight it. Then
I would ink tea.But evenwhile I wasdrinking the
tea I had to smokea cigaretteas well.
In one day how many cigarettesdid you smoke,
grandfather?
Well, I don't evenremembernow! I srnokedwhile I
was walking, I smokedwhile I was sitting down, I
smokedwhile I was working in the field, I smoked
beforemeals,I smokedafter meals.I smokeda lot!
And what out while you were sleeping?
After I had gone to bed I would smokeone or two
but after you havefallen asleepit's a bit difficult to
smokea cigaette,Kancha.PerhapsI smokedin rny
dreams?
Well, I don't know!
And how did you decideto give up?
Your father hadhad an ambition to becomea doctor

ftom a very young age. He got a place at Calcutta

Univesity andhe wentto study.To bcomea doctor
he had to study for many yearsthe,but in the end
he becamea doctor.Affer he camehomehe began!o
tell me off saying 'Why does Father smoke
cigarettes?'
Grandson
But after he becamea docohe had to saythat, you
know grandfather!
Grandfather Yes, he usedto sayagainandagainthat the habit of
smoking cigarcttesis harmfrrl !o health.He use.dto
saythat I'd haveto quit someday.And within a very
few days after he retumedfrom CalcunaI caughta
coughandcold. And my lungsbeganto hut. At that
very time his motheralsobegnto tell me off, saying
'Why do you wantto die soon?''
Grandson
And you quit smoking,right?
Grandfather Yes, I hadto quil you know! And a few weeksafter
I quit I realizedthat I hadhad somebenefit.
Grandson
\ryhatsot of benefit?
Grsndfather My appetiteincreased.Before, I used to eat ather
lite rice becausewhile I waseatingI would cve a
cigette.But within a few daysof qtting cigaettes
that old caying waslost andI begahto at well.
Grandmn
But you don't drink alcohol,right?
Grandfatier
I dont drink alcohol. I never have. It's mostly
Brahminswho live in the villagesof this distict. Up
until a few yearsagothe peopleheremaintainedold
trditions.They didnl drink alcohol,they didnt ear
meateither, they didn't bring girls from outsidethe
disaict (asbrides),but...
Grandson
But ke you they also smokedcigarettes,no?
Grandfatler No, they didn't Only I and one opkeepersmoted
Apart fton us no-onesrnokedThe neighbourssaidI
wascomroted!
*
Noe \Vhen quoring what someoneactually said to them, Nepalispeakerswill usually refer to themselvesusing the Low or Middle
pronoun( or fcfr;.

Grammar
121 The habitual pasttense
The habitual past tenseis used to describean vent or acon tht
happenedepeatdlyor as a matter of habit or customin the past: I
u&al to eat,he usedto &ink, they usedto snoke.
Bass and endlngs
he habi al pasttenseof a verbin theaffnnarive is formedin a similr
way to e hitual psnttnse,asstout in Grammar 33. The verb
baseis exactly the sarneas it is in the habitualprcsent,but in the
hitul pasttensethe endingis simply thefir fonn of the ve ro
ba minusits 'i' vowl:
Habihral pastending
Ponoun ffifotm

q
frE
ffi
r*, Ar$-{s
fir{{
t
ffi. fdfi-F frq
s (m.)
fir
(f.)
fut
sfr (-.)
frS
frq
rfr (f.)
fr,fr,s+{F frq

becomes
becomes
becomes
becomes
becomes
becomes
becomes
becomes
becomes

Airnative formsln r1
Hitual pe.tent
rTE
rT
Ido"

qfi,e-{F ,rtr
qds
(
ffi,tdfl-F
s(m)

s( o

.6f'
{d
rT6

\ti | (mJ

.Pr
.TFT

fr,fr,s-fi-{F

1161

fr<o

we do
you do
you do
he does
shedoes
he does
s does
they do

.E
-str
-fu{
-q

-d

-fr
-
-

Habiital past
|TrT
I usedto do
.r"qf
we ased to do
iTfiis
you usedto do
,t"qf
you usedto do
{"d
he sedto do
.rf
she usedto do
IT{T
h sed to do
she usedto do
r{T
they ased to do

"tr

The negativeform of the habituaj past tense is very simply the ird
person singular negative form of e habitual present t rrta.
6fr<,
3r{ etc.) + the appropriate ending, taken from the st above. The
one exception to is rule is e form that is used wi rI I, which takes
the_"ending on to the frst person form (that is, 31fi instead of
3TiK{).
NgatiYe fonns
Habitual pesent

Habitualpast
I usednot to come
c-{rin
grfr,{rfr-{F
we do aot cook q-rqq we usednot to cook
qT6q
(
you do not eat
cffis you usednot to eat
frfr,fafr-{
you don't sleepl q'
you ud DottosltrQ
s(m)
Bq
he is not
he usednot to be
ITT<i
s(0
shedoesnot
T-{qt
sheusednot to do
q*
sqt (m)
they do not go
they usednot to go
frto
shedoes not cry
the usednot to cy
srQG
rq qi
they do notgive r<FTEI theyud nottogive

3rR I do Dot come

!s.

{fsffi

r"m

qI

Aftrnative negative forms

The same endingsmay also be addedto e altmative negave
forms of the habitualpresent(for which, seeGrammar 46):
Habihtalpesent
qqF
ldonotgo
frfrqT

Habitualpast
q ofq Iusednottogo

you do nor come ffi

{-r-!q

you usednotto come

High orms
The High forms of the habitualpasttenseare simply adptedforms
of the habitualpresenttense:
o In e affinnative, the habitual presentending -{.6 becomesthe
hitual pastending-qa,:.
. In the negative, e habitual present ending -F becomesthe
habitualpastendilg -6qr$.
High forms
Habibtalpwr
J:-L
els61r? youwclt
dcrtff
yottdont wat

Hitualpa*
dct5BGqr
dcr&-q

q6lqf.rrq

s/De @nles

{ffi3{g

s/E&rsnClr'

{dqr3.$q4

{d3ri!q

l,

youtdbwl
youud nd b watch
gIE ud o @rE
gludMtb@rc

The hitual pasttensemay often be translatedas usedto go, usedto

eat, usedto watch, sedto say arldso on. It cannotexpressan action
or an eventthat hashappenedonly onceor is pat of discreteseries,
g
becausethis is e function of e simplepsttense.For instance,
fl-6qffi r1fr nsanshe went to Kaihmandu,wi the sensethat this
wasa one-timeacon,whereass iqrTtd qld meanse usedo go
to Kathmandu,indicating that this was his regular routine at some
time in the past.
The following sentencesillustrate this differencefirther. Those on
theleft-handsiderefer to a specificeventor action,thoseon the right
describea regularhabit or truth:

qrffiqrqr{|dqrqr

qqrffiT{qrrrnrardr

I ate at a fiend's house.

I ugd to eat at a friend's house.

sq.ns.rq{ (ffi qr* t

o inrr affi qr;sd t

He went to the village and

drank raks.

He used to go to the village

and drinkraksi.

Althoughthe habitualpastis obviously a pasttense,the subjectof a

transitive verb need not take - in ttris tense unless it is being
emphasized:this is the samerule that appliesto the hitul present
tense.
rrffqrqfuF{"F{tqrd
? whercudch neto go to
cut gassduingE sunmer?
we :dnt need elecniciry
cftl:crgfrqrFd{+d,qt{
before,now we needit all
a qrFE I
of the me.
Up untl30 yens agomany
frqf qfu{qr<r$dqrqrF
qifq qq I
Wie usedto e malaia
in the Taai egion.
Kathmandu's envionment
5Eq5fiala1-6paqqrm o r
hasbeenspoiled.Long ago
oA-*ttE*tA*arr66i,
it usedto be verygod here,
they say.
EXERCISE66 Changethe following sentencesinto the habitual
pastense:
r^s.ftq+ 'o-q I
r {rTrdrf's|{{qrq
I T|qR'clEft {rl-5q {"{c |
q{r qf{qr5' 1
r frqrqgqfifrqrqqr,

s ftrfr rrradrr{ rq.ror q sffi

rrq.d r
<ra1qr+r {Tg-q,qcr Eq6'6 r
'.
rTTfi wt gqqr qcer cr+ f+& e r

Don'tlet you sonstoptaking

thendicine, orele he won't

oM
ffir cn org c1{q
q-df{+ &{ t

get well.

122 Finishing,stopping,quitting

18 While doing, immediately after doing

Nepali hasa numberof verbsthat meanto end,frnish, be completed,

stop,that can be usedonly with nouns:

Every completeNepali sentencemust contin verb, whosenormal

placeis t the endof the sentence.This is e mainverb of a sentence,
and it provides the sentencewith a tense (past,presentor future).
Sentencesmay contain other words which are derived from a verb
but haveno tenseof their own. So far we havernet two of these:
i thepasttensebaseof a ve plus-{t (or -or -+q ):
ii the pasttnsebaseof a verb plus -q{fu :

Intansive
<krr1 roend
to cometo a end
Elfit
(rTK fl o conc.lude
.cl l,lirr

to tE trusned

Transitive
-{qt
n frnish
gq{qNl
to bring to a end
ti +ff. .11
l+fqts

b Dnng to aconclusion
bn
sh o

t{
to stop,prevent
to be frnished
ru{|qqr qrr{ qnffi qTq trq 1 In theyear 2A07the Ranas,
qriqr rqw-*q eilq{r r r
regimended and
sem(rcracywis
estabshedin Neoal
qrsrd vrqr.qr{qcrR rr raqrffi Thatis theend of
ltq < " I
today'snews. you are
listening to Radio Nepal

Rfi1

grf,4r I

firq{ Er {q d ffiqr

many words,the Prime

MisEr's speechcame
to at end.
cc ffi r

B the Bhakap bus

desn't stopat mim brotlg!

The veb Ere to stop,leaveoff, qurr,is usedwith the infinive of a

verb to show tht the subjecthas stoppedperforming at verb. In
pasttensesthe subjectof 6|g;I musttake - if the verb is hansitive.

Two new words of is type are inhoducedhere.

s Presenttenseverb base+ -(ft wfuie...
the suffix -ER is ddedto e presenttensebaseof a vertt to mean
will happenat the
that the rest of the sentencehappens/happened/
sametime as that verb. It can often b translatedas while doing,
whlegoing, while eating,etc.
The endingis addedto verb basesin exactly the sameway as the -
ending is addedto basesto form e continuouspresenttense(see
Grammar 64): it is addeddirecdy to the basesof C-verbs,but when
a baseendsin a vowel at vowel must be nasalized:
Veb
rFT

_s_

Base
rt(

Sffrx
* srR

= .r{ft

whiledoing

-i-

+(frEl.

= Clqqlql<

wntE spearung

3TTiT +

+ q{g f?

+ ErR

= q'{FR

gFi

fiqr{rg q. ff{qr sqrs{q

qfrwq qr 6r I

Fathergave up smoking
cigarettes.
Becauseshehad to help
Mothe out at home,
Chamestoppedgoing
to schooL

3i l ql ql '

w U rc c oml ng

while going

Rt{ qi?Rftc id s|{'r {r t On my way to BhaktapuI'11

3nd qre,q fu{ srq { q-{ Seeinghishealth declining,

aa en arqrfr 1

_-_i!_--._.c:

*qr{ qrfrqr ffiR

sfifu 6 r

q$d

|Trat{rftrrs$ifi |

(gobably) meetyour elder

brotherWhile the children are
playing in the field thereis
peacein thehouse.
It is not good to talk
while eating.

This suffix can be added to the {- base of the verb o be, and also to
its 6 form; there is a sght differcnce in meaning between e two:
EClsl{

ilR

while becoming / being (in a defining sense)

while being (in a descibing or locang sense)

crfrT{F1a {arlft

min-r

l:rr,i I When people are becoming

old they begin to beeve

.crsfffiftqcs\ir r ,io#i*, ** ,^* r,

father ed.
lne -qtrEti suIlx ls often shortened to -fl,
meaning:
qRlg{ q-{r...
+ | |r r r + r Q f c 6 r

(t...

with no chanse in

b The - participle + -frRr assoonas

This suffix is addedto e - participleof a verbto meanlhat something
elsehappenedimmediatelyafter it. If the vertris transitive,its subject
musttake{.
lrffi
c-{:flr
As soonas I sd .pteaseeat',
TT{
lf efFlqqTg t.r{ qfq I
everyone
n eat
.began

*,*., o,"r"o

up the kulri, everyone

a<{fldFdfr,rqstrqqrqr #,i'

. +qfu1-qrs-fiI<T$Trfs

kqfu@rrfrfo-+

While going to Bhaktapur...

When people are becoming
old...

, I!#lY*"
ffi wn kkvva1q

and the probable future tense form qci

tnseforms qd I fu
rcspectively:
q+, +ta r While I wasa soler in the
n qrff{r ffi
qrrfu
r ftn- o
BnshAmy. I usedto
l'q
lTfficr.rScfuafuqt--{T{i
have to eatwith lofe, fork
andspoon.After you
have enlistedyou will
probably haveto eatin
exrctly thesane way.

*" ** *uo^,

qrrq r
Muna fell in love with him.*
* Muna and Madan
Note
are the eponymoushero and heroineof a
narative poem by Lakshmi Prasad Devkota (1905-59), first
publishedin the 1930s,which is the mostpopula book ever written
in Nep.

124 Will have to, used to have to

Combinationsof qdt andq- r t with the dictionaryform of a
verb to mean must, should, have to and had to re introduced in
Grammar I and lfi). It is of coursesometimesnecessaryto talk
aboutwhat someoneusedto hveto do in the pastor \hat someone
mighthaveto do in thefuture.In suchcasesriiakes thehabitualpast

qFTrq s$qr

Before the electricity

(supply) camehere,the
young womenusedto have
to go down to the river to
fetrh wate.

125 Wishing,hopingand deciding

In English, you say at someonewishes,hopes or decides o do
something.In Nepali,desires,hopesor decisionsto do somethingre
often expressedpassively,using the expressionqir {{, or acvely
by using e verb <rq o wart to (Grammar 110). However,there
is oneotherway of exprcssingtheseideasin Nepli, adthis usesthe
- participle of a verb to describethe wish, hope,etc.:
q"srd
b wishto go ('to b zgoingwist)
b havea d{lireto w ( 'a seeingdes')
.{
_
fqq{
b fuiah to wite('aodo a writingdecision')
af*ta q
n consi&r staying('todo stayingthought')
rs+rm.r!
ohory to g*Cto do a geuinghope')
bha'le at anhitionbbesorre('abcomingflnbition')
{qr+furrq
vrale ey wereliving in ow
housethey decidedto get
rmried.
r sRfu 6r.6qrsqri 5;6;1 4r'"166o- a young ageI
wantedto go to Kathmandu,
r fqE, qfq{ q qtr;rqq t
eventuallyI managedto go.
qnr I am hoping to receivea lette
t@tFr*scfucrs
q? t
from him within a few daYs'

TEr<rrr{rft rftqsfaqirr
fr il<+t fcC t

wi -q:
Notealsotheconstruction

cRcfrdtq

a book one shwld rcad

qE{T{ qF6

a Eson one shouldmeet

fifrfunF{{r'fr{ilr{qqi

I you wantta leam Fnglish

thisis the bookyou
shouldread.

arrqTqrtcriryfrqrtt

T If you needpermissionn go

frm*rfr{ r

I{q-{ qf Tcfff,

FT.qrm 1 |

to Mushng, thenan you

shodrMt is
LobsangNamgyal

EXERCISE67 Translateinto Nepali:

I used to ve with my mothe and father in a snnll town called
Panauti.Panautiis in the south-estcomerof the KathmanduValley.
I usedto studyin a small schoolere. As soonasmy agerached11
yesI hadto quit th small school.From that time on I hadto study
in a big schoolin a town called Bhaktapur.I usedto haveto take a
bus every moming at seveno' clock. Many of my ftiends usedto go
on that bus too. While we we retuming in e eveningu,e usedto
sing songsand whenwe reachedPaunatiwe were vey happy.
Below my housethere was a big river. In tle summermonths we
usedto swim in the river as soon as we got home. Sometimesmy
schoolclotheswere all wet andMothe usedto be atrgy.Shewould
haveto washthem assoonasI camehomeandit wasdiffrct to dy
(skunu) em. But becauseSaturdywas a hoday sheusedto let
me swim on Fridays.
While I was snrdying in the big school at BhaktapurI decidedto
becomea tcherwhen I was big. BecauseI hoped to becomea
teache I studied well. As soon as I left that school I went to
Tribhuvan University and nowadaysI live itr Kathmandu.Afte a
few days I will have to give my final exams(psrllf5). I am still
hoping to becomea teacber.If I am successfulin my examsI wil
haveto seek(khojnu) a job (igir).

o
o5
t+

0) qt
r
I
I
I

3
ql
o
-

ln i8 unit you will leam

. horfto use the subiuc'liv
oms of vobs
. hry lo uso @mpoundvs
with fd
. how to talk about tying a
sotching

Cl3Z Cancellingthe tea party

cr{fr qrs frS *qr qfuffiT{rrfr-{sfrc{ qr?il{es t

q sift-{Fs1srcaqq f+ r q rr qmq-+rtkj t
qrfrqrqqlr+R\r rrr qrtrqssRorrn r+rg{al-q T<
kcr-fu{r ttrFr.rfi<qrslrrq-mg {ddr rt{ er.*-g6ef*
ffi-qr;+wa I
**i66orrr<vkt rccrs{rcTscfrfr,
qr t rt{iiTfl{ rfrs{rqrtq?
crff sfrr-+qrFTe-qrqrr d{ il6 q rvfu aw{ wra+a
6rt
rqrsrtfr c{ rr<ftd 3lqrai-r<
!-{{qli<1.q
6 {l

vr q+q6 15f6qqg ewrcw "*vi' qa frqe ffi'

fi r

rwlst
wfr {,sryri rwrqfrs+rqr-tqrifrg

Like many middle-classurban Nepali housewives,Parva has an

older woman to help he wi her chores. On this particular
Wednesdaye wetheris againstthemqrC qrq +rq s r q8 kqr rd ?

weft g.of<,r+rq-ftq rk{r qrq{ q dcrldr\{qr r

irq {rqrfi{fi(rnfu$ t
vrfr* qqr fu6 1aft-dfr< <rfqtt{ r
t

ffi

ffi6'61q

criff
vr{
clifr
qrl

<rrqds1{q rvq'f61cir
5+q...rq,qr +E<rdra-qm<rfiskr
1-d
s.6-flf{ r g e +q-crqfE
dqft1fr{ r
+qrqrv.ff rqcr6rcrSt r

tG {*q rqeqq{ ssrtrf,qFqr

w&fr{.b r+ 'ret <ff r 16rsfrrqrqF{t{ lr{s-d qr{r{qr
q(frfi {&frq q rnqr-crqrq t
vr g-srvftfrcmSt
$ffi qffi 1q+qqq{slqql6qrffidT t
qq i{r rcrfr cr rci'irq rr t
.rqtr<qd r{ {Ffrri fr;a t rs
cr&tt.Erqrqq I q 3Tfugcr
sfi-esqrq t+ aqrs,lqrfiert q<firEq-q-Sft t
afr lavatory

ct{ trrst

qEt sPoon
<<rs drawer
nto search,look for
<q to bum, scorch
kqr-fum teaand snacfts
f{<qTTlo inv.e
qR stecles,we
Eiq garden

'

613+6T batfuoom
mct as muc as Posshle
q\lqfi inconvenience
rrq-+sr kicen
gat beoom
qwz untidy

q r moer! (an exclamation

of alarm)
qawl to frt, be acconmodated F{rsr saser
biscuitsand such ke T<rqla fo worry
tW nq.

What work is theretody?Shall I makeiea first?

Jai
Parvati OK sister, pleasedo make some.I'll tell you while we
dink tea.

ShouldI put sugarandmilk in the tea?

Jrl
Parvati Pleaseput one spoonfirlof sugarand a lite milk
Wherehasthe sugargot to?
Jai
Parvati Searchin the drawer.It shouldbe there.
Very well... Now, where all I put e ta?Shall I put it
Jai
on the table?
Parvati Might tle tablebe marked?put it on that cloth over there.
Vey well. What things do we have to do today?May I
Jai
know?
Parvati This aftemoon my husband is bringing some office
friends.
Will they stay until the evening?Shall I cook rice this
Jat
evening?
Parvati Becauseit's Wednesdaytoday the cook won't come.For
that reason,so that rvewouldn't haveto cook food, I have
told him to inte them only for tea and snacks.*\Vheter
he will rcmemberor forget I cannotsay.you know, don,t
you siste,what mn arc like!
'Well,
let's see.Peaps he won't forget. How many are
Jai
coming?
Parvatl I haveput two tablesfor them in the garden.I-ater, please
arrngeeight chais. I hope it r4,on'train today. There
really isn't room in the housefo eight pebple!
Certainly.In a momentI'll hveto go to the mket to buy
Jai
biscuitsand suchke, no?
Parvati Yes, you will. I have to go that way too this aftemoon.
It's go together.
Of course.Now I'l1stat cleaningthe house.
Jai
Parvati Fine. Take a look in the lavatory andthe bathoomtoo. As
far aspossiblelet thercbe no inconveniencefo the suests.
I'U be in thekirchen.
Shall I tidy the bedroomtoo?
Jai
Prvati It's not necessaysister. Everything's untidy. I'll tidy it
myself later.
Oh mother! It's aining. It's a disaster!
Jai
Parvati Don't u/orry. I'll phonethe offtce andtry to explain.Nolv,
nhether they comeor they don't, we haveto sit inside the
house.
No6" * frqr-fu{r Ea arrd,snack.It is possibleto add a meaninsless
yming word to cenain words 0omea and nings associabarftttii.

Grammar
1 May l?Ya{rs in the subiunctive
The subjunctiveform of a Nepali verb is usedin threecontexts:
to ask whetheor suggestthat you
might do something:
may I comein? let's washthese
clothes!
to expressa wish that something
might happen:may the weatherbe
good today! may you all be
successfulin yow examinaon!
in phrasesalong e lines of weter
it doeso it doesn't.
I NpaliAlDswaming

Nepali gramrnar provides subjuncve foms of the verb for all

possiblesubjects,but in practiceyou rarely needto know morethan
refour that are set out below.
4

Subjeet
tT

ending

, q , qt

-o5

,ft{

Qt+j t

-au

.R

\t.

-ll

irI

QS

qr

rs

crs

q t1

sS
t<!fi
rqr!

&

q
Qlv,'1

qll{
qFfi

lVi q land rfrwe the subjunctiveis very similar to the pobble

futue tenseminus its -qTending(seGrammar 96), exceptthat fl
to bkeepsthe base- in every instnce,evenwith rTf .
q (qrtdi sr T{r Vfl-& ic
May I tEIlyou of a complaint?
You won't be angry?
RvregEq2
g

qrfr{rieq5d{Ed{,

rirr:i."y_litentuernit

qrq-+qr-d c qlg sdq qrs

rE w( |

Branan's boy shall

no
eata
\ushMm
l:ihe

Noe *A pmveb. Cetin Brmans follow a strict dietay code,and

avoid garlic, onions,nushroomsandmany otherfoods.

EXERCISE68 Finishthefollowingsentences
with a subjunctive
verb:
r ffir{+ {r qt tr+ (be).
*fu {rfi-firf{q if rqro1g4r
r qr{-6aovrifr rnrror 1say)?

_:---=--cc-l !r 9l s 9rsrq'i 8.r9 r? ^I

wfuwff rvr{rcrsfafrr
fi-q r
<cqt

: 13rT1(F)

128 Trying and seeking

( q ffrl6- Ffr{ (come)?

The verb d\

q t q c n r q t | t 6 " || lr o

De l.

Will you sendtheefter

hnmediatly?
You might have to wait
a while. As srnn asI frnd out
I wiL|teLlyou.

hastwo meanings:

q
means to search fo when it is associated wi
DOnOUn:

q{+ q {{r q-rfrr nft

--5-:
i gtq?

:---!9t.l ts .t

-----i,
$tq| .t

crfi-{'T{q-F{Erefr
q-{rfr-{Frfr oqgq-ffiq|{-c t
an environmenlal
nsssage
omKa$manduMunicipal
Council

27 Doing something or another person:

compound vrbs with ftT
Any transitive verb may be combined with the verb kg ro gzve,
producingwhat is called a 'compoundverb,, when the action of e
verb is beingreferredawayfrom the personwho performse action.
Often this meansat the veb is beingperforrnedfor sorneoneelse's
benefit, or on someoneelse's behalf. In this context, e verb in
quesonmust take its 'i-stem', in which a sho i vowel is attached
to its pasttensebase:
verb

base

i-stem

-:
Tq

rRq.tq-

.rR
r
fu

:-j

compound.
veb
.rF<ffi
to do fo someoneelse
q
b inform
fu
to write for

Becausethe meaningof a compoundverb focusesvery much on its

posiveaspet,it mely occursin the negative.

enrtflQe+qrfrqrFrqmr

tuTrr

The deto wre out a

prcscripon for us.

g t!

a noun o

Wherehasthehousekeygot m?
Despitesearchingall day I
could not frnd it.
I waslooking for their house.
Thenthey suddenlyurived
heetoo.

mears to W to when it is associated with the infinitive

verb:
qqt{qr<sTrrfrqrFx

of a

I tied againandagainto get

a govemmentjob, but I was
every time.
unsuccessfrtl
qdqfffis{Fitrm
I tied to phoneyou but the
q6aq-fiqffiffi1
line wasrealLybusy.
An alternaveto q is the verb dlqnr qt, which ci be usedin
combinationwith e infinitive of a verb in much e sameway as
q ts'!,or on rrsown:
sts{fil(

<qt+r-f+ewrr(t

**t nfo nao +A*

*a
"fA* {E,d-{
ilr
\d Eiii q",(.+
qq5{
E I
fiRv
Arffi fu qrs 3Tfrq'a-qr
6<tr,a< lvm nttr |

I did ty to leam Tibetan,butI

I didn't have
failed because
thetime to study.
ft might be a bit frcult for
s o come tomom)w but
we will ty.

D33 A deathin the neighbourhood

Oneof Sita's neighbourshasdied. Shetells Manju how it happened.

@ c ilr{r qe-arqqn cr +fr{, fr r ffi q56rof+

r
tr={.-{.rsdt fuErqk s{
n-drfi, q ffi
sa ffi
oNrr e-sr(srrr sq{r{ ficFr q{ {s{rd Eqs 6
r dr
rg e,fuFr< ffi t{+Q6 dqri+ffiff r qo s I
fi -crqsdn $fr v-{t'i sr<it | il{ fffi{r gs'-ar
qqFlsffit
,
rg q rdqni3{k qqqs Tqzu,frT
+dr f{, m ,rf < r s ec qdt fir q-qfl qfr r
fir{ rerqfrcEr rrc* qct q st qfd r{ s<qrq* q
d rsq-+qrr qnfiqrq{ qAq', qsr< r
rg weftgQ"tr,wt
-cr1 v vq a efr cfr gt vfr {ae rm qr.+fr{ a'Sfr
w <Qor ere<d w+r*{den (ffi qrd ttffi lqre-fi
qffiqrcqs e cs-frq-+rqf frs f t
T{ Ea-dw,Rrq+6 ?
$r qrqfdEriq{rqrqr
rgird fr r+fr s qs6 I 3lfusqrrqnr
{q ftqrl qr{qd rm fiq+{ rq nrr vtrfi erctfl E
t

31.'

II
{

+o
CLo
s,o CL
5 r+
oo
o
{
*q

q
r'
{

Ir

II

II

5
-

t+
Ir
J

i{FFNT I

rg eMtrriQo1frt
roqfqacfi rgqqs r{dt<rd
+dr6Hfc-{rsdq
gn fircts-$'* r
{r"{rd -rr@
lrq
rg e<v<n avd sfi{r{ e1fi-d rBi 6-* q-sffi
6 t{. 8 F. ss qrqmr<ewfu6 r
In ls unlt you wlll leam
. how to say that lhin have
drady happen6d
. hor,yto constuct unrl
condionalsonteces
. how to colrylhs soEe thd
sorring has iust been
Ia[zod

@ to know, be acquainEdwith
rqqft-< jaundice
frfre gravely, seriously(i11)
\Ql to remain, be
q6- n exatnine

rnfu peace
g:E sOIDlY

WR accodingto
q+l eady, untimely
<q-dtrr< crezaon zfe

iz meeng
-qrq oim4gine
t it woulil have beenall right
qrqrsotd
Manju

ar, how big?

a young woman
v<n offspring
qrsd o elp

I saw you going to the hospital yestedy, did I? Ate you

ill, o what is it?
Sita
No, I ent to seea man I know from the neighbourhood.
The other day whenI met his sonin e markethe saidhis
father had contractedjaundice andhad goneto hospital.
ManJu Oh is he seriouslyill, your neighbour?How do they sayhe is
now?
Sit
As soon as I reachede hospital I askedthe doctor who
exaninedhim. But the poor man had alreadydiedjust two
hourseadier.
Ma4iu Oh. If you had gone two days ago you'd have seenhim,
no?
Sit
Thafs right, but \rhat to do, indeed?I had never even
imaginedthat he would die quickly like that. If I'd known
that I'd havegoneright away.It would havebenbetter if
he hadn't died at suchan age.We must say .may his soul
fiid peace',what else can we say, er all?
Manju So the man wasn't so old, eh?
Sit
If he'd been old then it wouldn't hve been such a sad
affair eier, you know. But the man is only 35 yearsold!
According to e doctor, he usedto drink a lot. If he had
taken his medicine and hadn't clrunkalcohol he wouldn,t
havedied suchan untimely death,you know.
Manju Has the funeral ceremonytakenplace?
Sit
It took placeat Pashupaearly this moming. How quickly
it hashappened!If therchadn't beenwork at the office my
husbandwould have gone.But it lvasn't convenient.This
eveningI'll haveto go and seehis wife.*
ManJu How big are the children?
Sit
I hink the son's alreadymarried. The daughter'sa young
woman already too. Nov, poor thing, that woman has to
arrangeher dughter'smarriagealone.
Ma4iu But if shedidn't havechildren it would be evenharderfor
her, you know. The son's grown up alreadyyou know, it
doesn'tmatter,he will help his mother.

Note * Among Nepali Hindus, it is unusualfor a womanto ttenda

funeral.

Grammar
129 Aheady done: compound verbs with {t
The verb {fq hsbeenencounteredbefore,in combinationwith the
ininitive of a verb, whereit meanscanlbeable.However,e same
verb has the secondmeaningof n frnishlbe complebd Its i-stem
form vf+1can thereforebe usedinterchangeablywith the verbivfr1
to menolnis:
srrw++rq qf-{fr r
Today's work is inished
t
Yesterday'slessonis still not
@crurrqfrfuM
frnished.
The i-stem fofm of any veb (seeGrammar 69), whethertransitive
or intransitive,may alsobe combinedwith sq to emphasizethat its
action has alreadybeencompleted.The compoundverb consistsof
e i-stem of the veb + qq, vritten as a single word:

ccffir
cfrfls{ffiffit
eqqftaq{ r

I havealreadyrcad.
You had alreadycome.
He is alreadyasleep.
He hasalrcadydied.

Becauseit sevesto emphasizethat somethingis over anddonewith

when it is the secondpart of a compoundverb, the veb (q almost
alwaystakesa past tensein is context- usually this is the simple
past o the completedpast.For e samereason,it is rarely usedin
the negative.The completedpresenttenseis also sometimesused,
but often its meaning (as already...) is conveyedby the shorter
simplepasttense.
In Nepali, compoundverbswith Qq areusedmuch morecommonly
thanthe Englishtranslationa/readymight suggest.In a contextwhere
an Engsh-speakermight say it's becomedark or he has left, a
Nepali-speakerwill often sayrivr v{e+ it's alreadybecomedark
ands rF{tfd e's ateady 1.
a a-{rF{Td f r flfiI <-{ But I am alrcadymarried,you
qqi
|
know. You don't needto
seekfo a bride i me.

qrq rqriq Eqrrr{si r3rd I've abeadybeento the

T-f qt rcq !
ministy twice today.Let
-er.!r{aq qfucffii r
3 erwnr1'+rr* vffiffi
tr+vqaqvnr

ne not have to go a third

timenow!
I ead thatnovel a long
time ago.
After haveread any novel
onceI eally don't wish to
readit a secondtime.

130 Unrealconditionalsentencs
Unreal conditional sentencesstate that if somethinghad been tJre
casein e pastsomethingelse would havehappned:X it hadnineit
I wouldn't havegone out: if it hadn't nined would have sone out.
Suchsentencesare 'unreal' becauseanyonewho uners,hen, rcads
or \ryritesthem knolvs that in fact the reality tumedout differcntly.
The 'if clausemustend with a combinationof the -d participleof
whicheververt is involved,followed by the ot -e paticiple of the
ve l o be,i.e. -\r (. If the verb is negativeit takestheprefix t-.
Regl condition
Unrel condifon

cftc-{...

crfrc:{q.

If it nins...
$ qrq q|...

E it hadrained...
s qr+ s...

Ifhe doesn't come...

If he hadn't conre..

In general,the forrn -g vg is used no matter vho or what the

subjectis, rcgardlessof number,gender,or level of politeness.But
occasionally,if e subjert is felt to deserveespecialdeferenceor
politeness,e High form consistingof the dictionary fonn + rg
rI{ is usedinstead:
ilr{qrTrq...
ac E T.Td trS...
If you go-.
If you had gorc...
ffirg qr{qq r...
il i-qrdrd qC...
I you don't 9o...
If you hadn'tgone...
The secondpart of an unrealconditionalsentenceusually endsl,ith
a veb at is exactly the sameas the habitualpast tense.However,
e meaning of this tense u,hen it is the conclusionof an unreal
condionalsentenceis very different:

we usedto eat grndr0,kin

that restaunntIf we hadgone into that
a q{qr q\r rq qr-{ {q-d
qr;g t
rcstauantwe would have
gund.ok.
"ur",
In fact, e final verb of an unrcal conditional sentenceis actually a
shortenedform of a tensethatconsistsof the - participle+ fir- The
secondof the two sentencesabovecould rcad asfollows:
t

<-$+rfi-{g{qrq

t{d

q firq |

that lastawantover thee

we wouldhaveeatsnganu<

This tenseis lsousedon its own to talk aboutintentionsin the past

- usually intentionsthat v/erc not frrlfilled:

qqlr{qrqr fuq r

I wasgoing m climb / would

have climbedEverest.

This sentencedoesnot makeit clea whetherthe spekeractuallygot

on to the mountainor not. When the samephrasebecomese second
half of an unrca1conditionalsentence.however.it becomesclearthat
he did not:
S qq+ qq q $rrqr q-qfE t x it hadnot snowedI would
haveclimbedEveest.
The meaningrcmainsexactly the sanrewhenthe shorterform of the
verb (the habitualpast)is usedinstead:
frtqqqqqvrr<{rErrd

If it hadnot snowedI'd have

climbd Evercst.

qftqr Sqcffiinfi
fi-As f+-d t

tI'dhad any money on me

for
I'd havebatglttp*nt
ttu funily.

ilrteWfi"fiqTravvq
vt5dt

If you had said that thing ia

Englishhewot ilhave
mdentood-

qrq qr

riq qqr *rfl6< t

srfrflrqqrqcStrgckd

I the sunhad shonethe

chil&en would have
played outsi&.
t I you hdn't eaten stalerice
your stomachwouldn't
be hutng.

EXERCISE @ Match up the beginningsand endsbelow to ceate

five unreal conditional sentences.Translatethe five sentencesinto

English.
r qqrl+ il rq...
r cffic rc...
q-{rsqi(tEF rd qq...
r qrfi ffirqr
{s...
I sr* fl-e
{C...
'n*

...q-{qrSfrm I

...cfrCsrreqrt {r r

<qrtqr <re r
Yclurholirse
is nie.

...qqfffiRqMl

...qgrg{tlT|-{{qr

Simple stetememts

... q qq|Iq rr( qTd I

srqrcrr+qr o r
Tfue is a nn in hishand.

acffiq-q-{dr

You en hat fuotE tall

qfrqrtsrr

Thae is m ntaneyin my pket.

Reotizations
aqrT{<rfr s !

Wv. you houwis nice!

sq+'rdqrs-{d {6 !
Hey, he's got a gn in s haDd!
dq+rrqTqiE
!
Why,yott so.nhasfuow tall!
If{T@<rqqq ag-{6 !
Wlry,rfue'srr@rt,/ryinnyrpdf6!

131 Theshort completedprcsenttense

The completed pesnt tense is explained il Grammar 77. In
everydayspokenNepali, this tensemay takea shotenedfon, patly
becauseit is rather longwinded.After all, why use five syllablesto
say 'I've done' in Nepali when you needonly use three?The short
fomx of the completedprcsent tense are also used to imply t
someing happenedsuddenlyor unexpectedly.
The sho form of the completedpesenttenseis simply the full form
minus the final - of the -g participle that is the first word of e
pai. The two words of the frrll form becomea single word in the
shot forr:
Full form
{ig
efi-6s*I\rrr6{
ilr{rrq*o

133 The verb t to knowlrcagnize

This vert is usedexclusivelywith hurnannounsas indirect objects.
In the habitual presenttense it means to reognin while in past
tensesit meansn be acqnaintedwith.
aq g' fiaffi
'i{ff6 tq,
Do you rccognize that
| Aq qd 't
Iorson? No,I iton't.
Who is he?

Sho form
qlTs

{3ffiqf
-tf+tn1"*"**

dS"Sq

q*ccr<, fcffi<rfrdrrffiq

dqr$ $rrq6

:132Realization:usingi6at the nd o
aentenoes
QE is tle srortfonn of <{ 6, the compleledpesenttenseof tlrc
veb q b remairconrrnuero be.<{o can be thoughtof as an addon word-similarto fret (Grammar 92), althoughthereis a difference
in that {{F must takethe placeof anoer verb, andcannotsimply be
to any statement.i6 or its negativeform Q6 may be
usedinsteadof g, , or fi at the end of a sentenceto indicate
that e speakerhasjust realizedwhat s/he is saying.It has no eal
equivalentin Engsh,unlessit be the exclamationmark, or the oldfashionedexclamation'why!' with which an observationcan begin
in Enesh.

If therehad tuen myone

ihere ihatI knew,I'd. have
mld hin/her.
t Beware,I knowyou
very well!

EXERCISE70 Translateinto-Nepali:
Today somepeoplewe know are coming to ou housefo dinner at
6 o'clock. I rcturn home from the university at 4 o'clock, but the
houseis ernpty! And I look in my bag to seeif the key is there and
the bag is empty too! Wherc might it have gone?I searchin every
placebut I carmotfind the key.
he cook shouldhavecome at half past 3 but he has not come yet.
Perapshe has alrcady come to the house and then gone to the
maket. If he had stayedin the houseuntil 4 o'clock this problem
would not haveoccurred.ShouldI brcaka window to get in? Or shall
I go backto the universityndserchfo e key in my offrce?I don't
know. s'hat shall I do?

Oh, now the cook hasarrivedandhe hasthe key in his handl If I had
bmken(sE ro rea&)a window my husbandwould haverelly rold
me off!
It is alrcadya quartepast4. He opensthe door for me. Shall I phone
my husbandand tell him to comehome soon?No, there's pmbably
no need.The cook has alreadybought all the food and now he will
cook it fo us.

+ 1+
?l

rl

II
{

rr

i'a
I
I
t

{r

qr
t+U

o
Ir

o
=

ln this unlt you will lam

. some vrseso a Npali
olksong
. how to intensifythe action o
a vrb
. the longrcontinuoustenses
. the shot ral condional
snt6nce

D3+ two portersand a folksong

Mila works as a porter in the hills. On his way home one day he
meets anotherpoter, and they agreeto keep each other company
along the way.

tTRqrg rr, qrs ffrrfr{ 2

flQtrqrE E{ft-{ E r
r+Rqrsr{ T{ r
qrfl@i-ffi,firrr
trf<qr q|-qr{k|@
r
qr-flcrq1ar+qe@@r
TRqr+fdqqnF{
+<< gofr rwfrr

rrrFdilfl * rrrcEs$l
f@d fu( rfr6r c uffia< rrq6 |fi-{F+
src-, Ril{drq-S rqf t
rrRqrq,i{ rrsdcfr ( Erqfu\.sr rq-qiara
qrfr t
qrdro,twd6 rffitTrttE QE to ec({rr
:rRqrqsqlT{,{ ( rrsr 6 rs{r-sdrvr{+ { t
qrRitrqqrrr+rgcr. r+q+erq{r, qFr o. ffi
dz{
q
q+ fuqrrrgqr< r
vR+rgo, ss rerd ceiqr' Iq+rfu<qcl--6fr?
rfi{F s rq<cfE{r s{ rq
fifuor{fiq, u s{ aq-qre
C-scr
q
fl.or,
ffi
T{
fd ?
dtt", {...
dr +<o,qr{ rfd-{<t
qrRtqr.{lrs c{ cr crfi.{rg{ F+oI s-d erq {r s, rffi
freier' r
r reqre fr <r*,q fr{ qrg6|
rqtsfiffi
r e, vrfr ft@q rcdqr{fr {rfr r{fil6qrco t
qre(rq,
rfrffi fi-ornecqr$6r
s{qrsrs-{qTfi-d-rns-{q-$
+r qlto crs rrr|$er q.q-*i-qc r
t{qfsftft,{cfFftR
q{ErSfd eterqrrqrfr,sq fuftR
1g<rqSrtS,ffigfr
ffiarqrqrfrFdMcrTq
sqfrftR,wtuRft
q{qr$fs etsrqrqqrf, sq fsRft
e-+aw*q+ gtrr eg f{qr +
Trd qil,r{ qrqmsrd
irqfrRR,sqfsRfr
e<qr$fq etsmrqarf, sc fuRft
qrkqrs srrgcrfi oqEM a taqrq tffi sffi
fs.qt q
r

-crk on the far sideof

1qc ctubken
<r fear
ffi
ca
qrcr love, affecon
++Ao4 arp
Tfi{qd to res ( ito kill weariness') frf< love, affection
c right hee
ffi
crossnra
-< aear
wt s'ngle-harr.lred
qTf gun
tr jug, st*I cup'
\m sik (hnilkerchief)
<ffi double-baneeil
fn<ft rippling (in the breeze)
Tt der
s-{ ofly
rq oalrn
eer hill, ridge
sq to ca , invite
cqr Pass
Pocr
Mahila
Portar
Mahila
Porter
Vlahita
Porer

Oh broe whereare you going today?

I'm going homeoday.
Where's home?
The oer side of e Trisuli river, Phedivillage.
Wheredid you stat ftom today?
Early this moming I set out from Nuwakot.
lt's a bit frightening when you walk alone, you know.
Have you no companions?
Mahih I setout with somefriends,but ey havegonoto Dhading.
Their path wasin that direction,mine in this. What to do?
Porter Well, if that's how it is your path and mine are the same
from hee. Let's go togetherftom herc.
{ahlla OK, it will be pleasant.Your load is big. What is in it?
Porter There's salt, oil and cloth in this. This is a load for a
businessmanin Deurali.
Mahlla I'm tired. How hot the sun is, don't you tbink? Let's rest
beneaththat pipal tree fo a moment.
Porr
Yes, let's sit dow!. How thirsty I am! Can we get some
water somewherehere?
Mahila Look, there's a boy coming from lower down. His house
will be nearby. I'll ask... Hey Kanch4 where's your
house?
Boy
It's just nearhere.Why do you ask?
Mahila If that's so, can you bring a jug of wate?The sun is hot,
we are thisty.
Boy
No problembroer, I'll bring it.
After five minutes:

Boy
Iahila
Boy

I[shila

Hee, take the water.Oh, your friend hasgoneto sleep.

Rigt, we'll hveto sing a songto wakehim up. Can you
sing?
Yes I can,brother.Shall I sing en? Right, listen to me.''
Silk (handkerchie| rippling (in the breeze), SiI}
(hndke.rchieOriWlins (n the breeze),*2
Shall I go lying (over ihe) hills anil Passes? Silk
(hmdkerchie)rippling (in the tueeze).
(Sayind 'llr llt' to a chicken,(saying) 'mri' to a cat
Your love aful my love, waiting at the crosxoads.
Silk (hanikerchiefl rippling...
One-barelleil gn, two-baneedgw, aiming at a dee,
It's not a fur that I sa aiming at, it,s love that I ant
calling.
Sik (handkercef)nWling...
Oh, this brother has brought some al. f have drunk
some.You wee sleping.Wi you drink?

Nore*' he boy singsa few versesof oneof the mostfamousNepali

folksongs,w frRft. Like many folksongs,ct fu'RR containsa
lot of wordplay that is difficult to translate.
*'It is an old tradion for young men and women to exchange
handkechiefsslove tokens.

Grammar
134 Gompoundvebs with q
Whenusedon its olvn, the ve q meansto inel Put in.llm y be
comparcdto the veb Tq to plaupou keep.In facq tt{ is felt by
to be a more polite way of sayingroPu fu' so
someNepati-speakers
at onewill hearsomespeakerssayingq fiilfi Fq-fiefrk$ c s/hal
I ptt sug in iheEa?andotherssayingt kqrqr ffi qfuk$ I
lVhen it is combinedwith the i-stem of a verb to form a compound
verb, however, qtq simply rcinforces and undelinesthe senseof
that ve wiout changingits essentialmeaning.
s{E{rt

!r

it's hryend

q!'td

he's gone
away
it's over and
done with

eqrqrrq Jzousaw

mrt6rXrfr

srs{r-{ffi6a
.re-(,Tdf{t
avr@qr*n-{a<r
i qr

qccfu Trd f{
ft-ffarv<rC<q

you have
surcly seen

He dn't staylong. Aft

thtEdayshe wasgone,
you know.
You have seenvey we that
thercis a [nn'et cut hee
every day
| After threeexamplesit's
over and done,you know,

EXERCISE 71 Convert the tenseof the following sentencesftom

an habitualtenseto a continuoustensewith <{{:

Exanples
q ci5{qr rq rE I
q qfr{qr 6rq IFT

q sfusqrFrqqfri q I

qsfus{rflq.rftEfrfr(r

r sfi-{Es-{ffitfrl
rq1q{ir 11gTftrrffi |
I r er6 Ssr6-ffr qFE I

r 'rfi-qrc
r{crecrtec+rfrqnfut
I qzrtqrefrffiwsqff<<vrd
r

135 Continuoustenses using 16{

136 Short eal conditional sentences

When usedon its own, the verb ({t meansto rcmain, continue.It is
frequently combinedwith the i-stem of a verb to form a compound
veb that emphasizesthe continuousnatue of an action. he -q
participle of such a compoundve is used to form continuous
tense:

he -c participle consistsof a veb's pasttensebase+ the vowel e or

(anotherway of looking at it) the - participle minus its -fr.

a-e@q rrrcrrfrr+r*r{rq q
g*n @ q ra *n

Loo&ro4 ndayI n
writingthissuggx'on
for

+fr<.vn
vftrs ertr{ r "tlfl;*

it {q qrq rm
fqqtrc1 t

v saffi

wvr+ cl6u g<-+ w

+-frq lflqEaq

5oggorr@
qEd$q B
qFTqq{Q{
EI

**,

thesamekind of suggeson
at exactlythistftre.
But no-oneis givin! this
matte any atbnon.
I wastnking of writinga
textbookof the Nepati

r tngrage.(My)friends
wercEuing me not to
write (it). EvensoI begar to
wn I un still twitingt rcut

Becauseof e greaerlengthof ese verbs,they are usedinsteadof

tbe other continuoustenses(rrg, q ffi eft.) when the is a need
to stressthe continuousnatueof an activiw.

Grammar 91 explainedhow to constuct a al conditionalsentence

by using the simple past tenseof a verb followed by v for e 'if
clause,and a presentor futu tnse(or an imperative)for the 'then'
clause. A second quicker way of expressinge sarne meaning
rcplacesthe ve of the 'if clauseth the shot { paticiple of th
ve, andleavesout the word . For exanrple,compae the long and
ort versionsof the sentencesif it nins I wn't go ottt d if it
desn\ nin I will pmbably go out:

Longversion
srffq-qcEr(sft-{ r
cffr c-{c q Ef{{E+{Tr

Sho version

wfr raf6< uRat

qfff nq q ET(qfrr r

Often, e -e participle witi te followed W q, thatgh, but, ro

underlinethe conditionalnatu of the sontece.
qFffifr rrd {ggT6 |
A tle ice wi be enogh('l
thereis a licle rice it
will suffice').
!{ q e qss r {{ r
If you" hungly just eat,
younge bother,
siqs e fd{ {fr dfr
But if theeis no moneyhow

d-fiqfq6,qrfifi6-,o

wiII wepay the11?

t ItisoK if you spak
English,andit's oK if you
s.['akNf{,alitoo,

EXERCISE 72 Create one sho real conditional sentence from

each pair of sentencesbelow:

q)

Examole

crft ci tqfl|q<qrftr
r = crfr r q qilt{ q{r r
r + qrrc tc qEr nGfiiqr I
I qryq qrfr lqqr{rcTrfur r
r +raqrg E{ rr q+ qiq r6rfi++ {S{r r
I qFfr -rff.nr qr{n r-t tg-m qfr'rr q|' lflqrff fo{r I
r rq+ffi{r|{rqq-ilcrqtrrqrI
tsrT|.{ iqr I-

ft

tt

EXERCISE73 Translateinto Nepali:

I went with elder bother to the airpo yesterday.Someguestswee
coming fom Delhi to stay with us. Early in the moming we had
phonedthe RNAC office and a womanhad saidthr e Delhi flight
would arrive t 3 o'clock in the aftemoon.'If tht's the casethen we
mustsetout from homeat2.30', saidelderbmther.
As
as we arrived at the aiport elder broer askedan official
"soo^n
({I|itF
abourthe flight. Tbe official told him rhat it had left Delhi
ony recently becausee weatherhad been very bad. .In at case
how long will we haveto wait here?', elderbrotherasked.'It is flying
(udnu) towardsNepal now', the official said, 'it will anive within
onehour.'
'The aeroplaneis late and we will have to wait here', elder brother
said. 'But motherand father are waiting at horne', I told hirn, ,They
do not know that e plane is coming late.'
'You go andphonethem', elderbrother said. 'Tell em at we will
come straighthome after the planearives.'

Gadinalnumbers
Tc
!

s
at.1

qir
l,

gql{

r gfit{$

n {r

r {r{

{rkr
qt6

ts *r

s qfrs

TI(
t(
tu
tq

1r

r<

TT
*
vjt
16r{

rr sqrsir

r. frs

(q
It \.{rsq
k? q tg.
k t79r

"-l
E

c-:-
tztl cl

c r.|ql

qs.

l(

qqTq
Eq-I

er ffi
,{ fu..&

n.tg.-1

3u

3fI3Fr

w&

t.l col

q {I
E ( g.tE n.

& {rt

t qdfr{
ir dftv
rr qfrir
i 6frs

e dfr{
< sd{
n g+qrfrq

u{

rz Qn1

us +{fi
rrk Tft-d{
t{qfi
uu (i{l{
uq 3I5{-d{

s d-qffrs
sRrqffr{
ei -qffrq
w q4-frq
e!E frtr
s{ Errffrg
8u {{.Effrt{
s< {qtfr{
&. q=RI

i. ftq

a \-6{.& '8 q{{ff{

-_ ------,
qt|cl
ur '{{ff{
{<

la

k{

q{r
d(T
{iTrt(I
{-5q

CL

cr rrr

sr \16r{

<1 ffi

re dqr;r
18 q{r{

.k cqrfr
6{ffr
qm{
"u
cq sfl{

{E EiqF

ru <r{
({ 3q1q{

r.. wI

o
o
a
IT

Above 100,thenumbersproceedastheydo in English,but omitringthe

English 'and':
r.r
1
r.."
rs1
!.r.q

qr{q \rf
g(qv'c:&
\r;FQqRorQER
{qr{qr{sqfu
r+eqRsfigqqr

. .. . .

|t.n qt(E

nqsi
F--

<n w frv
+vre 6 5wr<
frsFlrq

( . ... .l {cn 1 |

If commasareusedto split up largenumbers,theplacingof the

commasreflertsthesystemof QqR, qrq, and -s, mrer tlar
lhousands
andmillions. For exarple,thenumbe31,350,226
u/ill
appeaas:
la,k.,( fr{ fe irq c-{r{ qR R{q ds

Kinshipterms

gfrer

rfl
Yorrgerparrle

1g
Pb.ut

qqt

ElCeparcl

Fr qrrr

{rfi

rcrq

qE{

<q *frfr ws
""{

*t

Wfe
E bo. Er. ss.

gert

qrEr

erq mfr w

S5F

Er.sis. E.brc. Y sir. Yr. brc.

,te

srftqr

Mat.uncle Mat. aunt

qFTT
qfih{

Wfe's wfe's
Yr. sis. Yr. bm.

sR<E q!{Eqr{cr

qrFt 3fqtrvq <{t

i<

Hsbd H6b@d'sHsbdd
Er sis. Yibo. Yr sis.
1J

!r.r fS

qfqr qffi

NAhw Niece NdrewNiece

b<r. 6
Sor
t E r .r
D-inlaw

I morefonnally,qTH"{{"{
z moeronnally,.q rlrt

Dught.
lqrE
S-inaw

E]!{'

eff{

qrl"

r
o

2 {dtrflq

hro kftb

3 tr
4 .rq I cDr
5 i r9r.rqrr

dhani keF
naya KeIa
ranrroal a

kitbbar

t
I

$, +ra+rsa* o r
f<r,mXrnfrt,w6<$

1+

$, +rardiw o r
fi.+rqn={r<

o
o
x
o
o
a
o

, qR{{T{FTE

I
2

ft-t,rffifr-rr

{,rffi{r
f6,rffifgqr
I q3iq |

-t

frr+,tfuw5r5'frqa I
t,qffit

z arfrtatffidr
c-_ .

J^
.
4

-t.t+l^| l Q.q K l .l t
c--Lt.t+ Qf rt

Qt I
--S- .I
t

s aqfr+ {Ts r
6 g{reffi |

7 firfrqF,fl|

8 dI qT;trE.
r{{f fl |
e r{t cr q-.8 |

19 q5l5x r1Ffi-q1E 1

I {IqI lF{tFI

... hoina,
... boina.
... hoinau.
... hoinau.
.,. hunuhunr&
mro kisn

7
8
o
l0

...Et.t I
... boina.
...EI | ... hoinan.
...8r.r1
| ,.. hoinan.
l...hutruhunn.
...
l ...bunuhunna.

6 tIfr fs{T{{F dhad

kisnhar

ho, kfhn{a fhto cha.

hoina, bhaktapu ga hoina,
ahar ho.
ho, kfhm{a rmrai cha.
ho, khmda ilo Sa ho.
ho, bbaktap purno cha,

noina,utaktapurnaysahar

r{( |

hoina, puno Saharho.

I{ qitlIr 6 |
bhi skm a.

<q qrqrFrf,.{r
t6
dju drjiliirp

hunuhuncha.

fcfri6r6F*qm+qrgo

didi mahendra mahavidylaym hunuhuncha,

frf{ qrr11qfl qqr {q;6 I
bholi am a buv gharm hunuhuna,

qfuqrcqrEq-Trt <dfi-{ q I

pariyrm dju-bhi ra dtuli-binihar dhesi chan.

7
I
1

3
1 . . .8r5 |
2 ...r5rtI I
3 . . .-{r |
E r E . r |l
:' ...tr|

8 qmr -Es sanakeparu

9 t.d +A gab ketha
l0 iFII{rqr{
dhau-jhar

fqa, m5<a-lrEt{rr,5rr

hoina, ma Bimal Kumr hoina.

ho, ma dyhi h.
o
hoina, ma dyrthi hoina.
ho, ma nepli h.
or
hoina, ma nepli hoina.
ma gej h.
hmi vidyrthi ha.
timi hindustDi hau.
timihar kisn hau.
tapi sikak hunuhuncha.
iktak ho.
uni dhni mnche hun.
d mnehar pahari hun
v nepli hunuhuncha.
yhar bhraliya hunuhuncha.

,| {Tqf Fflrt{5
mr'

l-.

... t .t |
...fq t
...flgq |
...q
... n1 t

---clu n.
... hunuhunna"
... huDhunna.
... hunuhutrna.
.., chainan

rqt*r{Irfu+r,+frraro r
prahari thra n4i chaina, li Ch ch&
Qt, at

q. !t.1 ctGt t9 |

ho, hulk gha ali Ch cha.

qqreqqRfrffifr-(
er6ro r
lsjbtabqirtitr Hlomr-fr
tChcha,

q{s1tef{ { | bhiha6ik{akhun" tI{{q{qrq

{Era{r g-{frq;r,qT{{.s,qi[F[ T{ r+{ 6 |

bqirm prai thrn, pasalhar, hulk gha ra baik cha"
lr{{ !T|{TqnRqTE I
pahai thn bejrm cha,

qfr qk{ {Efadrfrc ffifi-{ rdro r

<fiT ST{{F 6{ |

lifr +srcr:

s qr{ffi{T f{flct{61
,

.It\,t.

q'atQe

t9,t I

r qqi I a'4r96 r91 |

10

qfrruFl

nepli kskm:
dasjan dyhihaii cha&
pcjan grcjhaii an.
dulian jamanhar chatr
greji kal{m:
untrisja vidythihsii chan,
naujaDi kelhar chan.
dqsjan keFharu clra|!.

1 ffi q{{Frq1q{ {rT6 |

masgadas rupiy ra ek ba curot cha.

rfi-{fi-{ {Krlq q|{{r 6 r

hmihar tih haptdekhi neplm cr

nrrecr <vwn ffi-qF, fi-i-q-{rqr{qrs { qt{s{r cr 6 |

hubk ghan d6jad logretnn,lljaD imai a pfojr
IIeF.h'
e dqii fr qr 6 ?
tapgr kati pais cha?

k . lrr.frqqrftrq{ , a<ffi

ffir

(s{qE I

tyo bhrtrJian|t(he$gt pobdrain& ha nqn keFga das

npiy{h.

?rfif{-qr{r({cr!fiqrq{r (qFdqr{s r

13

r {di:fi-fr qrffi-{ |
ndqiiko phtro moar chaiira.

i <ria< ra+ -c l.r{ flffi

v+r+ 3nd-(-{

Sub-rrkophno motar aina'

harek tcbulm d kap ciy a"

gffi<rqfreartot
Sub-rrkodjt{ko euf motr cha.

ilqaksga kiib chaina rr vidyrthihariiEga kalm aha.

fr frrer+6+ r dirf 6ikakhun

rto mo{ar Ratanko hoina. Ratnko sthilo ho'

^t.9 q t - |

bhi ikak ho.

rTEtqTgl

mlsakhil

F Qt ek hapt
qq{r {F 6ua mlnche
ft{rcr ffiffd tinYatkitb
qrctr a carjannkeF
q's {Frc pcrupiy
Fa g chaYrlmec
ffirfir ff{qf stjsnimi
lCT
3TIerT
thvalk8k$
qF'nsu Hlo
E{rs{r fr thsja vide6i
ffi-dkilo
12 ft qr( ff sdhestkito
13 fr{c|8 tu pthi
14 {6r qFtr 8dhimn
15 ff{ firq r+en{ tfr tin rupiv pacahatt{pais
to tr a $ml sePe nau ruPiY

q fprs-q'.-{rr
fdr{ { frqrfEftr {c { |
ll
r eT{ |

3IFTrq{qrW

t2
I
2
3
I
s
6
7
8
g
l0

dhani kisnsgadas pthi cmal ra das kilo lu a.

v- -8r-.:- r -c q n l + iI sE t

ff {q{qre

hntlhda.

sarasyafi matrdi bqirba kilomr-fs f{h cha.

M+srqr:
{rarffi6e1
r
r qt+tr;nfi-q*s a;r r

srqlEffi Idiyikrak
hunuhuna.
qrqrftre6eg |roSlrtak

ql-l|(rl It I

bhi gharm
cha.

qrfl @ rodicharn
chin

l4
t

$c4{r$ffi{g{-++rke1
Dhan Bahdurki Snalik

<r-+rma t

meo buv-m chaia.

du-ar didi chL

lHih[
gbmrEn
l rl4iy ebrnn
huDuhurch&
I |l gbarD
ht[thD.ho.
ma8dtu

ffrflqffiTqr{ffi-rfrfr8(

f+'<r*qrfirm

men-ntn cirJaDn nti-ntiDi chan,

s@rMfrr

It

{nihko chorchori (alna.

qQfdrt{drr q l
gm"rrrn
v&nauva

yu t ,ogkoeutdyposslnntrat cht
sffirqr'firEtqr
skt\irn ori ch.

hn cYri mo bbiisi ch'n

I

rcqrr{r gRr+r grcr r,rEr rccr rI rt|-ff rr

timi merocorkos5ahihau,hotur?dmonmGautamho?
ffi mffi X1 trr qqr qrt r qr{Tofrth r

s+tr qrcqrre<rq r

trk clqion clo chrn

qqqrFr t wfi-{q

dmo stiko bnv&o nnm Gi[c6 Mn ho? thiih chr kl.ftlna?

rsqI*t

vahko nm Lmi Nn ho. tyo mdi thhn r.

v-<rqirraararr rffiw+'qor
nero ghrr yrhbits Ch.hdnr. lmrogha krh ch.?

arrid*fr6q1q59;6 r<c+qrq1qr
sra t

tssko sllDi csinr?

t9
I

tapfuo bu bsihn hunutuncna.Opi mtithbncr?

sfi-{*-trqr{r* dqrq rvftqscrvr{rth t

uDihark gai Uemm khetui chrn" rnihenli fhEh5 dn?

ilm q-<frsqr{rfrqrgr

hmo th polhlret ho. hmi bEhun ha

frfafrqeafq{ rfrqrqrr

N
I

yo ftnro ghafi holna. mcri mko ho.

rrr... { r e-<...
cr 6 |frqR{Rqrrfr...qcr:.........{ ...I
meonm"..ho. rero ghir... m ca. meo psiym hmi.. Jani
hr:-..-... rr.-

frfficrc... { ta-q...
4616;o r

frfr-fficm...r

m hunuhun.

c
t

mrykn e\,iaDchorna e$Jancori can

ffffi-crcrrqffrfror
Pritiko vicnrmnSryakichoi r.

$*sMcrcsrr
Sako chorSo nam Gi6 ho.

arr{r1 dq-'6 t R{rq c qr16qr ir |

ecrifr rrs erffidrd qfuq qFE t t{{, g;RFIar;i I
Effi-{r qr@ t q {rc ffi dtq I

qAt{ Fr{qrsErer
v--6fwfrcrrrrEq r
fr*t+mrecmffiffit
m-{fr-qq rr* ckcr src.16r
s{QqfrF-{qfi-fr#{l

2l
I <qr{qn s q{sTq ql1 r

qfnr +-wrv <+-wrofrq r

<m6rfravnrr rrr{r qdfrc cfr { |

<rg+rrrrdr e vn lg *+qr6rqftrsrs{+agvfr v{+rr rnir

d{F qr <nqfuqvlTqr' I

meri dido rimnko nirtr.- ho.

t7

yrs maDceli dheri sfthftN rn

<-{* trr eefrrm{ rcfrrcrw6ror

mcri rdiko nm.- ho. v..

qqr|-fT3rir{qr
tyaskelki duiP ghr asn-

qqqfr rS* cscrfqcrc{dqe r

qmrt++a-ardfrqr
15

rq s r

Hi5bn Giikonnn &

r
x2
r
r
I

d qF S{r dqqrfrqr qrqi r

lEF f{t6<R r-{Af c qo qrq;o r
firn6c Sr g{ qz6qk{ qr{ r

rrfu*nsffi

Cqrfi+q<{Ds r

qgS{fu s q{qq(qrk r
arr{g${rTr1rysqt*<rrflrqrETd{1
sfi-{FTf,r{Rt{ +r<srtrrq lr+{ t

s ffi

qra{fq{EqsRTq{r{qi

t fufi-{sf<C"F+fu9qsEqcET{
r

t1

i
r
r

,r
.

g,e++rr+e,qqr{s r
qqrefiffi-{,ffidq
I
Edrrft-+r*ra, 3r(firr{rr|
q<-qrcsr
#\.s-rqrss,
o + +qrr.rq. rra e-ifur 3rgrq r
qqrs$qFT' 3v;frqTT{ |
fr sqfursrr+qrrErk{
r
qrdqr{{r.TdffiqSr

2E
I

24

r fr flrqrits RksR sQeqF{{qRqr qr$r rr@ ar$olr r

cfi-Es q qf.c-{rt qrq r
sfrtr ila,cr+drc Tmr+rv 6+r*r*w q;6q 1ffiqr fr+
q Erqraffrcq oric rff|4r Tfi-Tff|qFq 16gbqI
fr -qFIfr q rffir qFb I F-{FqroEfu<qr;q qfr
fi-q qrcrqfuf,-oqr
q RRrEqqr+qr{qr *o rkfum v <q {q ffi qFE r
aqqq6 q q!- iFE

frr{ ffi-d o qq<w{rcrqa.Ft.6r

Tr.FF{c6qrilqqrT{q
I
EI{ITIqr {a{ f|q IFrt Tkqrs1E;n I
q-dT
dqfr;n"b qfr urrr Er |
fd-{t{ fi-dF{dl qffr qFEq t
qq +orqri.rfifl r
san ffis.
eq frE {EF qq +efqgra. qr* ff rfr qc +r< r
qk e?rER
qr{r$ Iq{rEI-drfEq{ qfq q fir t
{qr4r {ir br vq rqd{r+ ilr {T f+. r qrqqr+ rrq
fr+q fttq |q +?FftflT il' {+q i r* 1d I
q{Fcrffi-cf fqq r
q.1qftq fr Tfr+-T
iq rrdTq11q{E."
qk{
rrq.fui[ f"irqFiqt ftr r
@ 0t mvet qnfc<nr+r

@ acrt qr qfi{cq t
@ q \'srfsrqf{ t
@fi-q5;q1Ssrfrt
erqq rfi-{+q<qrqwq fu{ t
@@rrra
g-{n t @ qq{ xl r<.ne
t
iH
fu-{
ffi
@
"nrfr
( @qrqrr{q{r{dffiTfl*l

rfraffi 6gu4ogqffiTrfrraFn Trjffi r+@ rrfr f*fr

wqg'o. or*"i+rfrqFrrq{rsTd|

t0

qk qrF{R |
+kEvrfr rS t
gt \rscrffdrd q- t
ffiqeqnftrfrt
qft(.f r
I ffirrq
( tq+{rrfi qrqrqk{qr1rr
I

s516fEaqa rro, gqq qro rr" rfi-{s rnss{ r

'ra
I qreq {rqreT<r dr o t

qfcs-{ q fiqEF<r rfr 6;rrr r

raro I
oqcrdvrer*Fe-<ra-dlr{i r

4r6,qre{r+d-{rdr<r
u

+l(t.l I c"ld

29

rrfr qr q=rcf6q qE aq 6;6a 1qaqrqffi q| rqr qrq rq

rryt{ 6161qq;5. g6 ?
trr {'r ilrrr +'iq qsi r q aqFd qn{r ffirr qF6. -b ?
IJ

YIEE

{ < ql|rr TrdE Elrqq ( |

srcs-ar<rrfusr{ r
ffitncm-<rsffitncrd
r

ll
qqrqrrq{ffirldfficE
q"E I
q fq-qr<{ffirffi
cfi-cqft;lrsififfiqrSq

qcercrffi trr<wi r
ri <M rq t'rr{ ci r
aqfffiffitrr r-{qi r
sffir rgs-crtc t r rc c r
k sffiqrfrtrrcctil
?

t
t

frmqrrwdfrffit

q qfu(Tqq{dqfffi.F{rr r
( rd qrqr {q{ EtEd qqr {qrfr

t!q

a)

qF@vrfrqrftru
l
qF@qrflqrfqr
crr@stqfl(*Qr
qrNfrrsrqtR-ot
qrr-qrt@qrFesr
ftMqrfiilr
$r@Arcrqrf6t
S@v<vn<rfqr

q<{g{.Frc m r
ac{ ffi s{ q{ sl-( r

ffi

ffiaafrqrsr
aqr*f+-crqq<rrqr1sS
r
frfrq.'<{ qnTdafls r
rrq{ <rEqcqrq{g r
ncgTcT

33
I

mr^+eenq6g6rt
f{ {-d|-flrqs6 |

SWrrrsrl+{r
r@@qrcr

rerfuruqr

s-tsffiflcNqr
srdsiq.6r-dqffie

v
!

!\

$r qq{r{ q Iqr I
ffi r fr-crqq-efirq t
q qmrfi qrqrfirfrE r

sfi-ee.fi.sr
g*r*rfrm66dt
35

s+t,rffixnrqrtr-qfirr
frqrqtrrdq+teqr r
ffirrmq{-{fia-@ r
<re rcri{i{ fi{& M r
<fr n cqdl fir& frt r
Trdqr+rt fi{& r
s-{r 6ff{ rrd qfi qk(.rSr
qrqr qr qrl

qk( q$r |

foft rrrcrer+l q<<.rdr

<rqrdqt{- qk{ rr r
rfrqncqrirtqk{rrt1
c q( qt{a ck{ {q r
36
I

aqrtqfaciqr' r
ffiq+qrfrr
nfreffig:eqrt
<rsqrm qn* r
ltrcr{ wn 4rr t
fcffiqrqrr
r
Ufiqrrvrl r
cffi<ffiqrr
r
q-trre<vrr
r
ffifr<rqrr

T{rd fi-dffi qrq I

{r il r
rcrdrTrcd
i< q,qrfrqrsrvffi cq r

fficfE{r.frr
tt renifrcr t

I <r+qrqrdrs{ qr5q-qt{{ r
I sficqrwcffi ,.s r@ cr r

flE"6 r{ d{rga+q{mqrffrfr qr{ r

<wr-cd<rrffi+ratfri$r
+lg-<rcfr-+orfri{
r

s q? rf<qq-{
cc{fi qrt cr{ r
-K{+
qrc
ql-{
!
fiqlsfrfl
r

I q=fuWifrqrfd*qr

I
"t
t
r
r
r

r
t
t.

mnffiqcr

I qrqsri{-drdffi r
I Ecq{ilrr
t it qrqmrT{rq {rr r
I

qn@fi-e ltrlr

r
I stEftrdrrdqrfr
t tqrqr<dd{ft frqr qrre r
I

qqqri qa.nd qrr t

r qqr<ffi qr r
r" Erfrf{-qrq r

5
r
t
t
t
t

4l

r wrse fqrscfu r
r rflR rTcT
ffi{

ftr;E r

------!-5

r
r
r
u
.

fri qr+ w-arqrqiqr

qfr;Ei i q-<qrffi r r
rnqTfft w gfs's r
treqrffi
fd<@{ rq-s{r$skgfrr.6 r
asf$ffi,r{Tdr{gfrqr
rrrdr{ i q-{r+drid

rrq r

.
-tq ( ---l
q Q r---ci-igr "r c |

qrIT I

42
I
1

a
4

ffiqssersrfuTr
tqtFflr+i-{e rc.* C r
q<tr M r
ft{ fr qfr-s's-{{
rfugr+Rffigacr\rt
tqa"ilr+{l q.r@ qffi {ilq*
qks@fdfiqr-ql,rsr

qS + r qr gqr<;r r
q sq t I

q-+ i rr q qr6{.- r
qg1q.1q1qE{{ffi rgqrcqo r

{ftftqrrqrffi b'rager
{-fr{rffi:rdor'ntu

u-+r*q*ffi< rsfrc{ffis r
45
t

r Csrrl{*{vsrqsfis- { r
t Pa-;*rn ffi 6gtl* {dri gq qrd t

g cra{racrqf. Cofi r
ffiqrqrq{Msr{rt{

sr

{, qr1t r q,q6rqu1 ec t
d. qrs-ir r *{, <rwwa+ r
q.qr+ q r
if, m r
+{,er\r& t
dqr( t

q E t . 1 . < + t ltG ( t

(Tr(, flIT I(IIFT qI qr' itr<fT I

,rqt{EqqdT{ g<ro r
mrfqrv-affi qrfq-{+r
rfu g*-*r<

qrfrq{qsffi{r
ffi9mfi-ffiffiqr

fi ilrq |

q qrd qK'd ri {.r-{ t

qKt q t

43

t (tc{ fq-{I qqtTqrdqffi

r Trn(ffi{f
6q qrqqq{ |

|
ftfrflq+rvr6+r{sfi'E61
n<qrfrqe rfrfr.t\'+ ilr{qrcqrffisrerfrq<qrs t
ftfrvrcg+qreflqA,

<r1<ffcq vrr o r
wsq marrsm*qld e r
tc q{{r { r ffi rrn qr o, e<wd a&

sqqf{crdqfr-ff{ffi

qrEqrqcrfr rav+<g*rerrd r
d 3r.cFfffi tde{f+rr<rcra r
mqffi flffi
-{ {rfr fT{fr f<ftriqr r
r<:+{qqqt-d {rs-{f,|
ftarqs
*<
frmn
1lr fr tr16<rvro r< 6rffi rwr{ Tr r

crr@ sf{ {rEfirq+ fE{ |

rtr:.cr q sqc'qrc,TCdfrE r
fi-{q{ ffifrqr {rr frq il{ ( i{rq-&q t
crfr c Mil{ {rerdrqrd fE{ r
ss+rcfrg fi{ m secMr vls fr{ r
sfi-{Eqrr{raqrtr fqqil{sfr{qfqqrerqrrfrqr{

obten r
{i*qrwq
1
ffiqrtetrerq*ffi+qqrqr<$
n-frqr racet{H tq 3{T{ffirc { 1
ikFftqrruozoTffiq{r r

ftqn,r.q++frrtrr
a{ ffc ** r. }, qq-{R

rqrcqr q qs5( rEr{T6-qr+dre

{srrr
tzrw-.utr ftqfcr
q
qi--" c.{ c qf eq{rE rqq-r
srrrr !141rfiq
v6r
*;6
{
:.
,:
!

qgrqR. t iT{Gr{ ttr(

1.8 T.dslqof r {, {ffiR

^
qr sRq. qr ErT
- gr ErrF[ TlIqT tqnr iqT
Eq4r Ur qFF TsTg

at

urr+ilf Tgfdrrdf+fiqi-f+-+qq{-giq-{rffi aWq

r frE ravrT{ Asrs-q-deqrTl q t srqr.Er<
erq w qrrqraq' q{rq6.+ *6nrv e
r.*o rr rff vrr ft wgr rrqr+ 6*rr6rr+rcqr=o-ratmfir
qr r

g;<-+<n wffi r\d g+i r r

I

gH <m wrrrr*re ser<rfr H qargnr r

<rt \rrr q<r r H gqrqr.rqrqrr { r.{ {Rur Ekqr {
{T{T 5{ |

r
@ar+rEr$frrc*rqrcffi
r
$<crtea++<rm*Fo
frd{ sq mrt ffi qrtr ea qrffi

It
I

ot

q tqcr{{remr{trr.rr qrtrqrrfrq r
? qf{ Rcd qiqr"fr rr fr rrfr @
r
1 'srqiat'q"
+ cr. 1Tc {qr<{g( 6FFIT
t ic+rfr
t

FF;6 I

q iffi m'k qrc-i q qrq si {( qFE r

qkqci? {q{Fc arfq'{qrqr{ { {qr qfi<rqr qq r
l(
+rrc. r
{ qR fr aw *+ q-qrfr qar{r T q *5ffivrn
54
c.--\----!t . tQq !tq tq cn t 9 q4nQcttE qtt
9r q | |
R. grffi
re q ciq<qFrqi{

r. qrrrrr\rfr qrfiffi+ ffirs {rrqr

TqiT<FT qKT qFqE

.
qT E
: qcTf, 3t5$rfi'r"flfE?I
3-{r{F{ qlCrCrrer +w.
rfi r
,r-t
.
.
(TiTq{ qrff rF IfiT ttrt frtII qst tfa{ - Tnq6" |
n
( qrq qnTrkr qFrg?F{{tr-{ qIriT qsiErT6 |
19
I
I
I
t

a-*gmqrffiqF<{qrq.r+

q-stdfr qFffi Trd qr

r
q-qrr{ q (f,T+ r -rqq-S

@+6,Ttc|
@@awvqrr

( Eqrqrdr{qK qqc r
0

qrcr'+{ (rri-{t-qr{ q<fl (ffi qr {q r

qrc Fq I
sfi-{ OffiqF<Fta
q-flErqr
re-l. {r. -kSE I
l ilqq
+'r{r{r{ qrq fuq I
{qrrffi

55

IRI SITSFT
F'[

53

erfrffirqrr+ct,!r

rrp4 3{rsi qri-ffiF{r

qrfl{ q-fi m 1

r irvk Esoffi T.e{rrr r

qTfmrcc-{d
T{rffirs 3r|-tcrftr
+ n"fui gmfcr r

56

qsqs<r qr r
*F{ ffi{rc flqrc q.{ { q'r Efr qri{r r
frfr qrfi-es'aqr
Fc-r<n tefrqd grnqr@ or-*r t
+crq<trh**n#,
t .6 66q r1p6qrtrsfu{sr
rfrsqq r
re q'cr c{r{6 ror"r r.ir6sqo mreml r
I

q!-sfire qtq Er qtq w qrgrsqr6 { $r6qrgqr{ qerg!-.I

qrre'rq fEqwg-qqrs s-crqtqfl
fd-drqffi r@< vrc
-qH qfr eqa,cFari fi-{
qr rr\r+Trcrq ga a.r;+rrr
eq q'dr {r rqqrsffq RcrqqFE +{r qfrqscrk qr

dcr $4f{Fqr

rTrqr{r ltfl q{FTt<-{;6 ?

(A)Slffickrfr
tr*ang'e t
r
1s16 iq'ffi rk' fr rizen6o gmfu
11ygrrrkr$t
rqr.'ee*
rgr ,ffi
+ fec{drtqrq{qffi Tsr
,' ;
' .
^

-:i -r- -'

{ ) \t'|| tc||E (ar rq r'! I+'r 'J.$g)

g*r
1R1arsm qc+fe+Tqrs1.r. crr{ 6-+ r.rffi
,ttlTl
I
lsr
Frsi{IrT
rcr
\rsr
{r
Itr.F+rrfiq{.8
(A)rFqlrrr{qs(?
rUl <qrt rrrrqm<{fi{rrffi, {rfr r rqFqqftflFr 3frffifrqr

frSqt

A) q$qsfr qvrq ra-<<q $rq ffi -tt fl t

(B) 6. &fi E rq.3nrr-q._ ffi { tm rrfrq qqrqfarrqk'

.
^?
FrT6 |aqld16r rt*s<
flqr qrrlrr qF6 |

fqc{ s-{T<r qf6r fr *e gfue v f{ +{ { qrdrqr

tv $ v< w rd rgffiq rq T frd',r ird rr-m
es tr<sq F rgfucqreqi$qm+ {rFr as qfT<r
vf6tr + v arrrs i*6rr+ ur+r ;q{iurol w rd rffiqm
qrfr siqF qf{ fra {qftfi { 6rcrn rfr firdr qr*r
qnrqn v r

(Ai cryta+f*<rr 1t arar+f1ar6o'r

ffinw6;o
r
6; +Ef
62
r q qffr *q $a6 t
1 qffiq141q{rs+b
ITqTF{[;I{Fi{E I

g
I ffi{6ir

rl'E r
ffiqq
rsr{r d iTr ffi , TqgA,erq:fr
, qr{ ( q-q qr{F

c sftffi+q(ftqr
fr ffi

qfrr{r{

{F{6{ l

3 t

t,

aqrqflfit{-{E'r
aqrffi qrcr rfifs{ {q.b r

ttQ qr trq

63
?.

q t l n tq

q 5- l q t.lt9

q ll

tlfiE

t9 |

ss @ vrr<srqlq-.d{qr r
vsHqc Ficr r
g ( l

6 |l .t.or q t

9lq t I

3.fi{{ rErfircrrTr .{ crq I

---3-------:.C---:,
ili 9 lq .I
c i l E s e l I E s l --\,li -.-sq l.l r lq
.l.q

sEsq l(sll
9.

frfrffiv,rt{rqrq6affi1
ri[qtE rf,dt sf rr{ qtqT I

t.

ffi@rq*qm

qrqr

SqeRrqfu ei f{ffi fe-6u* r*@ rq gf{'qr {q6o r

q" qs qrfi ef6r 6 r3k qrec+n qrfi-qs

g{ qR
-F.flziq c'qT-{rqtq rr\-rr foq} 1t].ffiq q| 1ffiy
firr;1 ' fd-+
qFirqq
r'at qr+fl cfqqn E {q
r{r.
@
-q
-qrefiq EIqr qE r-o rr. gffi'e +r+r
st*c-+ rSn q csqlq
q'J-r cs{fi qqq rs-6q3qdr, ftq feq{Tcs ftrri1 1qffi q-6

+,qq-qr iqr r-fo ow6r'fcrwi rg+rrrgn. ffi ' ar r<

qrqmr3fudr
T+acfi{cr qqq+ r+fuffiqnorffi
em-qqItfr tqffi'q g.{ \r* $ra qr qrrti r 6'<rqrffi qrr
fuq req{ { c{ qrrsr 6{ tr gtr qf Offi q.r{r1V{ r
gsra3cr-{= t{A{qcE RFIF{u{ q-qq qr-dt r
qcarcq ffi {s-+ s{r sfir\r+ rrr"iiqm qf{qn
r<rcq qr+fir rffir f-6d-{ qfurr vr-rva rg+r+r

ffi
dfr;qr
r{ r+qfi-{ srqqfr wr r ffi
A-or
rE5-dcr
crr'.
ffi
rrq.qrqr6' r qr
,
,
TSf;
Tfr
T:*rTT-4TTqTTqT EFI"E;T I
qrcqT-{aar'rfifr, -* <+qfrq{I"i6 |
( q<g'rq crd cr@ s,cb'r
6

qsrr+rt+qrft r{ fr tsfi5 q .r
rrn qrqcfu{rfr rd-rcl{1vqr
I k{rs{qr fuqrq qr{S, qrs-{qfr qr-r
1
frfr rrn-crrq{ qqqrqqfu
rqqi r
slcqsE<rqrsq-dd, qqr e-wffer
( q + qwrsF{ \rrcril fu G |
I

q q-cT (rr qr w*<fi i(i ffii-flqRh qq rrc rqrB

sq-ew <iem-Tig+rqrqE rq sffi \rsdrsr 31+r ra-rr
qrr|6[rfl{ If;T
q{r
Aqr{ Eq

arTT

61 6rg{CqT I a{T"FTT<TGI
c;r

q-3adT.q+qac. rrr6-+icqnvn+r
trRT',+ qEc+T
qqq"ff r+.r ,iu+"qnn-eq*icqraerq rqrsqr
Fmdlirr' {rF fK Trg{1 q1qrdr qrqrrqEtr{ gsn pq |

q<r<reqsrr--
TfrM Irffi qfurarqafu

ftffi
{rfr rft{r qt q qra4 rR 6r{ , qt611qr
qq qrqr|@
rq qr qrsH+ {6-qn gq*d
".
g+,rs{r qd tfi {r-{ri qr q-6RsrqrqrqqrTrs5q
qt q ffi
rvrg<*E qw q.ecftq - rrqcfu
ftr+q- fi rfutr{ 3q {rrt q rc+;erqrefu*'
q frrfi ffi{qm{qr n6{.rq q ffi3rrq qfiscr+qr fo r+
nqq5 F{ q-.rqkc cFenfr.d rq-cfr {'r frffi { qisrs r
cftfifi ss-{ Err ecrqrFn qqqi r

68
I

acri+6<rsifr& r
fr Ar{-{FfuFdq
Fi frqa qrqr
qrfi-{Fmfrwwrrtmr
acr{+ffit6d:qr
qrq* qq ffi

q aqrt+e+fr Eqrd r
69
qqr{ + fl

rrs q qqrqc rnfl qrd r

qrift dq:Tq s{- rrm qrq qf$ r
F{rqr q}fl r+ rrq {r T{qr Sfr e* r
drcr ffi qr TSe qr ffiri qM
I

qrfi idns r{sqg{'rfi .crr- d r

I If I hadbeenhungry I would haveeatenvoaciously.

2 ff it had not rainedthey wod havecomefor a meal.
3 If thercwereno streamsin e hills therewouldnot be elechicityin
our house.
If he had taken the medicineon time that man would rot have
died young.
If a ftiend had sunga songthe eveningwouldhavebeenevenmore
enjoyable.

*rwSR+rrrEs Arwtqr(fu o {td{q{r qrt fiS ro-{

rqqn * ffi+qrqr+ra*q6.o
e e-<ft E r3frrflcr
s- e td rr<a e"crrrfr <i.ortl rc,r qrr r q
q rtqr 6 -<crt{ rrr fl fi-{ q qrg{qd a< qRqcq
qqfr q |rrd< qqr a +rtffi {cr ar re-c q dr r{qr
qr< +tsq { iTgr sqqr qrs T\r{ lEcrd sq{ frrn qr

f+ r ffi+qrccsr s+{ qfuqqrrq{ s* dq f+ r r r q

rFq 3{rE.qEIsH f,q il{qr 6 | + qrq sq qq r

,nqqqrnfrrFir$
lqqrqrr EmE qsmrfirrr
qrg-i-qr fd r .
dfrko rgfrqm{F.iqcr{fufiHqi
q;qr
.r* r qr rrrrq si gq fstrr qr+ o qfr"ffi
qFlIE-.6 |
7l
I

sfi-esqtg-.ffiRnrfrs r

fiqrq rrcrffi t( rrr*dr ffi r

q'r rrr* arard sa En'flITrr{+ 6 |
rqqr 6ro;qr+qr ia-55i1 a'S
o r
q q-efqrsfi-AT.qEqte*r.rsrd W r

r
r
l
y
t

+ a-cq qrqr qr{r r

qrrqq q qr{rq{k r
sr6qrsE,(q rr ;rcr orsqrdf {-qrr
ffi fufl rrE fl { @ fufi qfr qd {r qrqffr f{-dqr I
ffi rqr tr <reqrqr r
fff fi-T{r{eq<mrv

qkffrqfEqr;rq{ {g rffi{r ff
+< ffi rrg+r6s
qrrrr fuq rf{{rAfi-{qR.{" q"fr. qfu{rqrs,}{{q'r
q<
firq3rfrs qqr ffi{ra qrcfr fi-r E qrg-qro
Tilfrfu{ rr+ vq ffi *{ mg* *< oE{q6ri<<r-r

lrqlr rt{qmerqqr qrkfu Er t{qr ilTr iq-dH

q;r|-qr.Firrqft-{f tCFtrTrrq rq-+T
q lifqtr{ rqi q|:-f<Rr{t
rs rr{ rift <ri-drqr t.{ q rfi-F-d6fr <grq
qli"il-,rf qtr'<T5 ql{tr | Tq smfr{ sfrs o \r{ qrcrfrr*

*5rrJTr-{i

rc rrflTrqt6 *'^1ffi

uat

q<Frq; r ErE;larrq tarr

qrqr qGF-6TTqfiE'fi'{+r_qrqr

+rt. eqrwUrq
fui vqr' q"'{q6rE{h rfirfrrrq.
rqffis{m:r+{a=q=1rq
r{rfi-{sqatq-s3{Egcfu
qrfr qrorrtsrRs r

t*'l
ll

z
o
I

GT
I
II

o
Ir

GI
I

o
o

o
q)

sirth morhof

rft

the Nep year

tu day bfore
Wtday: last
w@k
lpspital
,to

Inlrdrq
t

;t

ttgt
II
-

iq(4{

rfrsq
aq'

Imw
yet
too

e. comaad

qTTTT

hope

T
ITr{

wish, &sire
history
weII

{iTrff

hqrout
Islamic

Elql

the Lord; Gotl

f{-T"lF'

feling of
suffocttion

EFc-dq

3TT
Words maked * ae tansitive ves.

qq6

3$I(TE
qqqr
qfrs
3f.{
q+i
3nTFf

qgrcf{

yet
tuglish
adishlngpage
da*, <ltuqs
attuly
Ietterof ab,habt
newryp
tal, hiCh
ago,beforc
pickle
ye4 stin

q-Ft
q|!-d

.imnsrotivezo|te

qp:

to frt itto I6pN

{+

$,o a!1da half

o
gnger

qd

fi-fr
*qr
q!r(
cqaR

c.
q

rt6 tQ

sFFIT

q$r

Efu.{r
cfu{rq

official

cft-{
3TE1T
q+6.7
3({

sllFF[
3TFd
qd-s

itemte
qime,offae
difrcult, awkvard
offica
iow, froD aow

fift
qillq

*{-fr

exlnence
pens$oa

l(rq

u,,successrltl

3RT

of gd

aRIrI

""
c-tr

rc@rding to
fto
sange,odd

E{IRCCSTd)

qfdq

extett9ly, very
thid month of
the Nepli yer

fri

qgRlf

iaconvenierce

chal@tor

tzt,@aB

gqFT

Sunday
to dve
wotu1

to con
arrbitiotl

3<n

"ky

mday
aoways

sr<

t,tt.,ove the
north

{E$T
5l

example
rze (Mi<ldle)

q+{F
$reFfT

tey (Middle)
va ey

eisht
. scfr
eightll
scar{
soul
3qI4
to es1ect
3rI
hdf
g{q
*
onesct
*
oaeself(emphasized)
3EE
aie's own
st|(l
tuOther
{Rr

,rt,

in go.i

Wve
hiCht
poaurciatiot
o get up
to Iy

ia e en{ afcra
frtE

$ghtly
a sraall aount of

E{rrm
qTk{

last

hr"*

reaiag
untidy
q8, rfLhet

tftq a ttlerrhile
Awhi Qag.tEe)
certainly

naEo

b prctisc
Atrcncan
gtava
Amencatr
Anbia: tu
Middle East
ohc.t,frorc
aioe, Nxt

cFntc

ttphill: step

eye

Iab, latenes
Iack, ab'n@

Wdo
and thea
farnine
inwfupiaE

qftrcfu

ilrr
'rtt
Itc
tt

health

to 1st

novel
usefir,

gfr
meana
to be stat ding p
to boil
age
to c.rme to the boil
in that ma'/n,er

sQI

it rat fianne
seeqQl

s/hc (Low)

pwo
and
Potatoes
bafu shoots
necesssy

hey, oh
one, a
ole

sr
d

\rc

absolutely
single-barre ed
one and only

{-i
d-Ft

alone

F{f{

Cuilt
shelter ftofi nia
dowlrhill; steep

ffi

f{E
fd{F rF *

ffi

frnge\ t@
malaria

m.rr

Edicirc

qT

{A

rfiiT
rFdT--{iI

{R-?

rXT
q

rficsr
rfirfli

fr
qiq

FFqfuf,
slqq
rfir{{
F{TiFT

_,l

whee? to whete?

nEl

how many?
how much?
how many paple?

fr

6--t

conductor
somewhere or other

how many things?

aaywhere
how big?
story
cuP
cloth
haft (of the head)
affee
arcly, Iess,few
jaundice
shit
at least
watst
to shout,make a
[od noise

o
book
why?

college
to iragine
poem, wty
in what nannef?
how?
in what mant et?

+|?
{F{t'
{{qqf{

ctasj

fou eldest

h
h'drd

fu{

|+{
ffid
ftA.
finFrc<

whose?

3I

q'dr

Frts

ten million
soundof ntnniig
waef
pen
Yormg, tende

N
+

approximately

how?
Iike what? how?
wherc?
at e hofre of
wher?

furc
rfrq
ftr
tq{r
f{
!n-CT
Tk
Ti'

somefujs

T{r,rt.
sonewhee
cucumbr

ttnl

+tr
str
'FFFI
6F]T

uncle
paPer

.rd
mrR*

li/'',e
to cut, to kill

Fq

sevenm montl | ot

IF

the Nepali yer

ear
youngest gil

&

{rc

youngest boy

E r--o81

{F{

work
to yok

q n r r

tq n ll,

FF

rq,q *
iF|{g[

teason

{F]Fq

POgAlmne
black

{rd

to buy
kilogt nme
kilon efre

for
to ty

appoxituately
two miles
gift

fr{r

c,rmea
I guess,I suppose
forgiveness

qq

mr.ri.

ifi'nal
$

IfiTTT

{{T

-+siqr

to forgive
areL teglon

sic*
falme
type, ki,.d
tns@., wonl

chicken
which?

q(. I
IFIT<qqT{ *
(Eq(
.R tq *
qir{qR

which one?
I don't know
chair
thiAe. tnatter. talk
to talk. converse

ccc.ri.
q{qfl

(t . l
is<! |

a mesueof
weight e{ul to

fork
shoulde
caulowet
yoLtget patemal

tlgl

baause
shopping

-+{rFr
+frRT,Tt.

two Ens
heel
to wait fo
well

elbo'x

qTgT

kindtess, favou
what?
cente

qFT

boy
gi
banana
some, somethng
soneihing o othe
who?
coat
oorn
compaed with
ni et

tu stop
to end
qangef
b gotble up
news
to ibfofit
bewae!
bd
pocket
to dop, post
(a lette
gelded goat
to fll; d.ie
to be eaten

"|q1
qFF

ash
snack, light eal

qE-

food
to eat, ddnk,
consume

lr{'
qRT

f@d
empty, only
special, paticla

fiq.q *

to pull, take
a photogaph
ktki knife
leg, fint
chilli peppe

cgr

qqifr
qrT
lC.|g{

to open
to feed

Rrfr

q.

fr
dffi
q*

Kd

faming,agic|te
fanhing, agiculhte
game
to play

lF
W

made ftom died

vegetables
gt|lt, teachet
Gumng (r

.ft

emic goup)
prcket

well! what about?

ofirwn

{gf
.t t (

tomato
cow pz8are

'r,ell! what about?

coug)t

ff
qq

happy, happiness
very, thoxrughly
nigable freld

search
to sek:lry to

q{t
q5l

iTrI
q{
qlgfr

c{r
dcr-Tmr
dq.

nve, steam
ives and steams
to open

rl!.I

gT
wondet, amazement qlq
gFI
toplay a gane

rr&r

with pebbles
tnathefiatics
day o a monm
m me lKram
clendar

.rq,{ *
tri-{
qf,*
rI|TT

rr{-{r
tr$
r t5

r
qrg
rrrcd*
qrfi
rn-

,Trft,rt.
r

Qil

t{
1t+

sf

fug

a traditional dish

incident, event
watch, clock
hott, be
house,home
landlod
thoat, aeck
stepsbesideive
grass
sunshine
gree (claified
butter)

tsl
qqlg(l

knee
indiect

CC

to fitm, travel

to chat, corverse
Iroo
to do

sT

heat
jewellery

qiTT

haary
guide

qFT

minstel
village
wate pitche
ca, wheIed vehicle
to tell off
difficult, hard
song
complant

qE.qT

qqr
qiTTiFT*

lavatory
aoctlto ttuve,

qR

uncookeddce
four

srt

fouth

qTF;I

3r81

ffi
tunqd
ffi

fs-<r.rt.
A.
{r
fqqrrw

cr-fuqr
R

ve
to move, go,
function
qckly,
immediately,
early

to wantto
to be wantel,
needed
cntn

Frq
6IT
ffil

shadeftom the sun

skin
neibouth
neighbor
quickly
quicl fast

ffi

fu
qk
ql

motent
to spt, bifrtcate
time off wotk
side

pat\:hea tan nce

@n

Iettr

adlalnannce

r9rl

Chinese
suga
to worry

E,{r

sixth
shot, hief
so'l

r rt rl
trr(l

sonsand dauters
daughter

qrtq

jungle;

q lc1

cotnpcated,

sl t(|

fficDIt
everys,herc
appoximately,
as much as
population

to recognize, be
acauainted
with
'
slippety
tea
teashop
tea ald snacks
cold. damo
'

uninhabited land

Chitia

T.

derene

+dcs-d)

stove, hearth
twelfth mon of
the NeDali yea

ffi

owe. unsed
tum, time
watchman.suard
one auatte

qit

mushrcom

'

chickw
moon
to take to gaze
hot, Ioud

silvt
small change

qTqt

knife
to cmb, mount

T{r3d '

ffi

qTiT{

s-({gql

btudl
to b borrl
qt

birthplace
Iand

q++l | 6

all togetheL in total

to gathe\ assemble

'"
---:l +t

sqTq *

s{Ts
q{fr
6+f q;T

to be srydsed
ckarly
to leave, qt

umrnea

qt(l

6rfr

DIeAllt, chest

q l\

6tET '*

to feEI with the hand qA

wi
EEl
6TiTT

Gernan
to bum
ftply, answet
in a similar
manner to
in I similar
manne to
simila to
exaination

to exao\ne

qs-(R
qTFR
qr
.RT

alcoholic diik
salariedjob
cold, coldness
specr'et 4'?e, care

ql l.l.l

gl;T

to be knos/n
to qo

ffi

toktov
fife
tangue
distict
nononnc sumx
added to names
life
anhoearcmedy
shoe, shoes

fi-fi-qq

.fr.
Ff,1
g$qr *
ZF{I
efiq
aq.
fd
t.
ctql
{{
a-drffi
F

impue, sulliet
polluted
that which
secondmonth of
the Nep yea
eldest,elder
wife
pai

s-6 (GSr)

IIrqI

mope
honorific suffrx
added to na$es

eI

almost
even moe

fsd *
ffi

to descend
to take out, extact
very ealy rnoming

Eq
grE

bag
window

st

s6T
3q{
e
BFET
SFFI *

s{r

TV
to come to an end
to bring to an end
s\ddenly, ot
of nowhee
tormst
to stand, set down,
rcst pon
tbe
to bte
hat
towft quane
taxl
inck

8.

ean.ri.

but
vegetables
( !E

1
dktT
iiTr

drq*
ilr

the Tami region

young wofian
to cross
llov downwatds
cmwng
and
totaken

etr{
STTq
ETr{

goup)
to begin, stat to

sT

knowledge,
information

qrrcrgT*

<IgT

fine, OK
big
addrcss

dTst

fd-fr

to scoch, lrum

fdft
ffi

vot t

ea
dollar
hi idge
monal pheasarrt
docto
to summoh, call fo
one and a haif
tented

slow, late, slack

doo, gate

yo (Lnw)
but, though,
however

vou Middle l
towads. Dea.
at at out

ffi

Rt.
ol

fi-{
ffc"e-d
g'", 1a'
ct(l

M
iqd

F{sfr
rq
rqd

e-r
r{t
d

lhit

e,ql(
{t|

olace of Dilsimase
immediatelv
vou
o . ruel
...
that much
in that anner
in that maaner
ke that
therc
that very
that

lots of, heaps of

thiag, mattet

south
palace
dtawer
class

EqT
EqFT
<{t

sight, vision
decade

({
<T

ten
Dasain festival

ETT

tetth
yoght

qt(

tooth
elder brcther

<\RT

frrev@d
elde brothet

?Ts-{I

elder btuther
bad
pnce

to Pay
they, those
ti ee

to frnd out

firfr

daY of a mon
in e Wesl,em
calenoar
door l@k
.
caa
sze(Middle)

tiedress
to add, efrll
tamily nae
tofuEtitd
TDar(anedmic

qI *

to joke
place

dcrs

head

distant,f
ticket, postage stamp d
to pick up

rey
to prepare

++'

accommodaon

tl

you (High)

hot
Tamang (at
etbnic group)

dntn

!-+
erT

dcr
i rt

EII

<c
EFT
EFNTTi

<r-6rt

lentils
Ientils and ice
fir^eral cemony

q ||

neht

aftemoon, daytime
elder sister
day

fu{rrft

1 {r
S{er

to glve

trqfrTdffi

egious adhercnt

dianh@a
two (with tronhuman
nouns)

I{
qTt

$owng ice

tt/to

Sin
(:
{ET
S'11

5'1El

<u
{i<sr

double-baftelled
sness, pain,
ttottble
sad,sufrering
to hutt
thin
bidegtam
bnde
both

{fII

mik
Indin telesio0
servrce
view

{qfr *

to show

-tu

cT *
|{
*f{T

from, since
to b seen,Lre
visible
to see
left
husband's
younget bothe
god, deity
goddess

ffi
ffi
s{
- t ( l

rfr
q< qrq *
trF{r<
trq

@nty
crosjlDad.s
second
to n

rq q t\!rl

watefsottce
FqIr
!-s
{qqrq
q

*fr
s"rr{{ *
r4fi

+RTT
R qr{fir

to wash
snoking
$noke
PomP, splendon
very, many
usually, mostly
waslrcnnan
to pay attention

negative paticle
frngemail
map
municipality,

T{

ivet
wod of geting
wod of geeting

qt
{qrd

utlpleasant

rFF

rrf{

rr(

bad
ninth
nose
citizei
grandson
gatddaughter

r(R
il+
qrsrqt *

elative
snall child
to make a proft

ich
to wotry
thank you

TIT

fr

name
you ktow;

egon,
ighteousness

ffirq.

v'hat about?
to take out, extract
well, lalthy

by

ffir

fr{t.

slf,.p,sleepiness
to decide

q{r flTsd *
qeqrq *
cFdd'r

cfr

leoD
invitation
to inuite

cc {fi-d

t+<rqr
{qfr'r
r-sq,t.

rule
without hope
Nivana

c{st{t
cfc{R
cql

to decide

--a

ffi

to emtge, ame out fu

ciT
blue

fr.fr

f4qrc *
fiq

soud

tow concil
close, neatby
othewise

Tf

'+t-

very, extemely
to press,squeeze
to fall asleap

itsT

to bathe

q(

salt

qr{ rT|cT

Newar (language)

ffi
crfrtnfi

Nepuli
Nepati-sryaker
neto
Nertar(an
ethnicgroup)
sednt
note
nine
butter
wam

{R

+
;TT

rfr
;qr
csTsl *
qFFT

cfu
-cfu

to cooK

ipe, frnn, prope

after,late
-

ceF

tun, time
not even a ttle

qIr{ *

to sencl

ccTT*
-M
c.

educated

qsd

Paidi; a traditional

to reacn
to ead, study

to llteve
nagazine
also,even
pop music
beyond, on th
other side of
tadition
family
to wait
to fall
tottrTst
festival
e day afrer

-.cS
Y
In

i'rnofrow
frthe
^ext,
htm, tfune
to e down

bathoom

scholar
to frnd out

rRtl
qnd

c{
cl
cr[qq
qqc

annd
west
shop

cq
T{rc
T{fS
cq'
cF{{r

hin
of the hill egion
landsde
peuiatsly, bef<m,

q{

tust

cq

yellow

I t rt

Yr s

ve
frfth
to be acquied,

ql-qlr

be available
plot

w{f

footstep, footpint

ro en@f

ago

!" -

9t l u5
g\Fr *

to take a step
pound
to get, acquire,
be able to,
manage to

srFrRrfi
IIFFT
TITTIT

qrg{r

Pakistani
to ipen, becooked
hillside

IIT6

uppet atm
,esso,

qr6 |F *

lo ,eate

qr-rc<r+
c|fr

q-qr.Fi *
W

crqr
f{
q Gq)

to woship
whole

smTq *
FfS

fii -noon day

east
ninth month of
the Nepali yea

r6q
5q-5d
SFT
5r{T
Ef-fi (FfdrjqD

to causeto etr/'t
to lean
pumpnn
fruit
to llowe

to tacase,

qnl

advance
lanp, ght,
electicity
!

fi-s

benefrt
ebventh monih
of e Nepali year

{<
4<44 *

to make, mend
sht

ICXIDOOK

IC

measueoI qu:Dty
o volume equal to

'{.r I

stomach
nmney; ot

Eq!*

to smash,
beak open

+<rdfr

cffr

eight mns
waler,ft n

9ll

hundtedth
ofone W
husbaDd

to shut
to be closed
cabbage

F6RR

ir<5

aangeEnas
gn

gI{ |Ft *

to cfoss

+q .

frdifu"

-crR

on thefa sideof
to naintain, foster
Deyatay,lttn,
dme

+
ct+ it .
9r

to bum
Iastyear

dppling
to give back

ffil-r*

to tske back

*n;t

to ar, keep

cqFF $
cqr!T

qFFT{q *
qrrTT

c|{+t
cE{r

--{.
ft-+|T{
fir{
fi

frc-{
fld.
c{--q{

'flqq

F.fT.T*

IO Une, txe oI

crqql

q<T

qffi

onton
pWle

5(<

ootball
spare tir@
egg

qtt

c|r

pogless

to lay an egg

4{TTiI

to drink
piciic

q!fl-T

to noweL

----J

back
penston

qqT 1

democncy
state
pime minster

qd
E;d
-

spicy
pipal iee

CIITRT

to wory, be
trobed

r{fr

oivestock)
passpot
gest

iiiFT

c{it

c-{frqFTr
sr*{

c{
q-qrfr

suffice
to arive
pmest

r.llT I

eigious meit
oId
alcestor

fifr

qqT

5d
rfkffi

rtkT

c{r

cfir1

wrA

to become
accoutt, des$iption
Btfra

to swrm
Iessone qarte
to pek

almost
to be eached
to be enough,

C"q

4< 6

cr;d
s|cq

frq

ftr+q-{

furr

lecfire, swch
plentiful
qtlstion
poce, poce ofrcer
IDce station
andent
pmvince
mostly, usually
to colmence
dear
dearpeople
love
love
girlriend

IfiT

s
!fiiT

s-{*fr

flT

Dtootl

owe
cutfitowe

sR
s
${.t -

tung
pno@gapn

qrQl
q|lr

iFR

{fi-{r

gaten

q I r!

iF;T

ro

qtq

aqt
dqr *

cnlla

-q t

,o pny a mustcit!
lnstunent

q rl
q tt

{qR

bazaar,Dtatketpla.

4T<4

aL.. o ctocK

qtq

ow

q-"

gandmother

{r

packet

noe

diffeece
aoeatm

qt

to make a phone call

qrq.
otty
itT
iIT<IT
qtq
nvetDanK

tuary
SI;T

qt(|l

to be fotnd

tuidge
book
geneation

qqt9

8trcng
eventually, at last
eventally, at last

{ft

ut
to board a bus
to move horr]@
settlement, village
to rcside, sit
down, stay
yonge sister
Ieft over,
maning
monkey
fathe
goat
Ager
tm, time
granather
from, by
tuad, path, way
cleve, smaft
cloud
Iittle boy
rcpeabdly
dry freld
saad

4RI

qrfr
qt{i

{16r
dr{d

m.
dr-{

childhood
+fr
Io.lCinC
e=.
tolodgeforanigtu <

valley fl<nr
to sell
time
time, occasion
Bitain, Endand

sate

q1|

outside

qmd

Bahmin
exceptfor, apart
fton

ag*
+q
+{

to spoil

iRTF{C+qfq)

to be spoiled,
go to the bad

evening
bette\ good
ba
fist mon of
e Nepali yea
to causeto caft /

.TF{
qftqr

to fr||

c.s{m

Tibet
Tibeto-Buman

!tsr
qr{

pot, vessel
yotnget Dromef
special day on
which wonen
and gils aloint

qr
rrnl

Tibetai
tomorow

qq

totr

entotmenr

lT|.frT

{e
+(|q
drgf .
d1
dq
+d

to be sp,ke.n
to speak
Buddhist

TR

d+t

busy
electicity
to sperd(time)
hoday,timeotr
work,leave
beer

Grrr.r I

b^ftery

ffi

mery, setoo
sick, ill

cr

+trgq *
d<r

unwelt

ffi*
'-r
- .
rc a l

8,*{.
f{qR
fl-q-dr{r
q I F{.1

rc lotget
to be forsonen
Dtscult
slowtY, catefullv
. :.
.'
we.Knng' nafige

oD the way, en ouE

'
to be nderstood
-

{q .

to understand
Wednesday

raaet
old man, husband
ora womn,' we

qtFIR
{6I

{+{r

mrrr+

qaqf.I

soybean
in

rfrc{rq
,--i
'|I{ rTffl
ll.l 19
rft

rc arry
moming

'i,uoai,

thmb
old, aged

bottle
to call, inuite

YE
_at-qr
-r{<f fir
-_L qET
_l<I
-I<.I d;
-rI.<I rI.
-<r qrFq
.t= '
qqfr
T<Ff

fifth moth of
e NePali Year
statement,utterance
bb said,
be calted

col
Pass'
han
beo, in ftont of
befo
below
tyond
allove
to say. tell
Cusloms
rccenay. Just now
as fat as possible

tc

rT.

unfotunate

ffi

hunger

TRi

q dd

fiIiFr
d{.

to carryl
tee

Td
ffi
dffiT{
rq.Irt

tfuoughout,frllng
poter
thiseveling
crltiilent,

eir broers
qls"{
qTIT
CI1

|Tl;sr-*r
qt-{
rrcq

{rfr
rmn
TF{!T

firE
firdr
fir-T
fir

tu{.
rr
q6
'tr
tFq

TIr{
{d
rTqIT

elder brother's
" wife
"".*
"':
Slrll. DOIAO

to run away.
'
escape
cooked ice; a real
kitchen
cook
Ina
Indian
load
latguage
speech,Iertute
to become wet
iateio wall
wall clock
within, iiside
to stap on
visa
crowd
gloutd
g@gaphy
Bhutaa
ghost
heaven on eah

arca, stict
m@ing, encounte

tld.

to meet
to frnd, I@ate

rr<

hMgy
geographical
AoJpui (language)

q
q

I
m,uze, com
Tuesday

.r!
q-frqqr{
cT{f'
-

^----%-3
fqFIsI$

eighth monlh of
e Nepa.li yea
keosene
meang
to help
Taai (region)

{q
qFI4

{{d lrf, *
qs
q.lf{RI

tidnight
tuid-

ft.qFr
.TTg
qiT
q-{ cIgI

midday
among
hea fiind

--9

qq qrt
IFFT *

to ke
to b liked
to want to
to celebnte
minisly
ministe

qrt

to die

qfgsf

touchiag, mouing
expensive

qanl
FRqgT
T{{

unpofiaat
palac
His Majesty the

+tQlrcqtqq
ctil

KitC
couege
onth

-gT
q
qr{d
qEi

qrq .
qTq
q6t
qT{ *

ct-"dcFn
qr, qri

crfu
qrr

crF{
crr
qrs tr{ *
c|fq1.
qTITT

qrcrrd *
qrqrq1 *
qT{
qTg{

cr@

fu-{

firot-i
fud
ffi
fir<fq

frarq *

qGT

fi

nodte
woma's natal hofie
mile
to askfo
tedth moth of
tlle Nepali yoa

frsh
to scaldb,scotr
tnotlld'r tongue
only
alxrve, up

!r5
It{

fir
{-rq
r&f
Tdr

{sr
rr
tkT

a measue:0.7

litres or 20 ounccs {
q(l
penon

heatt
bunch
measul of weight
o quatify equl to
20 pnthis
difficl\ difficulty
fool
ish
mouse
dee
det deceased
penon

penoo

qrqall

chai
tuy, me
Marftuti (lngage)

aoagr@, accepl,

+lrI

ditty

believe
to forgive

salvation,
deliveranca
fiotarca

IO IOfStVe

.llCl

tove, anecdon

.||al

to tove

+ q

aorcfgeaa mena
neat

.rQr. +rr8r(
qw

schoolmastat
saaond eldest
Ette

q( |

hee, in this

qk

diection
this much
Yet

sweets
hiend
rmnlte
very etly 1nme
thomtng
oafiange,
assenble,
acltrst, onng

frS

qT
W

main, principal

togethe, sort d)t

to come together,
o'actt,Dl,gauong
god-tsting
f&e, fiouth

qc I
.r+r9rrl
q(r I
q(l
qd
qEl
{
IRIFIIT
qtltl

q-<
firfi

fat
value pice
a half-mw
weaEt

this tinte
it this manner
in this fran^er
ke this
hetu
ight herc
tranq'o.n
tveller, pilgim
rcmory
.vle Mddle)

fi

{{fr
T{r
{c

*
d-d{r
{
ft
(ffi
{|k
(ITrd

{q 'rf .

they, these
youtg womal
yourrg man
this
pIn

qw
bI
olesanLeniovable
K' enlov oDese
sao'e oelitfie

(|q*

a male buffalo

(t!lrl+

cE\.at
political

(FFTFT

national hishwav
king
kingdom

{rq-Rcl

<r*
{r
<rY
(|:sFd

Rana
at night
td
queen
oka
gqto, Nce
must2ttl
nation
peslalen

. rQqr.rl

passpott

ft-+qn
ffi'
ft

ncKstaw

IT

hee
handkechief
particle indicating
that the
infonDtion
irnparted by the

a^d
colou

ai (emic FouD)
IO put, Keeo

(ft
(r
<rfr

awtte
to cry
fuw

Botupe

{TNT
{reT
(MT

q
{ftc

speakecomes
fiom nother
source
-^
(l
'''
{grT
rTF *
:
{re

to beanw
to stop
headcold
cold andcough

ndio
tan
nestattiltt
sr'It
to stop

r,

bread
the planting of a

aq *

cop
to plstlt

iT
a[tkr{FT
qqrq{ *

ere!
exhttsted
to pua on

iI!
q{{

ICe
garc

olrs

trc, queue
to, fo, at

-n I t
qTeT *
qlq
"ttql

tesofvaon
('eDr

qtr

aa,wean
arc hu!0dred
thosand
hundds of
thosands
to k felt, atrect,
seem,apply,
bgtn, cost,
take time be
imposeL hedfo,
setin

embaassmeit,

qr
qFl*

{rfr

ft.
frq

shate
satpid
to take away
long
ta ke
Ltr|u (etlmic
gtoup)

fdTm
f{qm
+qr+qc
r qlQ

Rq
f*r* gd
ffirrqq

fussqt*.

iT{T
iTrTT-5rI

clothing, clothes
clothes

4t{tTrr
qT{R
AIFF{IT

q.

by, becauseof,
due to
to u,/nte

ffi

husband

{r
EIiFT *

fi
4q

qqRr
ql
cQl

i{Frq
i{kFr{lT

man
Etal watet pot
thde! you s@!
to btil1g

fost
year
monsoa, tatn
s/e (IIi)
ight Ee
sentence

ATNI(

qrcft

behauiour
SntDntar
tade
tadq

{RF

nrle, egime

frffi
HT
rq{
ffi
frrErdq

teehet
edwation

qJF{r{

f+sr,rf, *

opinion
to considq,
think alrout
scieace

ITFTTq

{n

E||-ffr{

sdrr *

peak
''Jountzin
Shivarati festival
Shiva tefiple
sheld
Ftiday
gpod wishes
givea name

IFIT

b sn
to bgin
Se.pa (ethnic

rcfttga. tutgtw

rql

Coup)
wife

ffi

student

,,frqr{

husband

fq-qifc

school

fqq

fiT

aboad, t foeign
cony
to go abroad

lei

s{!T

wodd v'a

srd
qnk
sFr{

{[
q<Frqr

-$r

utivesity
to bew,
@cpaaon'ust

Utdy
city, town
vegetadan
peaceful
peace
ptaps

alospherc,
envionment
day of the week
wallet
ealy, acta y

.{I{

aiport
Ioneliness
spedal, panicalar

century
Safitday
wod

srt-r
sr
{T{r{rt

l"ilrTl *

departEnt

nisht

$r{qqt

qs1 *
rsfi
{:I
s<f

SI'T

<sFri.
aq
(FIIT
ltqFT{

wtFlt< r
gTTTRT
{F{;I

wid,

Tqr{

togethet
tnusic

sfT

conservation
calenddcl etu
vorld
to frnish

rfr(f
+f-(ff.f I

qlrrrf,

cneapry

b help
tn

s+

ky

fE{

ousK

to help, to assist
easy
sieet, mad

+ff cln

cuntat

lTrg{(rq!r)

always
in good heal

{nt

offsping
dean
Jaccejsfu

foudh month of
the Nepali yer
gftens
fo excraUre(money)

ITI

Seven

srd
{rfi
sr

seventh
friend, companion

bicycle

{r< *

plus one half

clean
to clesl
all
level, |at
prcbem

*.flcfi

aews
newspaper
frnshed

lfsTr+F
{r3lI{{T

to remhd,
corsel
edita
ptxsibility
up to, as far as,
ntiI

{ii;rsr

wlle s pate,ltlt home

cDeap

to b able to
Mount Evest

memory
to emefibe

(Icd'rfr

plusonequae
f^fl

(l f 9 t

sTsl*

WI

iil

to setght to
advice

hoaow, eswt
hundted
govennnt

s
-

srq
{r
||Qql

{rs
qK
fl4

small
soap
luggage
Nepali uiolin
sar; a woma's
dress
yea
wife's yoiger
Jrser
thid eldest
teraturc
nchant; business
propriemt
telm usd to
ad&ss a
professional

govemmenl
futtsq *
(goooess)
Jattswad
t(|rt.
disaste
frtrq

ettetuely
to terch
gravely
Srklcm

frt.

to lea
with

FT t14 *
RiI

to ead

(.f(

volce

l8'q

fralld *

to frnish

f ({l -q (

ctDem a

gfT
qT

@tcTfr
lERtfr

frcl

soldier

T{

heaven
healthy
taste,Iavout

ftl 1rr*f.r llrrlr

gat n&

bordet

RrR
rF

bsry
healh

qTq

frqtr
I(.f I

Ezn

ltft

fr(rfqr

snes,scquence

tqftf-q

-e
T

seat
dectly, staight

{frr{

Ptg
to snifr. sieu

fr

fu*.

s-s
w
{6
gsrE
qFT

w+6r
,q.

e sound ol the
wind

a quEr

ntDe

happv

<fr
{f{d
{ddr

w*

$tur

gc-Tr

=.

RC.
s
r*r<
*rrr
cfil

Me

eautiful lwoman)
to be heardN auDle
ofatae
-:
..
aott , a en
seaure.Dro,t{ted
:
c(mvemence
, ..
wtut
to c-ooldown
to think
.
u, aaK
soIl
Mondav
,-- ,scnoot
estabshment

.
.
sltuaaon.
citcmstances

we
woman

flq,r{

FT
B!R

ight?, isn't that so?

thousand

Q! l |

thousandsof
9tr,yes

6q(
liq (7

q ( q tr t I

Wdon?
graadrbtlre

J*.'

gandfaher
stike
hut ,
hrry
w*k

+."
i:rQqli

slQr q

q lq
r ttq
l
Qls
r
I{.Iq
FlFFr'
i::
gr qt .gt .

to b lost
geet
every
aeroplane
o d.!ve (a vehicle)
tu $nile,lagh
DoJs
atone
hand, arm
lrards and face
hannfrtl
we

QCt

OUr, OUIS

l^ lq q '
l
fC
t6\!
=

D ew s

It{r
f.FT

f'S'

ffi
@

sueeestion
l
rc Jeep: e dowa
S::
Q('
a"*oo
6( lt(
en oE, very distant
<l
to Elate. tell
-]
6(l{t'1

beautirl

to walk, set out

to bathe

wind, air
snow

yesteday
to go o foot

well-wisher
Hitdi
Hindi-speake
Indian
Hindu
the Himalayas
HituaIayan

mud
to add up

A(r

qrs q{
{

t*
E rrl
Qrc q

srrt,.

ir

afiod
post office
to b
to look
shott-statued
hotel
to be careful
do you heat?, OK?
cholea

@l
L_J

bidgc
5d
qqf
bring
bmther,elde q-g
brotheryoungerqf
rfr
buffalo

m
5

bus
bu8station

GI
I
II

a
I.

z
o

ttq)

about(time) -ffi
aDou(quurory, {q
abroad
{
acque
cl31
qwr{
dvic
ds

twr{fu

GI
I

o
@

a
q)

vides
punu
sall
6e[h
dhu

afrer

-cfu

-pochi

aftemoon

q\t|r

tul|li('

age

g{

umer

ago

q, qtt

I
-t

-frrr
krrra
bag
bangle
bank
becoDe
befoE

q{rd,;r(I kh|rb,
ntimo
sfi
Jhor

c
boik
bannu
-tr<rqfu .bh&d

T<r
+{
qa

aChl
De$o

*-l

1!.r1.

tuu
gaDu,

"eU
pahile

$fl
q1], qiq

u|l
hunu

airporr
alcohol
all
allow

flaqr;efq
T{fr
F{,q
t

ridtrd
rakli
sab,sbi beef
din
below

tala

always

sadhqi

biC

6-

angry, to be

fts]'lT

risunu

blck

{r

thiito
kjilo

anyone

{
kohi
qfg
syu
ITr{,3{rt{ pugnu,
ipugDu
{{
sodhnu
sf, q{rIf Chani,

blue
board(vb)
boil (vb)

ffi
T
gRt

book
bom,to be
boy
Brmin
brea

ffdlq
q.q1

apple
amve

ask
at home

ghafD

hgnu,

buy
rpitl
crrdj
ccn[al
chrir
c|ap
ilen
Chineee
cholera
olgattt
clty
clsss
clcan
olve
cmb(vb)
clos

4{T
{ffI{gFf

+cr
lq{
s.fl

vtYgs

nib
cadhnu
ulr atru
kitb
jlrmaDu
ke
bhur
phodnu

cr!'
cup

ST
6rT

rutru
krp

daughter
day
daybefoe
yeterdy

bfr

chori

tq

dln

i{fia

blsa||ni'

decide

tdlqi

ai
ni(o
grrou

ftf
(rqtlrfr

kinnu
qjiirhni deiry

qT

madhya

diaroea

q
q(d|

mec

difficult

qqEF

boocha dlty

apFyro
Eailo

tq riqt

cuuya

otsanr

err

tsdh

Qo

nqra

ooo

T.
sr{{

c|rml

dowil

fi
q t!

dhok
ooto

oba

dink

eq,1q

nanra

Fqr
q6I
qm

ksks
ssph diver
calk
dry(vb)
cChnu
bola
each

sR
{<qt

s03to

CTTNC

cook(n)
cook(vb)
corner
cough
country
cow

fffr
.||Qir.
qgqr

rs
g||ro,

piu[u
grT(
g{gd

{ribhar
erkunu
hanek
sajilo$cr
porvs

kapoCa
luCa
ciso
jdo

T
qqfr*t
easily
eit
Tf
(|q
easy
eat
E
embarrssmll;lI

g
unu
bh||se
pkutru

empty
English
evening
Evercst

(|RqFI

qrd

kuna

exam

qf{

jc

ffi
<sT

khoki

expensive
eye

l(i
qqr

rnahgo

de6

tr

gA

ganu
cloth
clothes
old
coldnss
coou

devat

d tr

h5ltru
lqvql(

pul
lyutru
di
bhi
bhaii
bos
bes

ip

ffi
t{
qr\FI
cr<I
CFgT

f=T
,-q
g-q"-,

ssiilo
ldrnu
lj
io
gFej
belul

kh

tq, sr{{t{ mub

aDuhi

gleo
guest

QPq

Dtnyo

q-{r

phun

Indian
Inside
Intesng

lTt(frq
-fr
qTqF

bhrstlJa Monday
.bhitra
money
rLlgdo mo h

Japnese

{rel.!r

Japafl

molner

lob
joumey

{llrlr
qfi{T

Jg|
ytra

motor.'r

faoily

Yrq rr

family name

q{

farmer

t{r{
{
T{r. EI

dsnn
moo
buv.b

1, dit

he Mddle)
Car
khet' bn- head

TI

field

ld

auko

Kathmaodu

mCf

6nd

C3d

pn|lu

{q

ntgh

xcy

Hrrt I

finish

ftEsT:s-t Cdnr hea4to be

ldlogrfime

cF{df
FtrTI;
qff,Tfd

{fu
rrqr
---s

suninu

fist
lrght
food

garD

q<dd

mad|t
gsru
yah

fal
father
fear

foreigne
forger
Friday
fiiend
from
ftir
cdresh
German
get
gbee
elft

p a n v

morflng

pahilo
vietD
khn,
bht
fc{fr
v S
fr
bissnu
6u}r!vr
Tf{r{
qffr
sthi
-fu, -sr dethi,
sFrd
.r$
qf
CISE
fu6
3F{r',
+fr

gl

nl

grve

161

qE
go
god
{dr
good
t*
granddaughterIffr
gadfathe
SC4
gadmother T-{rqr
qTk
gandson

-bta
phstpht
Ca[
jran
punu
ghiu
upahr,
koceli
keg
dinu
jnu
devet
mo
nftiDi
hqiuM
hqirni
n5i

happiness
he (Hish)
beo-.ow)

headcold

heat
help
here
Himataya
holidy
home
hop
hot

q.fr
{
S

s-

fislr

h||||5hya
bid,
u$
ghr

rr, (|rr

g8m,

qlqq
fl,
tf{

horel
{
qqT
hou
tl.{
house
howmch? sifrt
how,Iike whar?fr5 ?
how,in what
rnamer?
(t?
T{
huager
hu
husband

I
ir
Irdi

khi
vah

q
,frq{, ffi

-.1|
tr(fl

fqr
qrqT,qT

bthiina

nmrlll
mi, m
mem

k0m{

name

;n

nm

ssco

neaDy

.||q.n

nqlrra

ko

ever

s@ cfr kah yat

Kng

ffi
r lql

knowledge

cr

thiih

new

rrqr

Pani
Dtya

newspaper

3fqrR

akhb

hnguage
h8t (prvious

lFI

bh|

next day

*f{c-.z
(t+iI

bholipotl
r nro

wc!k)

3{q

asd

night

(t t(

ttr

ltll o/ea)
hst (fiml)

'{r8rr
q{q

pol|or

norr

g|t

antim

novel

hr!

Chilo

now

q<

ahr

nowadays

roJa

nice

ffi

cthi

llquor

affi

rolsi

o'clock

ShaSts
gh
k ?
krsto

llv

Eq

barnu

office

lodge

{.t

lqi

tondon

iI!-ST

lo{.

<rgt

krsai
bhok
dukhnu
$nntq
logDe

mD

-t t.-q r.t9 logDe-

motr

uttar
3qRI
upnyas
tF6,e-+ atrite,ab
f5rflq
lqio{
b6je

official

{
tt!D*t
qfrIfrft

laSC

old

r(rr

pultlo

hsunu

open (adj)

khul

open (vb)

Cqr
dq

opuon

tqqt(

vlct

aptrls
atlhikd

kholnu

dherai

onde

Tdf
Trgd

mrkct

qqR

sutrl
rnu

bqi

ou

Qr{r

l|a|l|o

nry

fu{r,{

biha

outside

nttt

bhira

gemu
msu
bhetsu
mil

owl

rfl9r

aplltro

packet
passport

{r
crs+t

bo
ppot

mny

Ibut
-mA

po|sa

my

htt!

bhat

somv

r 4i
q(

tto
hoFl

q mr

tl tq t(

9*||
.t ri I

toot
||Ir0

ITRT

rt6T
qrr

Dimhe

ornge

pen
poPle

lfinFI
qt-<J

Pe$ol

q l.,

phone

\l

l||x)tr

pick up
plce
pll

s6lv{

hr
pt||

drm
sr{
hrl

org

ice (cookeo rn-{

ric(utrcookeoq[{q,
dch
{'fr
qfi,

Qcri qQrq [w

bhna
ctDrf
dhrri
kholi,

n&tr
road
noom
ruIree

kehi
|olt|o(thing)
+
kobi
tonrbody
rf+r krbilc
tofirti!!s

qr

bts

5r
at\.

ko
nDryt

tor
fong
touh
lpo*
6 6

*tr
play

ll|y
ftight
a[rnge

Polara
polic
policest tion

f6t fftf

pralrrl

POO

lrfl-d

thln
goI|A

post o'ffce
potato

qrfiq{

qlg

il
poupd

tss{,
fr-
FteTt

upohr,
kcctr
roDrEyE
pyqF

pond
pent

Foblem
pupe

qrfr

prafoe

que$ror
quit
qte
arn

Er*!
qR
gtil

eached,to be gfir{
re3d
r{d
rc@lve
Crq
r<({
cendy
qRrcqf
rst
tEsE[lta
rEtum

hul&
gb

w
"fr

chi4nu
rli
Prtr|
Fgltru
po{hn
Dn|l
bhrrthrr
&{n
gatrru

$ay
school
serch
soc
se!,to be
srd
e (Iidr)

ll-T

qq
Sq

hostel

<q
sfu{
C6|q
{d
s
sfr
Ffq

eorw)
sbe(Middle)
Shiva
shoes
{r
(RT
shop
since
-fu
rnq
sing
sist(elder

sister,lounger aF6fr
$ser--raw rfl\rc, tEr{
sleep
deep
slo!,ly
smol(e

shf
kholu

ffi

KJ
<t
Aa<q

Ftt

$o({L to De

rrl\

plllnnu

sore uroprc,

nrl

rtclinu
pqhftmu
Yah

tri
Sya
ju

6tr
fi
ek"r
q
R1

sq
frEr
q-d

d|
bohltrI
l'|utuu,
bu5ri
Didrn

sit
&l$
bob
boliou

bryle

btbtv
bhot
r.l
be4
s8rtrry
thakit
qtr
bhori
porystsk

touist
towads

trtr

grrti

TV

qtE(|qt(

atll!9tt

twrce

<cfi

-drs
nxng|r
F i'
rturpotsr

f-5
fir

|rro
nfrfi

umbrEll

6kIT

rt

c.t

pu"

*
aqrffi
r9.,||
fsltrr
lrd
r||qrrr'!

bll off

D4,|rrou

saphtl
.k sit

h8ty

khlnu
bhiitru
koDr-

Qqr(r

f{{rt

qT,qcq

*fr
c{{
-fd{
cFqR
.S.

FfrlC
qr

yo

tomcow

bl otr
bll

bachr

ftrh

qr

p0htru

phuliltru

G.

lll||||tru

frqf

chilbvs

tr
ru

ruhr
uEtirl
cura

srQe

C-
(rFt

g<
ft

trxi

rhey
thiFt
rtis
rhousands
Thusday
Tibet

6lfF{g

lihdru

hkc

r|sa
qo
ty

il+F
ffi

3Ffg16

ubb

Es
i
ile

bosru
ticket
tim
sidhn
aDa4ho
tdrc,ss
sstak
ynyartm--today

pr6ol
de*hi
giuntr

khi
choi

tenth
rhr
rherE

{FE{

ltuesday

rFR
qr.(

undersand gq
unAasmo4o*gfel
udveGity

F-flqq

bqihtru
bqibh
vffva-

ylryr

until

-{[sT

up to
phill
usually

-ET

fl|trnrr

sgb
nio

s{rd
iq

ukto
.crsi
jaro

aq/t
'Jmi
lL{ak
lsnnu
gax

valley
vetables
very

s\qr
irqd'ffr
t

ql&yaxa

geru

village

.ll\

gAU

mandir

olin

sRfl

s5lrry-

.eutrmt

torf,rn._
dhrrt

visit
vorce

Erd

jr|t

s,{

ko?

tri(r,

flrrq,

(qtfl

ltv8ll

prdhsn witrdow
dhru
tch
i
worrun
g|tr
wolt

qq

Jhr|.I

++fr

botsr-

qrqr

itud

t.t

xtm

{rrrr;f

tim

<rqt

cno

fl,ar

wall

qsT

wash

qi

waeman
wsf.h

sfr
{&

walcr

crfi

ptul

rfr

hirDr-

wear
we{(

qrq

qqc

hDu

whoce?
wife

8lr[u
woEy

wek
well

{KT
{nr0

rru!n
hdbv
hrEtl
n

we

l|trr

lllqm

yar

wt
wht?
wheo?
wr?
wtib
whole

fi{ffi
f
frl
ffr

hqaro
kd
krh[ef
krhi?
so
ptu5,
pIri

yellov
yestrday
yer

gF{R

f{r,ft

glrr
pqF

wotship
wdte

fq
+q
q, cf
q

sd, v{a
poHo

rQqr

4p

hlhtru

ERsq rme.
A.|IttrTI

you(HiSh) wt
youo-ow)
if
you(Mtufdb) ftfr

t"85fi
6
tui'